Silver Sands 1965

BROWARD COMMUNITY COLLEGE LIBRARY

3 3301 01039143 4

1 : ■(

Digitized by the Internet Archive

in 2011 with funding from

LYRASIS IVIembers and Sloan Foundation

http://www.archive.org/details/silversands196566juni

^ 4'

/

N

EDITOR'S NOTE

J7

This is the first of the four issues of the
Silver Sands yearbook-magazine. Historically
speaking, it is a milestone in the annals of
the Junior College of Broward County's cam-
pus publications. Journalistically speaking, it
is a grand experiment, for the success or
failure of this magazine will be the deciding
factor in whether or not Broward Junior Col-
lege will lead the way in this type of publi-
cation among the fellow junior colleges of

this state, or return to the standard, tradi-
tional yearbook. We, the Editors and Staff
of Silver Sands, are trying our best to achieve
success in this experiment, but only you,
the students, can be the true factors in
either our achievement or defeat by your
acceptance or rejection of this publication.

Most of this magazine was compiled during
the summer terms, and certain students who
wrote for us are no longer at the Junior Col-
lege. All through those months, we had dif-

ficulty in finding available writers and staff
members to fill our positions and, in some
cases, the editors, themselves, found it
necessary to author articles in order to fill
page space. We are, nevertheless, proud of
this magazine and sincerely hope you will
share our enthusiasm. In any event, it will
be you, the students, who will pass the final
judgment on this publication. Success or
failure; the decision is yours.

John E. Leatherwood
Editor-in-Chief

STAFF AND ADVISORS

Editor-in-Chief John E. Leatherwood

Assistant Editor Pamela Eciwards

Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley

Feature Editor David Byrne

Art and Photographic Editor Lewis Alquist

Sports Editor John Wolfe

General Staff Assistant Carol Shafer

Photographers David Porter and

Norman Summey
Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes

Chairman of the Division of Language

and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter

COVER: Sunset over the campus of the Junior College
of Broward County; photo by Ed Maxwell.

:r

SILVER
SANDS

The Junior College of Bromard County

TABLE OF CONTENTS

t«».

THE NEW LEFT Barbara Glowaski

EULOGY FOR A COUNSELOR

(Short Story) Dr. Jack D. Taylor

CAN DREAMS FORETELL? Greg Oliver

DIGNITY (Essay) ...,^..... Robert Greve

THE FRESHMAN ,««»i.S|pik Sharon Roesch

WHY THE CHOICE Thomas Robinson

THE REFRESHING RAIN

(Essay) Jeanette Machinske

ODE TO A FEMALE OCTOGEWABSAN

(Poetic Essay) David Watkins

CHEATING ..^a.^...^.. Pat Hart

ANN'S REVIEW ^■Admr:^'Ann Bardsley

THE MOON CURSE

(Short Story) John Leatherwood

ON CAMPUS

(Selected Cartoons) Various Cartoonists

MISREPRESENTATION

(Poem) Margaret Mary Brown

fort Lauderdale, Florida

Robinson

6

9

10

U

IS

16

18
19

22

23
29

30

THEY MOLD ACHIEVEMENT April Rol

SPORTS AT JCBC Jack Cresse

NEIL S. CRISPO Mildred Edwards

THE SAB Mildred Edwards

007 DOESN'T LIVE HERE Pam Edwards

EXCERPTS FROM A EUROPEAN SUMMER

Judith M. Rehm and Barbara J. Clark
GUARANTEED ... TO TURN YOU ON

Pam Edwards

THE FRESHMAN RETREAT John Leatherwood

THE ADMINISTRATION AND FACULTY 52

HOW TO STUDY George F. McCall, Jr. 61

SHINE BRIGHT, PALE MOON

(Poem) Jarrett C. Pharr 62

THE RAMPAGE OF BAFFLING

BETSY Ann Bardsley 63

THE ISLAND OF JAPAN

(Selected Poetry) Tom Tohtz 64

OUR FEATURED WRITERS Back Cover

THE

NEW

LEFT

;4 2cUc& ^<Mn4€ ^^ 'Pcc&cttfA

FOR 25 years, the college cam-
puses across the country were
politically quiet. Except for
a brief spurt of Conservative reac-
tion to the New Frontier, the col-
lege student showed little political
interest. This is no longer true.
Suddenly, as if out of nowhere,
has come a rebirth of political ex-
citement and interest by collegi-
ans that has been termed "The
New Left." The New Left is a
movement of the young. It borders
on radicalism and in some organ-
izations is communistic. It is vital
that the college students of our
nation know what it is, where and
how it got its start, and where it
is going. For in our time, not only
does the future but also the pres-
ent belong to the American youth.
If only for this reason, students
and parents must inform them-
selves of the truth about the New
Left.

BY BARBARA GhOWASKI

Illustrated by

Tom Oliver

and

John Leatherwood

Activity of a political nature by
college students which had an ef-
fect on American political life was
first manifested in the 1930's. The
result of the Great Depression
was the loss of confidence in the
American economic system by a
substantial number of citizens, es-
pecially among the intellectuals.
In their dissatisfaction, they
turned to the Left, hoping to find
the panacea. The recognition of
the U.S.S.R. in 1933 focused furth-
er attention on the Left. The un-
fortunate result was the formation
of a coaUtion between intellectual,
but naive, liberals and the Com-
munist Party and its front organ-
izations. This became known as
the "Popular Front Movement" of
the 1930's.

College campuses expressed this.
They were boiling over with fads,
ideas and stunts which fermented
a protest against parents, deans.

and more than ever before, the
world situation. Students huddled
around the radio listening to Roos-
evelt's fireside chats or Hitler's
frenzied rantings.

They picketed factories and tried
to organize university janitors.
They burned Hitler and Musso-
lini in effigy and formed the Vet-
erans of Future Wars. They dem-
onstrated, paraded, and sometimes
landed in jail. Radicals, pacifists,
socialists, communists, and liberals
were everywhere.

The main theme of the 1930's
was a liberal attitude towards, and
a tolerant view of Communism.
These were the years of the "Share
the Wealth" movement of Hucy
Long, the old-age pension move-

Mme '65

ment of Francis Townsend, and
the violently nationalistic, anti-
Semetic, inflationistic, and some-
times socialistic propaganda of the
"radio priest" Father Coughlin.

In the 1940's, college students
were too involved in World War
Two and in the fight to save the
world from fascism to be inter-
ested in picketing and parading.

The "Silent Generation" was
the name given to the students
of the 1950's. These were the se-
rious students who, due to the
interruptions of World War Two
and the Korean Conflict, were be-
hind in their academic plans.
They had not come to a univer-
sity to play at politics or to be
intellectually challenged by the
outdated theories of Marx. They
came to learn and to get an edu-
cation.

IN the 1960's, there was a re-
vival of Conservatism. It was
a reaction to the New Frontier.
But its growth was stunted when
Barry Goldwater was defeated. Po-
litical action in the Young Repub-
lican and Young Democratic clubs
exists, but it is not as vocal nor
as imaginative as the Far Left.

Today's college generation is
faced with a movement that had
its quiet beginning with Fidel
Castro's victory in Cuba in 1959,
and with the first student civil-
rights sit-in in Greensboro, N.C.
in 1960. It was not until the sum-
mer demonstrations of 1963 that
the face of the movement became
public. And it is not until now
that the truth about it, along with
its dangerous potentialities, is be-
coming known.

The college student is very
much concerned with the present.
He feels that he does not have
to be overly concerned with the
future. He is more sophisticated
than his predecessors, and yet is
exceedingly self-conscious. He has
little faith in either of the two
parties, although there is a ten-
dency to try to work for changes
through the liberal wing of the
Democratic Party. If the political-
ly motivated student, whose key
words are action and personal
commitment, cannot find what he
is looking for in die legitimate
major parties, he must turn else-
where.

Some of the students are turn-
ing to the New Left. At tables
on university campuses through-
out the nation, students are sign-
ing up for trips to Cuba, picketing
churches, businesses, public and
private projects, demonstrations
against segregation and for other
j)opular causes, and parading in
front of the White House. And
this is happening more and more
as students are becoming politi-
cally aware.

Although the New Left is a
small minority, it is vocal, active,
and growing.

The New Left is a loose con-
federation of socialist and com-
munist organizations. It got its
start with the tremendous student
interest in the case of Caryl Chess-
man. Despite some feehng that
he was innocent, Chessman was
executed in California's gas cham-
ber on May 2, 1960, for kidnap-
ping.

Then came the Castro take-over

in Cuba, the civil-rights sit-ins, the
student peace mo\'ements, and the
rioting and demonstrations against
the House Un-American Activities
Committee. And so a movement
came into being. Students realized
for the first time they could par-
ticipate in a social revolution.

The New Left manifests itself
through peaceful demonstrations
and picketing, through distribution
of literature, through unsanctioned
trips to Cuba, through sit-ins,
through lie-ins, and through sleep-
ins. They demonstrate against ra-
cial discrimination, against the
war in Viet Nam, against the rules
regulating sex, against high rental
rates in Harlem, against Barry
Goldwater, against the House on
Un-American Activities Commit-
tee, against nuclear testing, and
limitations on the right of free
speech. The adherents of these
ideas have formed clubs, leagues,
and associations which maintain
full-time staffs. The propagation
of the ideals and goals of the New
Left is a vocation in life, to some
as religious a vocation as the
priesthood.

THE young revolutionaries are
in agreement on three major
goals. One is "freedom now"
for the American Negro. Thou-
sands of these radicals joined with
the NAACP and SNCC in Missis-
sippi, Alabama, and Florida to
march and picket for the equality
of the Negro. The second goal is
that the United States should re-
treat from Viet Nam and stop
fighting "revolutionary socialism"
throughout t h e underde\clopcd
world. They feel the U.S. is inter-
fering with the revolutionary proc-
ess. The third goal is one of a
longer range. The New Leftists
want the United States itself to go
socialist, or at the very least, to
organize a new democratic society
from the grass roots up based on
a planned economy.

A latent sub-conscious goal is
self-expression. These \oung peo-
ple feel strongly the need for self-
expression and the unburdening of

parental repression. They look for
this in these radical and contro-
versial organizations.

The New Left is a conglomera-
tion of splinter groups which ha\'e
very little formal connection \\'ith
each other. The largest and most
influential is the Students for a
Democratic Society. It is largeh'
non-communist and intellectual. It
belie\'es in community organiza-
tion and effort, and is opposed to
leadership by an "Establishment."
While it is non-communist, it ob-
jects to the "unreasoning" and
"paranoic" nature of anti-commu-
nist sentiment in this country on
the grounds that it weakens free-
dom, restricts debate, and inhibits
action. SDS leaders talk about the
development of new institutions
and new organizations, and of
new forces to work the social
changes they seek. They have not
as yet come up with a specific
program. They staged the suc-
cessful March on Washington in
which more than 20,000 students
participated on April 17 of this
year. Currently, the organization
has about 2,500 members on more
than 75 college campuses. Since
SDS is the largest of the radical
organizations, it is obvious the
membership of the New Left is
still rather small.

The most far out of the far-left
is the Progressi\e Labor Party. It
is considered to espouse the Red
Chinese line. At its recent con-
vention in New York, it an-
nounced, "Americans in the ghetto
streets will not go along with thej
gas chamber plans of this coun-
try's ruling class." The PL? de-
clares that die people's needs re-
quire revolution, and that it will,
be prepared to wage the struggle
on whatever forms and levels are
necessary. Members played a large
part in agitating for the Harlem
race riots last summer. Actually,
some of its members are simply
rebelling against society hi gen-
eral. Started by two Communists
in 1962, the PLP is reputed to
have in its possession a letter from
Communist China declaring that

this organization is following the
"only true Line" of socialism in
.America. It has a growing mem-
bership of about 1,000.

The Young Socialists Alliance is
the young and militant arm of the
Trotzkyites. They are Marxists
who think Russia has been "de-
mocratized" and "bureaucratized. "
Thev organized the unsanctioned
trips to Cuba. Until his death,
.Malcolm X was one of their he-
roes, along with Fidel Castro.
Since its founding in 1962, it has
never signed more than 1,000
members.

have a membership of close to
1,000.

It would not be fair to call the
New Left a Communist front. It
is not like the "Popular Front" of
the 1930's. Yet, there is no deny-
ing that the Communists ha\'e
played a part in the advancement
of this grass-roots movement. The
degree of the commitment depends
on the organization. The Students
for a Democratic Society do not
have the Communist control that
the DuBois Clubs have, nor do the
Communists have the same degree
of influence in it. The New Left

THE \V. E. DuBois Clubs,
named for a founder of the
\AACP who became a Com-
munist at tJie age of 93 and died
soon after in Ghana, is the closest
thing to a \outh mo\ement among
the traditional Communist Party-
U.S.A. Alongside the PLP and the
YS.\, the DuBois Clubs are almost
moderate and their leadership in-
cludes non - communist radicals.
They prefer to call themselves so-
cialists but the over-all organiza-
tion is unquestionably in the hands
of the Communists. J. Edgar Hoo-
ver, head of the F.B.I., has identi-
fied the DuBois Clubs as a Com-
munist youth group. Located in 35
clubs throughout tlie country, they

does not feel itself threatened by
communism, and is, in fact, ac-
commodating with it. Therefore,
the Marxian threat to this nation
cannot be ignored. All of these
groups have adopted some of
Manx's program. This is the real
danger.

Why this turn to the left? Why
this sudden resurgence of political
activity on the campus'?

One reason is the emergency of
John F. Kennedy. This college
generation was in high school
when he assumed the office and
powers of the presidency. By his
stirring challenge to go with him
to "The New Frontier" and his

espousing of Liberal ideas anc}
methods to "get this country mov-
ing again," President Kennedy
captured the imagination of the
students.

When he was assassinated in
Dallas on that tragic Friday in
November, the collegians felt his
death very keenly. As flags all
across the nation flew at half
mast, the American Youth felt as
if a close relative had died. Three
out of five students queried in a
Newsweek pool said that they felt
the Kennedy years to have been a
special time. Some of them went

THE second reason is the stu-
dents have been encouraged
in their turn to the New Left
by dieir college professors. Using
such methods as teach-ins, the col-
lege professors, who were tlie
radical and left-leaning students
of the 1930"s' Popular Front Mo\e-
ment, have in some cases, espe-
cially in the Berkeley incidents,
strongly encouraged political dis-
sent and demonstrations.

The third reason is the intel-
lectual appeal of liberalism. The
philosophy of Karl Marx and Fred-
erick Engels still attracts some of

on to say, "he made the young
people of today feel that life was
worth living," and "he was an
ideal man for someone of my gen-
eration to follow." According to
the students, he made politics
seem an attractive profession. He
returned to it some of its lost
honor and added to it his own
special style. The Massachusetts
statesman appealed to the youth
of the nation and was able to com-
municate with them as no other
American politician had been able
to do in a long time. The nation's
youth were attracted to politics
because of the style and brilliance
of this man.

those individuals who reason and
weigh everything intellectually.

The fourth reason is a form of
rebellion against the conservatism
of parents. Many of the leaders of
the New Left are graduate stu-
dents \\'ho come from the upper-
middle-class homes where politics
are conservative. In order to prove
their independence, they rebel
politically.

The final reason is the emer-
gence of the other-directed person
in the urban centers of the coun-
try. In David Riesman's The
Lonely Crowd, he defines the
model of the other-directed person
as a member of society whose
typical conformity is insured by

his tendency to be very sensitive
to the expectations and prefer-
ences of others. To this person,
tlie peer group and its opinions
are most important. Anxiety is the
mode of insuring obedience. Con-
formity is primary. The inability
of the child to take the roles of
his parents as his models forces
him to search elsewhere for them.
The peer group replaces the par-
ents in importance. In die peer
group, he can find acceptance and
a meaningful relationship which
satisfies his needs. In acceptance
by the peer group he finds his
purpose fulfilled.

In effect, in modern society,
when he pickets or peacefully re-
sists, he is accepted by his peer
group. When he does not, he be-
comes an outcast. The importance
of acceptance by his peer group
has been internalized in him by
his parents and by society. It be-
comes a subconscious but primary
necessity.

The most ironic aspect of the
New Left is that most of these
groups have been begun by inner-
directed persons. To the inner-di-
rected person, his goals and the
fulfillment of his goals in the
proper manner is the most impor-
tant thing. This also has been
internalized in die inner-directed
man by his parents and by society.
Only in this case, the parents play
a greater role. He enters politics
to protect what he has or to get
something he wants. Yet, it is the
inner-directed man who is the
moralizer. He has a greater con-
sciousness of self than the other-
individualist. The result is that
the inner-directed lead, while the
other-directed follow.

The movement of the New Left
has really just begun. Its success
or failure will depend on the ver-
dict rendered by this college gen-
eration. Will the future leaders of
the United States \\'ho are among
the college students of today ac-
cept and embrace the radical so-
cial ideas of the New Left, or will
they turn in another direction?
The choice is theirs.

EULOGY

FOR
A

COUNSELOR

By DR. JACK D. TAYLOR

Dean of Students
The Junior College of Broward County

ILLUSTRATED BY ALVA FULLER

THE little town of Testcor was all agog. After
all, wasn't its favorite son retiring from his posi-
tion as president of Major Motors to return
home to live his remaining years in Testcor?

To make the celebration more exciting this fam-
ous celebrity was scheduled to deliver the Com-
mencement address at Testcor High School. As an
added incentive H. I. Quotient was rumored to in-
clude in his notes some lauditory remarks about the
late I. Will Guide, Testcor's illustrious counselor
during Dr. Quotients years at the high school.
Quotient had always maintained that Mr. Guide had
influenced H. I. in his decision to attend college. For
this guidance H. I. was thankful.

H. I., also, credited Mr. Guide with masterful
direction in breaking down H. I.'s twin brother's
stubborn determination to attend college. Whereas
H. I. had resisted all efforts to persaude him to
matriculate to the University, L. O. Quotient had
doggedly persisted in such an endeavor. Both of
these attitudes had remained until Mr. Guide had

administered a Stanford-Binet Test to each with
overwhelming results of 195 and 95 I.Q.'s for the
brothers. Mr. Guide hypothesized that L. O. had
suffered brain damage from an accident or high
fever. Naturally, the teachers' marks substantiated
the standardized test results. When the boys en-
rolled in their classes, the teachers buzzed about the
differences in abilities. The teachers remarked that
Mr. Guide's data gave them more insight on how to
deal with each child.

Thus, H. I.'s speech was supposed to give the
beloved Mr. Guide credit for much of the eminent
president's success.

This success was predicted by Mr. Guide and
manifested itself with high marks, participation in
extra-curricular activities, and election to the major
offices in high school clubs. These hallmarks ex-
tended throughout college as H. I. continued to awe
professors with his brilliance. Even before H. I.
enrolled at Stigma University, he aroused a hubbub
with his phenomenal I.Q. With his amazing ability

and past record, H. I. passed most of his courses with
a breeze and, in some instances, he was excused from
his final examinations. No question about it — H. I.
"snowed" even the faculty at Stigma.

Meanwhile, L. O. acquired a position commen-
surate with his I. Q., janitor at dear old Testcor Higii.
Although L. O.'s contributions did not compare to
diose of H. I., he gained the distinction as tlie cus-
todian of the year in Aptitude County.

L. O. looked forward to H. I.'s speech with con-
siderable ambivalence. Being the brother of a famous
executive brought smiles to L. O.'s face; however.
L. O. always envied his brother's success. To base
his brother return to the scene of his own frustrations

blended misery and nostalgia to the festive occasion.

As H. I. planned his speech, he could not avoid
recollections of his successful days at Testcor. Be-
cause of his college record and amazing ability, H. I.
had bypassed the junior executive routine in favor
of a \'ice presidency in a small automobile manufac-
turing company, die Private Motor Compain. The
years were kind to H. I., and as the compan>' pros-
pered, so did H. I. Changing its name from Private
Motor Company to Major Motor Company, the
enterpriser became a leading producer of cars. H. I.
moved from tenth \ice president tlirougli the ranks
to first vice president and, finally, to president.

Of course, marriage to the chief stockliolder's

!

O rX^CP ^sipcaLoccocccx

^o_«

Of course, marriage to the chiei: stockholders
daughter did not impede H. I.'s march to this en-
viable position. Often H. I. thought that he would
employ L. O. in some capacity; however, what could
a man with an I. Q. of ninety-five contribute to an
enterprising organization like Corporal Motors, as it
was known during its period of transition?

Almost the entire town congregated to hear
Testcors favorite son. An air of excitement pervaded
the auditorium as the commencement exercise
approached. Mr. Ace Speaker, principal of Testcor
High, was extended the honor to introduce the hon-
ored guest. What an introduction it was! With a
I capacity for majestic oratoiy, Mr. Speaker extolled
"= the accomplishments of H.I. Quotient. Not a word
was mentioned about the less competent and ineffec-
tive brother. After the introduction the emotion-filled
citizens could hardly restrain their enthusiasm — in
fact a few scattered applauds dampened the dignity
of the occasion.

The main speech surpassed even the elocution
of the introduction. What a pity that I. Will Guide
could not hear the plaudits regarding his own accom-
plishments as a counselor of this gifted alumnus.
After he had mentioned his own great contributions
(in a matter-of-fact way), H. I. explained modestly
that this great genius would have been overlooked
had it not been for a counselor who possessed the
insight and perception to recognize this potential
prodigy. Being the only psychometrist with the back-
ground to administer the Stanford-Binet, Mr. Guide
was the only educator with the ability to recognize
H. I. as a genius and L.O. as an average pupil
with a capacity below the level to consider college
matriculation.

Just to emphasize the noteworthy guidance of
his former counselor, H. I. requested the cumula-
tive records of his less talented brother and him-
self. This would be the climax of his speech —
concrete evidence of Mr. Guide's professional coun-
sehng. With the two records in his hands, H. I.
Quotient, the eminent executive stated that he owed
his entire fortune, his entire success, his entire con-
tribution to the results of the single test. Also, the
same test had saved his brother from the frustration
accompanying failure in college.

To conclude his remarks H. I. exclaimed "I will
read you the I. Q. scores of my brother and me." As
H. I. opened the t%vo personal data cards to read
the wide differential in abilities, he stared at each
test score, paused, grew faint, and muttered, "Oh,
no!" — "Oh, no!"

cm

DREAMS
FORETELL

By GREG OLIVER

ILLUSTRATED by GREG OLIVER

It was three o'clock in the
morning when Judy, a Broward
Junior College sophomore, flapped
her arms and flew through the air.
She soared above the campus of
JCBC cutting off the heads of her
teachers with a great sword she
firmly held in her hand. At the
same time, on the other side of
town, Nick, a freshman, was
watching his own funeral being
conducted by men of the moon.

Both occurrences are very odd
ways for students to be spending
their nights but, though odd, they
are not at all impossible. The

above accounts were e.xperienced
during those somewhat common-
place journeys all of us take
through the mysterious world of
dreams. But what are those sub-
conscious visions called dreams?
What power do tliey have over
us? How valuable are they to our
lives? And, above all, can dreams
foretell our future?

According to Henri Bergson's
The World of Dreams, such
thoughts are the illusions of the
mind during sleep. The psycholo-
gists of the present day consider
dreams to be a valuable part of

psychoanalyzing the nature and
origins of a person's difficulties.
Sigmund Freud has taught that
dreams are not meaningless
thoughts, but are full of informa-
tion of great importance to the
dreamer. Judy will be happy to
learn that to dream of flying
through the air is an omen of
good fortune. To dream of car-
rying a sword signifies the posses-
sion of great power, and her cut-
ting off her teachers' heads means
an unexpected legacy will be left
to her.

As for Nick's dream, author

Henry J. Wehman says in his
Dream Book that if a person
dreams he is buried he will meet
with much misery, but if he
dreams of the moon, it foretells
delay in receiving money. With
such interpretations, it would seem
that Nick has a weary road of
misfortune ahead of him.

Mike, another JCBC sophomore,
often dreams about money. Weh-
man says, "To find money, mourn-
ing and loss; to lose money, good
business; to see it without taking
it, anger and disappointment; to
count it, gain." Marian, also a
sophomore, dreams of going ice-
skating in the nude. To dream
of nudity denotes pleasure with a
sorrowful end. Her ice-skating
shows she will engage in some
unprofitable undertaking.

Dick, a sophomore aviation stu-
dent, dreamt the night before his
first solo flight that he was headed
straight for the sun. As he was
going up in the airplane the in-
struments jammed, he couldn't
turn the plane or slow it down.
Dick will be happy to learn that
the dreaming of an airplane means

he will receive a large sum of
money. He will be successful be-
cause to dream of the sun por-
tends success in money matters.

"Night after night in my dreams,
my teeth continuously fall out,"
explained Pat, a freshman. This is
a warning to watch her health; it
is also a portent of financial diffi-
culties.

To dream of an automobile ac-
cident as Charlie, a sophomore,
does, foretells disappointment.
Helen, a freshman at JCBC,
dreams of snakes surrounding her
bed. This is a sign she will achieve
success as a result of hard work.
If a snake should bite her, she
will quarrel with a friend or
relative.

Did you ever dream of passing
botany with an "A" as sophomore
Emory does? It is unfortunate
for you as this accomplishment is
a warning that you will be let
down. Whenever Wanda, a fresh-
man, dreams, it is always the same
situation, with few exceptions. "I
always find myself in an old house
admiring the quaint beauty of its

age, when suddenly I am fright-
ened by something — be it a cob-
web, a basement or an attic." Au-
thor Leo Francis describes such a
dream in his Dreams and Their
Meanings. "It is a bad omen to
dream you are wandering through
an old house. In addition, if you
dream of fear you will be de-
ceived by someone near to you."

Are you among the many male
students who dream of being ship-
wrecked on an island with many
beautiful girls? It is a good omen
to the dreamer of girls for it
promises long life and riches. But
the dream of being shipwrecked
is a sign of ill-fortune. Whether
you or others are involved, it is
a bad omen for lovers.

Talmud, the Hebrew Bible, says,
"A dream which is not explained
is like a letter which has not been
opened." To understand their
meanings may give you an insight
into your future; by heeding a
warning sounded in dreams you
can often avert trouble. After all,
you could control your own des-
tiny. "To be forewarned is to be
forearmed."

0

By ROBERT GREVE

For Miss Patricia Kyle's

English 102 Class

OH what man is this that dares to define aes-
thetic universals with the cowardly words
which I write today? Be he a fool or be he
in Love?

But I say to them that question: if you have ever
felt humbled by the greatness of the sea, or by its
compassion, or by its violence; if your earthly
boundaries have been, for a moment, weakened by
the majesty of Beethoven, or by the beauty of Tchai-
kovsky, or by the simplicity of Strauss; if you have
been awed by the soul of a child, by its naive purity,
or by its trust; if you have felt love for your God
and His love in return; if you have played before the
moon and could yet face the sun; if within your
realms you have taken only the best and have done
without if the best could not be had; if you have
cared for yourself and not been vain; and if you have
done each of these things with deliberation and
moderation — then you will know what dignity is, for
it lies within you.

And thus it is, my friend. Whether you show
success or failure, if you have shown dignity, you
then will be shown respect.

10

• . • entlu4.6.iGA4ny de6yi^ and antidnatiO'it

. . . the Freshman year is a time of
learning and reaching toward a goal.

THE professors, administrators and students
who work within the modernistic buildings
of the college present a routine, a way of life, that
is almost totally new to the entering Freshman. The
faces are strange, the procedures are not clear, and
the atmosphere is adult and progressive. Although
he feels confused and perhaps even a little afraid
of failure, his enthusiasm, desire, and anticipation
mount within him from the moment he registers.
Hope becomes an integral part of the Freshman, and
everything he attempts is touched by it. This, cou-
pled with desire, enables him to overcome many
obstacles during the year, including his feelings of
frustration and lack of self confidence.

The differences between college and high school
range from the small complexities that baffle and

confuse the Freshman, to the large pitfalls that the
Sophomore has already forgotten. Sometimes it
comes as a surprise to the new student that it is
possible to attend classes on the same campus with
a friend and yet for an entire term never come face
to face with him. Class schedules all differ and it is
not unusual for a student to attend classes only on
certain days of the school week. It is a novelty for
many Freshmen to attend classes with students of
various ages. The word "Freshman" denotes no spe-
cial age but merely one in his first year of college.
Ex-service men, wives with families, or teachers
themselves may comprise a class along with upper
classmen. All are bound together by the quest for
knowledge.

Differences between college and high school

11

Class schedules all differ
and it is not unusual for a stu-
dent to attend classes only on
certain days of the school
week.

affect the Freshman in various ways. Sometimes he
revels in a new-found independence while at other
times he finds the adjustment difficult and has
trouble allocating time between studies, dates, and
a possible job. Learning that with freedom comes
responsibility is often one of the hardest lessons
for the college Freshman. Although he may have
come in contact with facts about college life be-
fore, it is still a jolt, pleasant or otherwise, to find
that no one comes to the student to direct him in
every move, every choice, and every hour of his day.
Bulletin boards, faculty advisors, and guidance mate-
rial are made available to the student, however, it
is up to him to keep himself well informed. Nothing
is quite the same as the desolate feeling that spreads
over the Freshman as he stands at the door of a
room for an interview, advisement appointment, or
testing, only to find that the deadline was the day
before and he has lost valuable time, contacts, or
money. Certainly he feels thwarted but, more than
that, he comes to the realization that only he is the
"captain of his fate and master of his soul."

The understanding that the success or failure
of his college career is entirely up to him is one of
the factors that matures a Freshman during his first
year of collegiate environment. The choices he
makes concerning classes, friends, and every aspect
of campus life will affect him in the future. The
first year of college is definitely a time of impor-
tant decisions, although it is seldom that the Fresh-
man realizes this at the time.

Studies are much more difficult in college and
no longer are academics a game in which a student
tries to see how little he can do during a term for

a passing grade. The Freshman encounters well
educated adults who are prepared for their profes-
sion. All have attained a master's degree and many
have received their doctorates. The instructors po-
litely address students correctly by their last name,
impressing them with the formality and privilege
of education.

The desire to be recognized motivates many
students during their first year in college. In the
higher institutions of today, where one is recorded
as a number and referred to as such for years fol-
lowing, the need to be noticed and accepted is great.
Often the Freshman finds that he is becoming inter-

In the higher institutions of today, where one is re-
corded as a number and referred to as such for years fol-
lowing, the need to be noticed and accepted is great.

12

**.— —

The first year of college is definitely a time of important
decisions, altfiough it is seldom that the Freshman realizes
this at the time.

ested in fields totally different from those of his
high school career. He may be exhibiting leader-
ship qualities that he did not know existed, and his
enthusiasm for activities on campus is great. Many
times the shy, reserved student comes out of his
shell in college, finding himself for the first time
unhampered by the group of classmates that he has
known since elementary school.

New to the Freshman are many facts and cir-
cumstances that he finds very difficult to accept. His
difficulty in accepting them may lead to disconcert-
ment and feelings of resentment, but it is part of
that maturation process known as college. No mat-

ter how much the Freshman has heard, nothing quite
prepares him for that feeling of utter frustration
which comes when he finds that two of his neces-
sary classes meet at the same time, and his schedule
is now unbelievably confused. The fact that he can-
not slip by in a class without studying a great deal
is discouraging, as are so many other facts of col-
lege life.

Pride and a feeling of accomplishment become
the guideposts of a job well done. A grade is no
longer merely a letter that signifies passing or fail-
ing, but a symbol representing hours of study, re-
search, and money. The college grades or professors'
approvals are not easily earned and the Freshman
finds that perhaps he is not as accomplished or ex-
perienced as he had thought. It is at this time that
he realizes that he truly is "a novice, esp., a student
during his first year, as in a college," as Webster's
Dictionary defines the term "Freshman."

It is only gradually that the new student over-
comes the feeling of being a novice on the college
campus. The simplest procedure becomes a task
when faced by the Freshman. At first, even the com-
putation of a term grade average is difficult. Hours,
credits, and points must all be considered and un-
derstood to compile a grade average or to under-
stand the fulfillment of academic requirements. Some
students remain in the Freshman stage, in this re-
spect, until the time of graduation, when they are
informed of missing credits.

Books are no longer distributed in the class-
room with neatly lined cards but, instead, must be
purchased carefully according to term, course, and
number. The cost of books is expensive and the new

The choices he makes concerning classes, friends, and every aspect of campus life will affect him in the future.

13

student usually learns (after costly experiences) to
buy second-hand books and to trade with other stu-
dents. All these things, which at some time will be-
come habits, are now new and confusing. Parking
lot regulations, "class-cut" system, and the registra-
tion procedure in time become second nature to the
once baffled Freshman.

From the choice of classes to the choice of a
career, the Freshman year is a time of learning and
reaching toward a goal. The sighting of this goal
and the means to attain it lie with the Freshman.
He must evaluate, compare, and choose; not only
must he do this with courses and friends, but with
values and principles. He encounters a wide variety
of personalities and philosophies during his first year
of college, and it is his responsibility to formulate a
philosophy or set of standards of his own — which
he does unconsciously whether he realizes it or not.

With the widening of the Freshman's outlook
on life, it is essential that he keep an open mind.
His opinions and choices should be solid but flex-
ible enough that if, after evaluation, he finds that
he was mistaken about a career choice or the opin-
ion of a person, he will be able to admit that his
judgment was wrong. It is only in this way that he
will benefit from his mistakes.

The Freshman listens, ponders, and wonders.
He argues, reconsiders, and angers. Speculating on
everything from sex to politics, he finds, as ulti-
mately all students do, that he is one of a group
and, yet, alone. As his scope widens he thinks more
universally. Studying takes on a greater meaning
and lesser things are pushed into the background.
The relief one feels for passing a Zoology test is not
welcomed because of some vague threat from the
teacher or parents, but because to the student, pass-
ing Zoology represents coming one step closer to
attaining a career or a degree. Membership in a po;
litical or pre-professional organization on campus
means not just the acquisition of friends or status,
but the obtainment of valuable information or expe-
rience which may help to determine or secure a
final career.

Frustration and disappointment are unavoidably
encountered during the first year of college. No one
can dream or work toward a goal without sometimes
facing failure or realizing that one has misplaced
one's trust. Often, without even realizing it, the
Freshman desperately seeks to find a model, an
idol, someone he respects and admires. Perhaps
nothing brings such sadness than to learn that faith
and admiration have been placed in someone who
is not at all worthy. Although the experience is dis-
illusioning, it teaches the new collegian to put his
faith in ideals and his trust in someone or some-
thing grander and more universal than any one
human being.

After some disappointing experiences, it is not
difficult for the new student to feel completely alone
and depressed on the crowded college campus. The
Freshman soon finds that there is no time for self
pity because life continues around him with or with-
out his volition. It is at this time that desire and
an inexhaustible supply of hope carry him through.
He learns that one mistake or failure does not mean
total disaster. Attaining his goal may take more
time and effort than originally planned, but he
knows that in the end, it will be worth the effort
if the goal is all that worthy.

The Freshman is indeed a person who is find-
ing himself. Although all his problems will not by
any means be completely solved and some things
will undoubtedly continue to confuse him, he will
have attained a great deal of knowledge and expe-
rience when he gains the title Sophomore. Mistakes
will be a part of his education, but they will serve
to mature rather than permanently injure him. He
will be more sure of his beliefs and ideals because
he has had a chance to prove or disprove them and,
although he is perhaps not certain, he has a better
idea of to what he wants to devote his life. He is
someone who will know triumph and disappointment
on a varied scale, and he will live a year of hard
work and excitement. He is someone to be little
envied and greatly understood; he is a Freshman.

Hope becomes an integral part ol the Freshman, and everything he attemps is touched by it.

14

WHY
THE CHOICE ?

By THOMAS ROBINSON

If you stopped a group of fresh-
men and asked them why they
came to JCBC you would cer-
tainly get various replies. Even if
the reasons are the same, people
express them differently. What-
ever their reasons, the freshmen
have arrived.

This past summer various high
schools in the county replied to a
questionnaire which asked that a
percentage of graduating seniors
give their reasons for enrolling at
the Junior College. The responses
were interesting and unusual.

Divided into four possible
choices for attending, the catego-
ries consisted of academic, finan-
cial, social and other.

In the academic category, an-
swers ranged from, "My grades
were not good enough to get into
a four-year university," to "JCBC
is known to have a fine scholastic
standing." Another student felt
that spending his first two years
in a small college would help him
to adjust to college life.

Although many of the answers
did not specifically say why the
students were coming to the Jun-
ior College of Broward County,
many said that their primary rea-
son for going to college was to
get an education. Jane Casey
came because she feels it is a
way to prepare her for a good job
when she graduates, Patricia West
came to gain knowledge, and Jim
Walton just doesn't want to be
ignorant.

Others were attracted to JCBC
because of its outstanding courses
and its high rating in the state.
Martha Contner was attracted by
the nursing program; Susan Brue-
ning by the Data Processing pro-
gram; and John Teitscheid because
of the wide range of preparatory

courses. Diana Pace, a receiver of
a JCBC Honors Scholarship, stated
her reason as, "I have learned of
the fine academic reputation the
Junior College of Broward County
has and believe it is an excellent
school."

"To be successful in the future,"
and, "To have a profession to fall
back on," were the replies of two
students when asked why they are
going to college.

Linda Farkas wants to build a
better foundation before entering
a four-year university. Jerry Ha-
ney is at JCBC because of an in-
decision about his major subject;
"I will attend junior college until
I determine what my vocation will
be." Danny Lively is a bit skep-
tical about college: "If I can do
college work it's better to find out
in a junior college."

Those were some of the aca-
demic reasons why a number of
high school seniors chose JCBC
as the school in which to begin
their college education.

It is surprising to find that not
many people put down their rea-
sons for attending as social. The
most common reply under this
category was, "All of my friends
are going there," or, "I know a lot
of kids who will be there." A few
people, however, gave the reason
that it will give them a chance
to meet new people.

The most frequent answer given
under the "other" heading bad to
do with hving at home. Some stu-
dents feel the best thing about
Junior College is that it saves
money for them or for their par-
ents. Social reasons undoubtedly
enter into remaining at home, but

finance plays the most important
role. "I want to live at home as
long as possible"; "I'd like to stay
at home for the first few years ";
"It is close to present living ac-
commodations."

These are only a few of the rea-
sons the students give for wanting
to go to a junior college — the Jun-
ior College of Broward County in
particular.

Of course there are other incen-
tives for attending JCBC. One
person was interested in the short-
er term of school. Dan Johnson
became philosophical about it:
"Since I am undecided about my
future, why should I waste money
elsewhere?"

Percentagewise, it adds up that
62% came for academic reasons;
45% came for financial reasons;
and 12% each for social and
miscellaneous reasons. If you
added it up and observed that it
came to more than 100%, you are
right. You must take into consid-
eration that many students gave
several reasons for being at JCBC.

If you don't care for percent-
ages, it can be stated another way.
In order of their importance to
the students of the freshman class,
academic is first, financial is sec-
ond, and social and miscellaneous
reasons are third.

No matter what the reason for
donning the rat cap, whether it
be because of the desire to be-
come educated, to associate with
old and new friends, or as one
person put it, "I don't want to
leave my mother," they, the fresh-
men, are now a part of the stu-
dent body of the Junior College
of Broward County.

15

BY JEANETTE MACHINSKE
For Mrs. Neda Hill's English 102 Class

16

Ml I

THE rain stopped falling just a few minutes
before I stepped out the door. The soft, gentle
breeze which blew against my cheek and
ruffled my hair was warm and moist as though a
wet piece of cotton was covering niy face. The clean
smell of wet earth was wafted to my nostrils as I
breathed deeply.

Although the rain had stopped, the sky was still
filled with clouds in varying shades of gray floating
lazily before me. In the distance blue-black moun-
tains of clouds were massed against the horizon,
pouring out their tons of water upon the waiting
earth below.

Palm trees swayed in the breeze like graceful

ballet dancers. Leaves skipped along the ground
turning over and over like happy children doing
cartwheels. Water trickled from the eaves of the
porch and glistened on the emerald green leaves of
the ixora bushes. Tiny drops of crystal water spar-
kled on the pink hibiscus blossoms like diamonds
as the first rays of the sun poked through the part-
ing cloud cover. Gay ripples played across the pools
of water standing in the driveway.

The storm had passed. Once more God's earth
was refreshed by the cool, clear water which had
poured down from His heaven. I stood in wonder
and awe before the beauty of this land after the
passing of the summer shower.

17

Cjde to a female UdogenaUan

BY DAVID WATKINS

For Mrs. Neda Hills English 102 Class

The caressing touch of each finger to a key,

whispering hush of felt striking wood, the grop-
ing and gnashing of ebony and wire, all lavish them-
selves to my supervision, to my fate, and to my
everything.

Yet my piano is not wood. She is pressed uni-
corn horn transplanted and crystallized from an
aqua-tinted raindrop; she is gargoyle skin, webbed
and silken-thatched; she is the plucked, feathered
carpets from the shiny parlors of Olympian maidens;
she is the stretched beams of tossed-away prisms,
and the retrograde whirlings of excavated minds.

Yet my piano is not wire. She is spun moonbeam
trapped in a rusted thimble; she is the tarnished
porcelain from bloody spiral stairways in the Lou\Te;
she is all the evaporated thoughts that have con-
densed on the roof of the world.

My piano is my soul, my treatise on each sculp-
ture and syndrome I fancy or profane. A cynic of
cynics do I become when I mount her lap and pat
her head.

My piano is more than a friend. She senses my
moods and releases my dreams; she bickers and
pouts when I doubt my esteem; she echoes the songs
of my flesh into the prolonged nights \\'hich I know
as days; she consoles my laughter and sighs at my
despondency.

I cannot see into me without her eyes. I cannot
curl my fingers around eternity and dangle my arms
off this scaffold of reality without having her as a
lifeline to shore.

When I touch her, flesh against flesh, there can
be no tomorrow, there can be no forever, and there
can be no darkness. She cries out in my anger, whis-
pers to my passion, and lavishes herself upon my
moments of delight, my hours of creation, and my
songs to the very brashness of the gods that gave
me a woman I could enslave in the timeless void
of unimaginable words.

18

CHEATING

f] GHOUIIilG

COLLfGIOH

peoBLtn

By PAT HART

WITH twenty - three min-
utes left of the final ex-
amination, student 32502
wound his watch. Exactly seven
minutes later he stood up, walked
to the front of the room, and
turned in his paper. The instruc-
tor took it, glanced over it, and
tore it up.

This hapless student had tried
one of the many ingenious meth-
ods of cheating that students use
everyday in American classrooms.
Unfortunately for the student, his
instructor was both observant and
well advised. Still, colleges are
faced with the ever increasing
problem of cheating.

The ways of cheating are many
and varied. This particular stu-
dent had inserted a minute scroll
inside his watch and had replaced
the crystal with a magnifying lens.
Thus, by simply winding his
watch the student obtained the

pertinent answers needed to pass
the exam.

Other methods of cheating
range from simple crib sheets to
elaborate earphone devices. A
standard joke among students is
that of taking an exam while
turning the pages of an open text;
book. As ludicrous as this may
seem, it has been tried.

One popular method is lining
a clear plastic cartridge pen with
paper containing the necessary
formulas or answers. Writing on
clothing and hands, although a
tried and true method, has its set-
backs— the ink can smear and the
writing can be easily seen by the
instructor. The way that works
best but requires the most in-
genuity is to obtain a copy of the
exam before it is given. This isn't
often feasible in large universities,
but it can sometimes be done in
small colleges. The main problem

with this method is trying to re-
member all the answers, not to
mention all the hazards involved
while trying to get the exam in
the first place.

Writing on desk tops or on lap
boards can supply a few short
answers which may save the day,
or if caught, may cost the whole
course.

The reasons for cheating are as
many and varied as the methods.
Mr. Neil Crispo, the new director
of student activities, feels that
much of the cheating in American
schools is caused by the idea of
competing with one's self. He be-
lieves that some of this cheating
could be done away with if, "We
could put education on a basis of
competing with each other. If it's
a choice between you and the
other person, you will always
come first."

Tom Spencer, president of the

19

Undergraduate Student Govern-
ment at the University of Miami,
made this comment: "We've had
no cases of a good student ever
cheating. Those who do cheat,
usually do it from necessity — such
as a football player trying to
maintain his grade point average."

Some of the instructors at
JCBC believe that a majority of
students do cheat or would cheat.
One of these instructors said,
"Half of my students cheat now
and if I gave them a chance, the
rest of them would, too."

Other instructors have said
that, "Not many students resist
the temptation to cheat," and
"Everyone would cheat if they
weren't afraid of getting caught."

There are instructors, though,
who feel, "College students are
usually a pretty good lot and can
be trusted to make the best
decision."

The students themselves have
varying views on cheating. Some
will admit to having resorted to
cheating in order to pass a course
but others maintain that it isn't
worth cheating just to get a grade.
They feel that getting an educa-
tion is the basis for college work
and cheating on an exam doesn't
help them to learn anything, but
just takes away from their self-
respect.

One student said, "It is a terri-
ble experience to know the answer
to an exam question but not be
able to think of it. This is the
time when a person is most likely
to look on another person's
paper."

A sophomore at JCBC said,
"Cheating is a despicable practice*
If you have to cheat to pass a
course, you shouldn't be taking it
in the first place."

Other students say that cheat-
ing is merely a means to get out
of school. "The faster you pass a
course, the less time you have left
in school. I'd do just about any-
thing to pass, including a little
cheating on the side."

There are various types of

20

cheating and some students have
morals about only a few. One
student wouldn't consider copying
on an exam, but was willing to
turn in a friend's term paper as
her own just to avoid the work
of research and writing. One stu-
dent commented, "If the assign-
ment isn't really important, then
it really isn't important if you
cheat."

With TV classes and IBM
grading, some students hold that
they are trying to beat a system
set up against them. The feeling
of personal contact in classrooms
has been lost and now the student
says, "It is only a machine that
I am cheating. It doesn't really
matter."

The majority of the students
asked, however, felt that cheating
had no place in college life. They
said that cheating would hurt
their education and hinder their
own progress through school.

There are many ways of deal-
ing with a student that has been
caught cheating. At JCBC, no set
policy is followed. Dr. Taylor,
Dean of Students, said, "We don't

like to set a policy. We prefer to
leave it up to the individual in-
structor."

This college, of course, frowns
on cheating, but offers no penal-
ties by a set standard. The indi-
vidual instructor can take what
action he sees fit. Sometimes this
means a failing grade in a course
or an assignment; sometimes it
means re-doing the assignment.
When a student cheats on an
exam, it may be explained to him
why he received a failing grade
or it might just come to be an
understanding between himself
and his instructor. This lack of
policy leads to misunderstandings,
sometimes, but leaves the instruc-
tors more freedom in their own
control of the classroom.

The University of Miami has
an Honor Court that meets in pri-
vate and deals with all problems
of cheating. The Court is made
up of ten members of the ad-
ministration, faculty and student
body, combined. All of their de-
cisions are kept from public
knowledge.

A student caught cheating at

the University of Florida also
goes to court. This court however,
is made up entirely of students
and operates under the laws of
the Florida State Constitution. A
trial is held and a verdict is given
by a jury of students. The usual
punishment is a number of "penal-
ty hours." Penalty hours are
academic hours required above
the usual number for graduation.
When these penalty hours are
completed and the student is eligi-
ble for a degree, all the records
of his cheating are removed from
his file and nothing remains to
tell anyone that he was ever
caught cheating.

There are numerous other ways
to penalize cheating. Expulsion or
mandatory withdrawal from school
are two. Unfortunately, such in-
cidents can become common
knowledge and can do considera-
ble harm to both students and
instructors.

No matter how it is handled,
students realize, as one girl said,
"If you cheat, you take the
chance. If you get caught, you
should pay the penalty."

0

Mrs REVIEW

Being a critic is good for the
ego. The critic is master of all in
the field he surveys, and can
praise or wither at will. I, for my
part, cannot claim to be a literary
expert, and so it seems perhaps
presumptuous of me to judge the
efforts of those who are far more
talented than I. I read a great
deal, both for knowledge and for
pleasure, and I know what I like.
On that perhaps flimsy basis are
my opinions formed. There are
times when I have goofed com-
pletely, as when SHIP OF
FOOLS, which I Uiought tedious,
was a best seller. However, my
views usually reflect those of
others who have read the same
books. My reviewing subjects are,
because of our quarterly publish-
ing schedule, not necessarily cur-
rent.

My choices are from the Best
Seller list, from popular reprints,
books much talked about, and ran-
dom selections so good or so bad
as to be worth reviewing. Let the
reader beware.

Topping the best seller list this
summer was Arthur Hailey's
HOTEL, a big novel with some-
thing for everyone. Set in a large
New Orleans hotel, this book goes
behind the scenes of the hotel
business through a variety of ap-
pealing characters and situations.
Central character in the related
episodes is Peter McDermott, the
efficient, young assistant manager,
who has a blot on his record to
live down, and two pretty girls to
live up to. Peter must face a be-
wildering series of crises that in-
clude a racial incident, a hotel
thief, a tipsy diplomat and his
wife covering up for a crime, and

by Ann Bardsley

a tragic accident. Minor crises and
characters help to lend an authen-
tic flavor to the business that read-
ers of HOTEL will never again
consider rather tame.

HOTEL has an exciting climax
and the traditional happy ending.
It is an excellent choice for a long,
lazy, Sunday afternoon.

The current civil rights move-
ment has inspired a host of books
about the South and its racial
crisis. Some of these volumes are
excellent, while others are merely
collected cliches by uninspired
hacks.

WE SHALL OVERCOME, by
Michael Dorman, will surely rank
among the best non-fiction to
come out of the social revolution
taking place south of the Mason-
DLxon line. Mr. Dorman is a re-
porter for a New York newspaper
and has been on the scene of all
the southern integration crises dur-
ing the year 1962-63. He does not
claim to be unbiased, but does
make a sincere effort at objectiv-
ity. Most of the integration activ-
ities of that year centered upon
the college campus and, appropri-
ately, the book opens upon the
tragedy of Ole Miss and closes
with the peaceful desegregation of
the University of Alabama.

Michael Dorman recreates that
momentous year with an accuracy
that keeps the reader on the edge
of his seat. He goes behind the
headlines and beneath the slogans.
The Ole Miss riots are revealed
in shocking detail, as are the fran-
tic negotiations between Cover-
nors Wallace and Barnett with the
Department of Justice.

WE SHALL OVERCOME is an
in-depth, reporter's eye view of a
national crisis. Once begun it is
hard to put down.

Sober historians and gossip lov-
ers alike will delight in Lillian
Rogers Parks' MY THIRTY
YEARS BACKSTAIRS AT THE
WHITE HOUSE. This remarkable
book, first published in 1961 and
now reprinted in paperback, is an
intimate glimpse into the White
House and its occupants as seen
by the maids, cooks and butlers
who work there.

Written in a lively, entertaining
style, BACKSTAIRS AT THE
WHITE HOUSE surprises us with
some goosepimply ghost stories
about the spirits that haunt the,
Presidential mansion, especially
the rather well-documented ap-
pearances of Abe Lincoln. The
joys, sorrows, and idiosyncrasies
of first families from Taft through
Eisenhower are revealed through
the eyes of the author, a White
House seamstress, and her mother,
who was head maid before her.
Housekeeping problems, weird
gifts like the scroll written in
blood that one first lady received,
parties, exotic guests, and visits by
crackpots bringing personal griev-
ances or messages from God are
recalled by Mrs. Parks with wit
and a trace of nostalgia.

This fascinating memoir serves
an added purpose. Every reader
who has ever had an embarrassing
experience — no matter how hor-
rible — can feel comforted by the
knowledge that his humiliation has
been topped by the diplomat's
wife who actually lost her satin
panties in the presidential recep-
tion line.

MY THIRTY YEARS BACK-
STAIRS AT THE WHITE
HOUSE is well worth reading,
and hard to forget.

I

22

C»i>V|

ViV^C

";

ye-kft-t ^^eAtheryvC'ei'

^lt^v,<.»- West

EBENEZER Marlowe had
lived in the great city of
London for the full sev-
enty-three years of his life. Se-
vere hardship and heavy toil had
made a hard and bitter man of
him and he had learned early in
life that one would receive help
only when one could give some-
thing in return. This pathetic bit
of knowledge, along with other
twisted philosophies of mankind's
attitudes, had turned Marlowe
away from society. He had be-
come a virtual hermit obsessed
with the passion of carrying out
personal vengeance upon his fel-
low man before providence saw
fit to take him from the society
of the pitiful world.

For the past forty years Mar-
lowe had made his meager living
as the proprietor of a small pawn
shop located in a back alley of
Piccadilly Circle. His miserly
ways had amassed him a fortune
which he kept locked away in a
storeroom of his establishment.
Marlowe had made both home
and occupation out of his shop
and he was rarely seen leaving it,
even for just the slightest mo-
ment. To his customers he was
always pleasant, greeting them
with a smile and good cheer.
But this was a mere mask cover-
ing Marlowe's character; for be-
hind his smiling shell, lived a
being whose vengeful and bitter
outlook upon life would eventu-
ally lead him to a horribly mor-
bid fate.

It was the Autumn of 1891.
Night had fallen upon London as
clouds of fog rolled out from the
Thames and spread themselves
thickly over the city. Ebenezer
Marlowe had retired from his
daily activities and, as the chimes
of Big Ben mournfully tolled the
hour of eleven o'clock, he was
having a disturbed sleep. As he
lay on the dingy cot of his bed-
room, he could hear the chimes
tolling again and again. Suddenly
they stopped and all was silent.
Once again Marlowe attempted
to pass into a slumber but a dull
and sporadic rapping on his front
door brought him to his feet.
Lighting a candle, he hesitatingly

walked down a narrow passage-
way into the front room of his
shop. The rapping continued.
Marlowe, a man not easily fright-
ened, called out harshly and clear-
ly, "Who is it, who"s there!" Noth-
ing but silence was his answer.
Again he called and again re-
ceived only silence. Not wasting
another moment, Marlowe quick-
ly went for his revolver safely
secured in a cabinet drawer.
Clutching it tightly to his side,
he moved once again towards the
door. Then, with swift speed,
Marlowe unbolted the latch and
threw the door wide open.

He found himself face to face
with a rather startled youth car-
rying a small bundle over his
back. Marlowe demanded the
youth's business. The boy, having
fixed his eyes on Marlowe's re-
volver, stammered out his story.
Marlowe was told that a Maxi-
milian Danvers, who was thought
by many Londoners to be a stu-
dent of the occult and of sorcery,
had passed away the day before
and, leaving little capital with
which to pay his unsettled debts,
it was found necessary to sell sev-
eral of the man's personal effects
to obtain sufficient money for the
funeral. The youth explained that
the bundle he was carrying con-
tained a number of Danvers' be-
longings. Marlowe passed the boy
a harsh look and asked him to
step in. Once inside, the bundle
was hastily opened and Marlowe
began a careful study of the var-
ious articles.

Marlowe scrutinized everything
as though he were searching for
a lost and very valuable gem.
But he was unimpressed by the
lot save for one object, a small
mahogany chest locked tightly
with both chain and padlock. De-
termined to acquaint himself with
the chest's contents, he demanded
the key for the chest from the
boy but was told that there were
several keys in the bundle and
that the boy had no knowledge
as to the one which fitted the pad-
lock. Marlowe impatiently tried
every key he was able to find

23

without success. Surely the pad-
lock key must be somewhere
within the bundle. Once again
Marlowe attempted to find it.
Thrusting his hands deep within
the bundle, his fingers suddenly
touched a long metal object. He
withdrew his find and discovered,
much to his delight, that it was
a key. He hurriedly attacked the
padlock with it, which at a turn
of the key, fell open. Removing
the chain from the chest, Marlowe
opened it and found six small
scrolls carefully stored inside.
Upon examining one of the scrolls,
he found it to be covered with
Arabic lettering and some sort
of a strange design. He replaced
the scroll and told the boy he
would pay five pounds for the
chest and its contents, no more,
no less. The bargain was sealed
and the boy, returning the other
articles to his bundle, brought
the sack up over his shoulder and
quickly left the shop.

MARLOWE returned his re-
volver to its hiding place,
and with his newly pur-
chased prize in one hand and the
candle in the other, returned
down the passageway to his bed-
room. Placing the candle on a
table, Marlowe removed the six
scrolls and took them to the
light for a more careful examina-
tion. He found all of them to
contain Arabic lettering and six
different designs, one on each of
the scrolls. The greatest of curi-
osity now aroused, he acquired a
burning desire to discover the
meaning of the scrolls. Marlowe
had a vague remembrance of hav-
ing a book somewhere in his pos-
session which dealt with Arabic
writing. He realized that if he
could only find that book, the
problem of deciphering would be
greatly lessened. He began an
extensive search of his shop which
lasted throughout most of the
night, but as the first rays of the
rising sun streamed through the
city of London, Ebenezer Mar-
lowe found his book.

It was now Sunday, and as
was customary in keeping of the
Sabbath, Marlowe's pawn shop
was closed for the day. This gave
the old man the entire day to
pass as he thought best and the
foremost thing on his mind was
the deciphering of the scrolls. He
worked with his task at a fever-
ish pace, not stopping for a mo-
ment. The day passed into night
and it was not until the following
morning when Marlowe closed
his book and returned it to its
storage. The task had been com-
pleted, and for the first time in
many years, he felt almost over-
joyed with accomplishment. Mar-
lowe had discovered that he had
in his possession a formula for
the retaining of youth written by
an unknown prophet some five-
hundred years after the birth of
Christ. The first five scrolls con-
tained the secret of the formula
itself but the sixth scroll was a
curse, or something like a warn-
ing, to all those who used the for-
mula without the consent of Al-
lah. Marlowe reasoned that there
were a chosen few whom Allah
believed pious enough in spirit to
be blessed with perpetual youth
and only these few were able to
use the formula without conse-
quences.

Marlowe believed this sixth
scroll to contain nothing but a
ridiculous and pagan superstition
not worth anything but to be ig-
nored and discarded. He also
learned that the six strange de-
signs appearing on the scrolls
were concerned with the curse of
the sixth scroll. He found them
to be taken from an ancient lunar
calendar and reasoned that the
fate spoken of in the curse would
be fulfilled on the night of a full
moon. This time element Mar-
lowe also ignored but concerned
himself with only one idea — per-
petual youth. He thought to him-
self what a grand thing it would
be if he could regain his youth.
With the fortune he had amassed
over the years he could easily ful-
fill his dream of vengeance, and
at the same time, he could enjoy
all of the fun and frolic of the
day. This was the chance he had
been waiting for and fate had fi-
nally seen fit to grant him his
wish. Ebenezer Marlowe was now
trapped in his own obsessions and
it would be a mere matter of time
before he would feel the sting of
the ancient curse.

In the days that followed, Mar-
lowe could be seen making fre-
quent trips to the druggist shop
a few blocks away from his own
establishment. His acquaintances
began to wonder what the old
man was about but Marlowe
would speak to no one. He re-
mained as silent as possible, and
to the amazement of everyone,
Marlowe's shop was closed to all
business. Actually, Marlowe's trips
to the druggist were for the pur-
pose of gathering all of the needed
ingredients for his experiment and
his shop was closed so that his
work might not be disturbed. It
was just one week exactly after
Marlowe had purchased the
scrolls when he was ready to
make his experiment. He re-
checked the measurements of his
ingredients with the information
he obtained from the scrolls and
found everything to be in readi-
ness. The great Parliament clock

24

had just finished tolhng the hour
of nine when Marlowe mixed his
chemicals in a large vial, and with
a wondering smile of delight,
drank them down.

For a few moments it was as
if nothing had happened, then
suddenly Marlowe's body was
racked with terrific convulsions
and spasms. He crashed about
his room sending furniture and
all various kinds of objects smash-
ing to the floor. Then Marlowe
fell also, his body overcome in a
swoon. Four hours passed before
he awakened from his sleep. At
first Marlowe remained prostrate
on the floor as if in a daze and
then began to grope around in
search of his candle. When he
found it lying in a corner of his
room, he withdrew a match from
his pocket, lit it, and applied it
to the candle. Marlowe then stood
erect, with his candle in his hand,
and walked a few paces to a mir-
ror which was hanging on the
wall. He gazed into the reflector
and what he saw startled him.
Reflected back at Marlowe was
the image of a man of about thir-
ty years of age — handsome, tall,
and erect. Marlowe couldn't be-
lieve what he saw to be true. He
put his hand to his face and found
it to be smooth instead of wrin-
kled and leathery. He soon real-
ized that the transformation had
actually taken place; that his pre-
cious formula had proven true.
Marlowe's uncertainty turned to
reality and his concern turned to
joy, unlimited joy which threw
him into gales of laughter. Now
he was capable of dealing with
the disgusting human race as he
saw fit. With youth and fortune,
he thought to himself, how could
he be stopped from reaching his
inevitable triumph.

BUT overshadowing this op-
timistic faith in Marlowe's
future was the thought of
the people themselves. The sev-
enty-three-year-old Ebenezer Mar-
lowe now no longer existed. He
would eventually be missed by his

acquaintances and many questions
would be asked concerning his
whereabouts. No doubt someone
might think that foul play had
occurred. What would happen,
Marlowe thought, if he himself
were arrested and questioned?
How could he escape? How could
he possibly explain the existence
of the formula, the transforma-
tion, the obtaining of perpetual
youth? It would be an impossible
task. Marlowe threw himself
down in despair. He thought of
the human race as a mass of
vicious insects trying to rob him
of his discovery and triumph. He
realized that he could not let this
terrible thing come to pass. He
must conceive a plan, a brilliant
plan, to counteract any human
resistance to his personal destiny.
Daylight had once again come
to the city of London, and at
Marlowe's pawn shop all was in
readiness. He had passed the re-
maining hours of the night in
deep thought as to the course he
would follow. He had conceived
a truly brilliant plan and was
most anxious to put it into action.
First and foremost, Marlowe had
changed his identity. He was now
John James Marlowe, Ebenezer's
nephew and only living relative.
Second, he would explain to his
questioning neighbors that Ebene-
zer had summoned him in a letter
a few days before to come at once
to his bedside for his uncle feared
that he was dying. Marlowe would
then continue to explain that
upon arriving at the shop the
night before, he found his uncle
dead, saying also that he had no-
ticed the room to be filled with
a number of medicine bottles
which proved that his uncle had
no doubt been nursing a severe
and long-acquired illness which
finally overcame him. Last, Mar-
lowe would explain that his un-
cle's property was now in the
hands of a financier and was to
be sold. The plan was foolproof.
In a few short sentences Marlowe
would explain the entire incident
quickly and simply and would

give no chances for questions to
be raised.

The day passed as Marlowe
had expected. His story had been
told by himself only five times,
but carried by a multitude of
others, it had worked its way
throughout Piccadilly Circle. Be-
cause of its convincing thorough-
ness, Marlowe's explanations were
believed by everyone who heard
them. There was, however, one
small detail which he had neg-
lectfully overlooked; the where-
abouts of his uncle's body. As
chance would have it, Marlowe
was asked that question and he
was momentarily stunned by it.
His answer, that the body had
been taken to a rural suburb
across the Thames early that
morning to be prepared for burial,
was begun in a hesitating man-
ner but finished off with such ob-
vious sincerity that it was taken
to be a truthful answer. By that
evening, Marlowe had moved his
living quarters from the dingy
pawn shop to a stately mansion
overlooking Hyde Park. He had
won the day for himself and now
believed more strongly than ever
that his obsessions and ultimate
destiny would be fulfilled.

A year passed and in that time
the name of John James Marlowe
became associated with the most
fashionable society of London.
He had used his fortune wisely
to gain prominence and power
and was on the road to war
against the human race. It gave
Marlowe great amusement to
think of his new position in life
and how he would use it to bring
his dreams of vengeance to real-
ity. The hate and bitterness he
had acquired never left him. In
fact, now that he realized he was
capable of striking back at man-
kind, his twisted feelings were
even more pronounced. It became
just a matter of time before Mar-
lowe's obsessions led him on the
path of human destruction. He
had passed the first year of his
new life establishing himself in
London's high society and now,

25

as he stood on the threshold of
his second year, he felt that he
was fully prepared for the task
he had created for himself.

Marlowe moved swiftly and
thoroughly, wielding his vicious
tactics like the sword of an aveng-
ing angle. All those who had at
one time or another dealt Mar-
lowe an injustice suffered greatly
for their mistake. First there was
Sir Gregory Beachem whose sig-
nature appeared on an I.O.U. debt
payment of one million pounds.
Marlowe knew that Beachem's
textile industry was in a bad way
and that a demand for a payment
of one million pounds would com-
pletely ruin him. Marlowe lost
no time in buying the I.O.U., at
a greater cost than it was worth,
for the sole purpose of destroying
Beachem. The demand was made,
Marlowe received the debt pay-
ment, Beachem went bankrupt
and committed suicide. Next there
was Ramsey Fcx, a brilliant pol-
itician and orator who had be-
come the power behind the Prime
Minister. A false embezzlement
scandal created by Marlowe
brought Fox a crashing defeat in
a vital election and ruined his
political career forever. Then
there was T. V/insIow Trumble,
editor of one of London's great-
est newspapers. Marlowe pur-
chased the holding shares of

Trumble's publishing company
and had the proud man thrown
into the streets. Thus the war
was waged and many a great
man fell to ruin at the hands of
John James Marlowe. It seemed
that the great destiny he had
dreamed of was fast becoming
reality and Marlowe laughed and
gloated over the turmoil he was
creating. He had claimed his hour
of vengeance and was making the
most of every minute of it.

IT was now Autumn of 1893,
the second year of Marlowe's
new existence. He was passing
a quiet evening at his Hyde Park
residence, sitting before a blazing
fire in the drawing room. He had
just finished reading the seventh
chapter of Emily Bronte's Wuther-
ing Heights and had placed the
book on a small reading table at
his side. He was about to retire
for the evening when he was sud-
denly overcome by a sharp pain
in his stomach which sent him
reeling back into his chair. He
made an attempt to rise again
and was able to stagger to the
foyer where he collapsed at the
foot of the staircase. Trying to
drag himself up the stairs proved
futile. Marlowe fell into a series
of convulsions and lost all con-
sciousness. A few moments later
he came to his senses and found
that the pain had ceased. Mar-
lowe rose to his feet, looked won-
deringly about him, and slowly
mounted the stairs. Suddenly he
realized that he was not the same
man. Something had happened,
something so drastically frighten-
ing that he was afraid to gaze at
his reflection in a mirror. But
that wondering curiosity of the
unknown which all humans pos-
sess drove him on until Marlowe
was standing before his bedroom
looking glass. What he saw sent
a sharp chill of sheer horror knif-
ing down his spine and he uttered
a shrill scream at the gruesome
sight. He was gazing at the re-
flection of the most repulsive and
grotesque creature that he be-

lieved could ever exist. Ugly be-
yond description, the creature was
the complete picture of evil; its
face full of cancerous sores and
its frame hunched and twisted. As
he gazed transfixed at the image,
the remembrance of the curse of
the sixth scroll shot through Mar-
lowe's tormented mind. He turned
away from the mirror and hurried
to a window. His eyes stared out
at the night and then he saw'
something which petrified him;
something which he had prayed
not to see — a radiant full moon
suspended in a sea of black end-
lessness. The sight sickened him
and he thought to himself what
a terrible fool he had been for
allowing his mind to be absorbed
by the presence of the damned
formula. Marlowe went complete-
ly mad. The realization of the
curse's fulfillment upon him drove
the crazed man into a frenzy. He
tore out of the room and rushed
down the staircase. Standing mo-
mentarily in the foyer, Marlowe
moved toward a closet, grabbed
his top hat and walking stick,
threw his great coat over his
shoulders and ran out of the
house.

Marlowe, now under the spell
of the ancient curse, quickly
crossed the street and entered the
park, clutching his walking stick
as if it were a club. Groping
among the shrubbery, he sudden-
ly came to a clearing beside a
lake where he saw a young cou-
ple sitting by themselves on a
bench near the water's edge. Mar-
lowe had a sudden and unmoti-
vated urge to kill them and he
began to move closer to the
bench. Suddenly the crazed man,
completely obsessed by the
thought of murder, rushed vicious-
ly upon them, bringing his cane
crashing down upon the head of
the boy. The girl, seeing the
hideous beast that was John
James Marlowe, fled amid wild
screams of terror. Marlowe gave
quick pursuit, and capturing her,
beat the girl unmercifully to
death. Looking about him, he

26

saw that his wicked deed had
been unnoticed, but the girl's
screams had brought several po-
licemen into the park. Marlowe
escaped from the scene, crawling
on hands and knees through the
shrubbery, and was able to return
to his home. Upon entering, he
tossed his hat, cane, and coat
aside and went directly to his
chambers. There Marlowe fell
into a deep sleep as if he were a
panther resting from a fresh kill.
At the hour of nine in the
morning Marlowe was awakened
from his slumber by loud, re-
peated knocks at the front door.
Shocked by this, he realized that
his present grotesque state of ap-
pearance would prevent him from
receiving his unknown visitor. He
threw his hands to his face in
despair and realized that the ter-
rible sores on his skin were no
longer there. He rushed before
his mirror and saw the image to
be that of his own youthful self.
It was a miracle. He thought to
himself that the entire terrible
affair of the last evening was
probably nothing more than a
dreadful dream. At that moment,
Marlowe heard a servant answer
the door and admit the visitor.
Donning his robe, Marlowe went
down the staircase to the foyer
where he found his visitor to be
a policeman. The conversation

between the two men was brief
and to the point. Marlowe was
told of the murders of the pre-
vious night, was questioned as to
where he had been during the
evening, and asked whether or
not he had heard anything at all
which might aid Scotland Yard
in the investigation. Marlowe's
answers were, of course, quite
convincing and he assured the po-
liceman that he was ignorant of
any knowledge pertaining to the
crime.

Marlowe became well aware
that what had occurred the pre-
vious night was far from a dream.
The tragic news was being shout-
ed in the streets. Every newspa-
per in London carried the story
of the brutal murders. Detectives
and policemen swarmed over the
area searching and questioning.
What had happened was most
definitely true. As Marlowe re-
turned to his room his mind was
wracked with torment. The reali-
zation of what he had done, the
horrible transformation, and the
curse, the wicked curse which had
now trapped his very being,
plagued him. But there was a
consolation. Hadn't he returned
to his youthful appearance?
Hadn't he been transformed from
that terrible creature back to his
own self? Surely he was not un-
der the spell of the curse at the
present. It could be possible that
it would never plague him again.
This optimistic faith in the fail-
ing potency of the ancient proph-
ecy cleared Marlowe's mind and
he was once again able to smile
and think that he had won him-
self another victory over his fool-
ishly ignorant fellow humans.

Day past into night, the second
night of a full moon. Marlowe,
sitting quietly in his library, was
once again overcome by the fa-
miliar convulsions and emerged
from them transformed into the
horrible creature he had been just
twenty-four hours before. Once
again he stole out into the fog-
choked blackness and once again
he committed murder. Marlowe

was afflicted by the dreadful
curse for four consecutive nights,
and during this time, he had left
such a trail of vicious murders
that the populace, of the area
found it very unsafe to venture
forth into the streets after sun-
down. In fact, a curfew had been
instituted in the vicinity of Pic-
cadilly requiring everyone to be
off the streets by six o'clock in
the evening. As for Marlowe him-
self, he had no longer been seen
leaving his residence at any time
by any of his many neighbors.
He was suspected by no one of
having any part in the murders,
and for a time, John James Mar-
lowe was a prisoner of his own
passions, locked desperately away
within his great house, secluded
and alone.

EVER since the third night
of his terrifying affliction,
Marlowe had dismissed his
personal staff and had engaged
himself in a pitiful attempt of war
against his own bewildered mind.
He believed that he could succeed
in crushing the power of the curse
if he could once again gain con-
trol of his own senses and there-
fore throw off the hold the an-
cient spell had on his very being.
Thus he waited for the passing
of a second month embodied with
both fear and anxiety. Then,
much to Marlowe's delight, the
eve of the night of the first full
moon came to pass. It was an
occasion filled with much mystery
and pessimism, but Marlowe's
overpowering self-confidence in his
own abilities allowed him to face
the passing of the remaining hours
with an air of premature victory.
Actually, Marlowe couldn't wait
to see the golden full moon rise
over the city. He believed that
his earnest striving to regain the
complete control of his mind
would, indeed, release him from
his dreaded curse. And now he
waited, locked safely within his
chambers as the full moon began
its slow ascent into the night.
The great glowing sphere

27

reached its climbing summit and
then stopped, suspended in the
dark sky as if it had been hung
there by the hand of God. And
far, far below, staring intently at
the silent moon, stood Marlowe
transfixed in a vigil; a vigil which
would suddenly and violently be
rewarded. He anxiously awaited
the familiar tremors and convul-
sions which would engulf him
and hurl him into a world of un-
believable nightmares, but noth-
ing happened. The transformation
was not taking place. Had he suc-
ceeded, Marlowe thought to him-
self, as he stood before his win-
dow? Was it possible that he had
defeated the curse, that he had
gained a victory? Surely this must
be true. He turned from the win-
dow, overcome with roaring
laughter, and left the room. He
was indescribably happy with the
sudden turn of events. The moon
was at its zenith of fullness but
Marlowe's youthful appearance re-
mained unchanged. He was now
standing at the head of the stairs,
and as his thoughts wandered
from the curse and the full moon
glowing brilliantly through the
darkness, the mental resistance he
had constructed to oppose the
transformation began to weaken.
As he took the first steps down
the stairs, Marlowe suddenly be-
came aware that all was not well.
He began rubbing his hands to-
gether in a writhing motion, over
and over, again and again. Then,
before he was aware of the grow-
ing pains deep within his body,
Marlowe was viciously overcome
with violent convulsions. He lost
consciousness, sank to his knees,
and tumbled down the stairs.
The transformation now complete,
Marlowe awakened from his
swoon, his very being and soul
replaced by the spell of the curse.
Then the horrible hours were
passed as before, with murder as
Marlowe's only reward.

The following morning Mar-
lowe awakened from a deep slum-

ber to find that he once again
had regained his youth, but his
blood-stained clothing, which was
strewn throughout his chambers,
served as a grim reminder of
what he had done. The news of
another Hyde Park murder was
on everyone's lips. Detectives and
police were everywhere, newspa-
pers carried the horrible stories
of murder, and London was
screaming for action. It was as
if the world had been turned up-
side down. Marlowe, having just
purchased a newspaper, was stand-
ing in the foyer of his home read-
ing the known details of the mur-
der. Suddenly his eyes read some-
thing which made him start back
in sheer horror. The murder weap-
on, a gold-studded walking stick,
had been found lying beside the
brutally-beaten body. It would be
just a matter of time before Scot-
land Yard would trace the cane
to its owner. Marlowe rushed to
his chambers and began a hurried
search of the rooms. He emerged
from his task a broken and be-
wildered man. His walking stick
was nowhere to be found. Mar-
lowe realized that in one split sec-
ond of neglect he had been totally
ruined. He had fallen prey to his
own evil passions and greed for
revenge and there now seemed to
be no escape left open to him.

The weight and chokingness of
sudden defeat fell over Marlowe
like a dark heavy shroud. All had
been lost, all was now gone. Sure-
ly there was escape somewhere
beyond the gloom. He must find
it, he must flee, he must run or
die. Now alone, deep within the
prison of fright, Marlowe lost all
sense of reality. He flew into a
wild rage like that of a mad beast
caught in a snare and waiting for
death. He longed to strike out
against the world and tear it
asunder; to unleash his madden-
ing fury; to escape the confines
of his own hell. Now was the
time, delay might bring capture.
Marlowe, with his great opera

cajje securely fastened about his
neck, was rushing along the stair-
case - landing, potential escape
coming closer with every step.
He was descending the stairs
when a profound remembrance
shot through his twisted mind —
the scrolls, those wretched pieces
of shriveled parchment with the
damned formula scrawled upon
them. As he thought, his face be-
came contorted in an expression
of sadistic pleasure. He would de-
stroy the scrolls, tear them, burn
them, obliterate them. They would
haunt him no more. Marlowe
would have the last laugh in de-
stroying the very things that
destroyed him.

He went back to his chambers
and took the scrolls, still safely
secured within the chest, from a
secret vault in his bedroom wall.
Clutching the chest in his hands,
Marlowe hurried down the stairs
and entered his study. He tossed
the small box in the fireplace and
emptied its contents on the black-
ened stones. Taking a match from
his pocket, Marlowe struck it and,
with a laugh, applied the flame
to the scattered scrolls and to the
chest itself. The ancient wood
splintered and cracked as the
flames grew with consuming greed.
Marlowe watched the fire, shout-
ing with delight. He laughed and
jeered as the objects burned and
blackened in the flames. Mar-
lowe's vile anger satisfied, he
turned to leave but it was then
that a portion of the chest burst,
spewing fiery embers in all direc-
tions. Some struck Marlowe's cape
and quickly ignited the fine cloth.
Before he knew what had hap-
pened, flames were blazing all
about him. He tore at his cape
but it held fast. He gasped and
stumbled before the great fire-
place as the searing flames con-
quered all. John James Marlowe
lay burning with his scrolls and
all that could be heard were his
screams as the last embers of em-
pire burned into ashes and ashes
unto dust.

28

M

y

k
I

0

"Think oi it, Znurk! A tomb from some lost civilization!"

r — I.

i-^f^

Btoj«DCoo*/ry

TREE

^=^ — ^

nn^

.!^^\

y /
/
'a)

X'M A

THE BOMB

By MARGARET MARY BROWN

For Miss Patricia Kyle's English 101 Class

ILLUSTRATED BY ALVA FULLER

In the days of old when hnights

were hold
And dragons roamed the land,
Twas hard indeed to make great

speed
To win a maiden's hand.

One had, in fact, to do a deed
Of such tremendous scope.
That one brave knight set out to

court
With very little hope.

Twas not that he was cowardly
For he was brave 'tis true,
But this poor knight was ruiining

out
Of daring things to do.

So Lancelot, that u>as his name.
Set out with resolution
To ask his wise friend Merlin
W hat would be the best solution.

Now Merlin said that since there

were
No dragons left to wrestle
The knight should go at once and

buy
Lance Awnings for her castle.

So Lancelot, although he thought
The task extremely small.
Went out and bought Lance

Awnings
And then on his love did call.

I know that now you're wondering
If she said yes or not,
Well, you can bet your life she did
'Cause she liked Lance-a-lotl

30

ilcfjiEbemcnt

BY APRIL ROBINSON

IN the annals of history, many
gods and goddesses have been
regarded as the source of
beauty and culture in man.

Much history of past civiliza-
tions is revealed through the

culture that lives through the
ages. We have studied the lives of
the Egyptians, the Chinese and
many others from their cultural
remains.

Many students at the junior

college are helping to mold the
culture and develop the civiliza-
tion of our time. The culture that
is developed in the students of
today will help to express our
civilization to the man of tomor-
row.

SILVIA LOPEZ, a student of
ballet, has been dancing for six
years. She belongs to the Broward
and the Dade County Civic
Ballet and she has frequently
performed on stage.

Her first experience in musical
comedy, however, was last year
when she played Susan in the
JCBC production of "Finian's
Rainbow." She found that she
enjoyed it and will continue
studying in the field of musical
comedy when she transfers to a
higher university level.

Although she wishes to con-
tinue her dancing and acting, she
plans to work toward a degree in
fashions. She is a model in her
free time, and she feels th^t mod-
eling and dancing are closely re-
lated, as they both use ballet
positions and in both, "You deal
largely with the discipline of the
body."

Silvia has so large a field of
interests, that she says she doesn't
need any more opened to her, but
rather needs only to develop one.

31

Quite frequently, if a student is
interested in culture in one form,
he is active in more than one
phase. JAMES SUGUITAN is in-
terested in many fields of self
expression. Almost everything he
does in the arts is for his own
satisfaction.

He has written much poetry,
and as well as having it published
in the campus literary magazine,
P'an Ku, he was managing editor
on the magazine staff last year.

He started writing poetry in the
eighth grade when he wrote
descriptions and poems for the
Little Flower's School literary
pamphlet. At St. Thomas Aquinas,
Jim continued taking a creative
writing class which gave him
much opportunity to express his
emotions. He said that it doesn't
really take much time, but he
only writes when the mood strikes,
"like on a moonlit night." He
said, "When an outside stimuli
works on you, you are more
prone to write, especially poetry."

Besides expression through
poetry, James does some painting

in oils. He won first prize in an
art show in high school with a
painting he called "Sunburst."
From there the painting was sub-
mitted to Barry college. After
also winning first prize there, it
continued on to New York and
Philadelphia art shows.

He describes the picture as a
form of "bumpy modern art," with
a tree, a cloud, the sea, and the
sun shining through the cloud. He
claims that the original painting
he entered was called "Tropical
Serenity," but the school asked
for more submissions. It was then
when he submitted the canvas
that he used to clean his brushes.
He had no idea what it was sup-
posed to represent until the art
teacher began describing what she
saw in what James had thought
was simply the brush - cleaning
canvas.

James plans to follow a career
of teaching English and the mod-
ern languages, but he feels he will
continue both writing and paint-
ing as long as he finds an outlet
for self-expression.

m^M

^

IV

Often students find new fields
opened to them after they enter
college. ALICE CAMPBELL de-
veloped an interest in dancing
largely because of activity con-
nected with the Junior College.
She chose dancing partly for the
exercise and partly for the music
involved.

Last year she performed a
Charleston dance for her talent
in the Hollywood Home Show.
After that, she continued taking
dance in various forms, including
yoga with music, and since then
she has been in a dance recital.

Alice plans a career as a secre-
tary or a business teacher. She
feels that any dancing she does
as an outside activity will prob-
ably continue just for fun.

32

JULE HARKE, an alumnus
from Ft. Lauderdale High in '65,
is planning a career in teaching
music. Alter he finishes junior
college, he plans to attend either
Florida State University or
Princeton. "Both," he said, "have
a fine music department."

Jule plays guitar and piano but
is mostly interested in chorus. He
hopes to someday direct a chorus
of his own. He sang in the high
school chorus and in the Ft.
Lauderdale boys choir.

Some students wish to keep
the cultural part of their life
separate from their career. JACK
VANDERPLATE wants to make
English and literature his major
field of study, for if he were a
music major then music would be
his job, "And jobs are work." He
is content to continue his music
for enjoyment.

Jack sings in a barber shop
quartet they call the "Sunshine
Southernaires," which has per-
formed on occasions at the
Yankee Clipper and the Gait
Ocean Mile.

He also sings second tenor in
the college chorus and the Ft.
Lauderdale Symphony Chorus. Be-
sides his activities in the vocal
field, he is a student of piano and
organ.

Often it is found that a student
decides his field early in life.
STELLA BEALL, a part-time stu-
dent, found her field long ago
when she decided to pursue the
realms of music. She is a member
of the Ft. Lauderdale Symphony
Chorus and also accompanies the
chorus director, George Sistrunk,
while he teaches private voice
lessons.

Stella was a piano student at
JCBC for four semesters, and is
interested in a career as an or-
ganist. Her experiences in piano

include pianist for "Finian's Rain-
bow" and pianist for South Brow-
ard's last year's production of
"Music Man."

Stella is taking organ lessons
from Mrs. Lettie Ozaki, organist
at Park Temple Methodist
Church. She plays organ for the
First Methodist Church and plans
to continue her music education
at Stetson after graduation from
JCBC. "Opportunities for organ-
ists," she feels, "are far greater
than for piano unless one expects
to become a concert pianist."

33

^:>.

RHONDA ACHOR, a graduate
Irom Stranahan, is interested in
dancing and drama. She has been
a dance student for eight years
and has a background in ballet,
acrobatics and tap. After joining
the dance club at Stranahan, she
widened her interest in dance to
the field of modern jazz. She now
feels that ballet is "too precise and
formal." "In modern dance," she
said, "you have a chance to im-
provise and move as you want."

Rhonda plans to make dancing
her career someday, but will also
obtain an elementary teaching
degree.

A '65 alumna from South
Broward, PENNY GATHER, has
been taking ballet lessons for sev-
eral years. She feels that she
would love to make it her life's
work, but she hasn't yet decided
to make that final decision.

Only recently Penny has found
dancing to be a different and
complete world of its own and

she would like to become a part
of it.

Penny has always been inter-
ested in music and she plays the
piano and the oboe. She was the
drum major at South Broward
last year and found she enjoyed
directing the band, but dancing is
a relatively new and exciting
world open to her that she wishes
to pursue.

STEVE LARVENZE, a music
major, exercises his talents out-
side of school. He plays drums,
string bass, and trombone in a
jazz trio. The group plays mostly
modern jazz and Latin American
rhythms. They have performed at
the Pan American and the Yankee
Clipper.

Steve has also had experience
in teaching music to the begin-
ning and intermediate band
classes at Nova, and has taught
privately under the direction of
Mr. Fitchhorn.

34

SPORTS
at JCBC

by Jack Cresse

FROM PHYSICAL EDUCATION, TO INTRA-
MURALS. TO INTER-COLLEGIATE. THE
COACHES AND INSTRUCTORS OF THE HPR
DEPARTMENT ARE TRUSTED WITH THE
NEVER ENDING TASK OF KEEPING JCBC
PHYSICALLY FIT THIS IS THEIR STORY.
THE SPORTS STORY OF THE JUNIOR COL-
LEGE OF BROWARD COUNTY

T„

-HE importance of maintaining the physical
as well as the mental well-being of the student at-
tending college never has, and never will be, over-
looked. Of course, the main purpose of any institu-
tion of higher learning is preparing the individual
mentally for future life. But to disregard the phys-
ical aspect of education would be purely inexcusable.
The importance of physical education has been
a part of all societies dating back to the earliest em-

pires. The Olympics, inspired by rulers before the
birth of Christ, and perhaps the most spectacular of
all athletic events, represent the ultimate in amateur
athletic accomplishments. In all great things there
is a starting point — a beginning. Every great ath-
lete had a start somewhere. A professional baseball
player may have had his in Little League. But the
greater majority of all professional as well as ama-
teur athletes would not be where they are today if
it were not for the stress on physical exercise and

35

team play in this country's educational institutions,
from elementary school through college.

As in high school, physical education courses
are required for graduation at virtually every junior
college and university in the United States. The Jun-
ior College of Broward County is no exception.

Each student, with the exception of those over
29 years of age, those with military service, or those
with medical excuses, are expected to take at least
four hours credit of physical education. This is one
of the requirements made of the JCBC students. It
would seem natural that the material gains of phys-
ical exercise would merit considerable consideration
in the scheduling of all classes without making it a
requirement. But there are those who would dis-
regard the opportunity available. It is for these stu-
dents that the administration makes the HPR
courses a requirement.

lifting, and tumbling; and Aquatics, which include
swimming, diving, life-saving, and scuba diving.

The school catalog aptly sums up the beliefs
concerning Physical Education. It reads: "Physical
education is that part of the college curriculum
which is concerned with the physical well-being of
each student with consideration for the social, intel-
lectual, and emotional aspects of his development
as they relate to the physical in the learning of skills,
development of endurance, strength, and organic
vigor."

• * •

It is indeed true to assume that the students
need for physical activity is adequately met by the
array of HPR courses. Yet, as is evident in all
schools, these courses amount to only half the
available resources, at least as far as the average
student is concerned. For the HPR Department pro-

Unlike those of high school, a wide variety of
courses are offered. In fact the Health, Physical Ed-
ucation, and Recreation Department offers more
classes than any other department.

For term I of this school year, the HPR De-
partment offered approximately thirty courses. In
comparison the Science Department offered half
that number. Of course this is naturally so, since
there are such a wide variety of sports to be found,
so many in fact that the HPR Department has
divided them into four basic areas.

These include Individual and Dual Recreational
Activities, such as bowling, golf, tennis, and even
fencing and ice skating; Team Sports, including foot-
ball, basketball, volleyball, and soccer; Physical Fit-
ness, offering such courses as gymnastics, weight

vides an excellent intra-mural program. Although
these activities are attended by those with above-
average ability, they are available to all students.
For the first time in the school's history these activ-
ities are to be operated on a year-round basis. In
the past, they were made available only in the first
two regular semesters, but were eliminated in the
two summer terms. Perhaps the rumors that the
current four semester system the Junior College op-
erates under might be abolished in favor of a regular
trimester system have prompted this change. What-
ever the reasons, the change is a fine one, current
with the growing college's needs.

The only limiting factor in I-M action is that
which prevents a varsity athlete from participating
in the given sport that he participates in at the

36

varsity level. In other words, a varsity basketball
player may not play on an I-M basketball team.
However, he may play Softball or football. Some-
times physical education majors are used as coaches
on the I-M level, providing experience ". . . the best
teacher."

I-M activities are many and varied, as men-
tioned. Keen competition, a necessary ingredient in
any sport, is given an extra incentive by the hand-
some trophies awarded to the over-all champions
in each sport.

As in HPR courses, both individual and team
sports are to be found. A total of ten activities filled
the last school year, and more are planned for this
year.

Mr. R. L. Landers and Miss Elaine Gavigan,
as I-M heads, will devote much of their time to

these activities, even though both are tied up in
other areas. It is a credit to the HPR staff and the
Junior College that such a dedicated pair partake
so much of their time to make the JCBC I-M pro-
gram what it is today.

In addition to his work in I-M's, Landers finds
time to assist the head basketball coach, Mr. Clin-
ton Morris, and the newly-appointed baseball coach,
Mr. Leroy Wheat. He also finds time to referee local
high school basketball games.

Miss Gavigan is head coach of the college's coed
tennis team, in addition to her duties as ladies' I-M
director and HPR instructor.

If these two individuals punched a time clock,
their total hours for a week's work would easily
accede 60.

Intra-mural activities include football, basket-
ball, Softball, volleyball, tennis, ping-pong, handball.

bowling and golf. Landers lines up the men's activ-
ities in these events, and Gavigan handles the ladies'
activities, excepting those less suitable for feminine
participation, of course.

One other activity has not been mentioned as
an I-M, but very well could be. It is the college Judo
Club, headed by a student. Bob Ripple. Ripple is
well qualified for the job, having attained the rank
of Brown Belt, which simply means you don't mess
with this fellow, brother, unless you're a Black Belt
or something. All kidding aside, Ripple has done a
fine job with the judo men and has made his club
among the most popular on campus — at least the
most respected.

• * •

There are, as mentioned, material gains to be
had from intra-murals, as admittedly there are in
other extra-curricular activities. Yet there is one gain
that is conspicuously absent from most other activ-
ities. For there is the spirit of competition — not in
mind, but in body — for this is the true aim of all
sports. Without it, there is merely play.

Competition also is found to be the only link
between I-M"s and inter-collegiate activities. There
are many differences clearly evident between the
two. Yet there is always the common denominator
— competition.

All the ingredients of sport reach their highest
proficiency at any college in team competition be-
tween schools. Here skill and competition are re-
fined to as near perfection as is possible on the
junior college level.

The best, and only the best, athletes find posi-
tions on the school's basketball, baseball, golf and
tennis teams. Many things enter this world, which
is far apart from the bowling class that meets
Wednesday afternoon. Here a grade is not recorded.
Performances are more closely recorded. The actual
sport is more demanding. All is entirely different.
It is on a higher plane. Here the tedious labor of
the head coach is rewarded; the school name is up-
held; and the team's many hours of practice are
subjected to their stiffest test.

The school, the coach, the players. All are more
or less dependent upon each other.

A successful coach is a winner. He is a winner
because he is able to recognize fine talent. He is
able to mold this talent into a fine working unit; a
unit whose main objective is to win — to uphold the
school's good name. To do so is to obtain self satis-
faction. To win is to obtain satisfaction, but is a
loss a failure? In some ways,-" yes, it is. But in others
it is not. How you played the game is an important
factor too often neglected in evaluation of per-
formances.

37

Here, several other factors enter into consider-
ation.

One is team work. The finest players will not
win consistently if there is not a highly developed
degree of team work.

Another is good coaching. The finest players
cannot perform without the guiding mind and hands
of a good coach. As mentioned, a good coach is one
that recognizes and knows how to develop fine tal-
ent. But there is more. With the coach rests the
burden of evaluation and correction. He must field
the best of the available talent. And, when the team
fails, it is he who must decide the corrective meas-
ures to be employed. It is almost as if he were a
general, directing soldiers and planning tactics. Of
course, just as the best general will meet failure
with inferior troops, the best coach will find victory
unobtainable with meager talent. Observe Casey
Stengel.

The Junior College of Broward County is for-
tunate to have the fine coaching staff it does. Dur-
ing the first years of inter-collegiate activities at the
college, success was less than desirable. But being
the young school it was, the results were more or
less expected. Last year the results of the coaches'
labors were finally rewarded when all three of the
varsity teams managed winning seasons.

The basketball team, in its third year, had a
respectable 11-10 record and a third-place finish in
conference play. Things look bright for the future
as head coach Clinton Morris has had fine success
in landing top area talent. The results of this season
will tell much of the coaching, the players, and the
school itself.

The baseball team, in its second year, managed
a 13-12 record although seriously hampered by the
loss of top players. Highlights of the season were
three wins in four attempts over state champs. Man-
atee Junior College.

The coed tennis team, in its first year, per-
formed brilliantly, losing only to the University of
Miami girls — their only loss in six tries. The Miss
Gavigan Group defeated Dade Junior twice, Barry
twice and the University of Miami once. The 5-1
slate was the best, percentage-wise, of any JCBC
team ever.

Athletics are often used as a basis for evaluat-
ing a college by the general public. Sometimes a
school is better known for the state championship
it won rather than the academic success it enjoys.

The latter should be the basis of evaluation for
the two have only one thing in common. They start
with the same letter. Other than this, they are as
far apart as night and day. A school with a fine
football team might not be the best place to get
an education and vice-versa.

But when a school is better known for its ath-
letics, it should not be considered academically lack-
ing. It would seem that if academics are at a high
level, then they would naturally be unrecognized by
the public. It is when they are at low tide that they
are recognized. It might be well to ask then, "Do we
want to be recognized?" A school that is academi-
cally sound is like a good baseball umpire. Neither
is noticed. Let the umpire make a mistake and all
will know his name. Let him operate without error
and his presence is barely considered. Let a college
earn a bad record and everyone says, ". . . NO
GOOD." Let the college be academically sound and
there is not a murmur of discontent.

Academics are not for spectators. It is here that
the difference between academics and athletics is
found. Athletics are definitely for the spectator.
Sports thrive on support. This is the reason why
Notre Dame is better known for football than the
average GPA of its graduating class.

If all that has been said is true, then there
must be a sort of balance between the two. Academ-
ics and athletics balance out at the better schools,
one being recognized, the other not. At JCBC the
academic standards are good and the athletics are
reaching maturity. This may be the year that the
scales become balanced. With the addition of golf
and men's tennis to the sports program at JCBC,
the school is beginning to blossom out athletically.
In this area, the school is starting to establish itself.
In academics, it has become notably settled. The
college is growing and with this growth come higher
demands, demands that will be met, both academ-
ically and athletically. The scales will continue to
balance themselves and JCBC will continue to be
a proud school.

I

38

I

From Sociology Lectures

to Director of Student Activities

Mr. NEIL S CRISPO

By MILDRED EDWARDS

\^

A new perspective of activities
is in store for the students at
JCBC. Mr. Neil Crispo has a new-
position and he brought with him
his unique and invigorating style.
Mr. Crispo has assumed the duties
of Director of Student Activities,
replacing Mrs. Nan S. Hutchison,
the new Dean of Women at
Florida Atlantic University.

As his new appointment be-
comes more demanding, Mr. Cris-
po will eventually discontinue his
instruction of sociology. He will,
however, continue to advise the
Student Government Association
for another year.

A graduate of Florida State Uni-
versity, where he received his B.S.
degree in Social Sciences and his
M.S. degree in Sociology, Mr.
Crispo has new and extensive
plans and ideas for die coming
year.

Widi the exception of a few
modifications, the Student Activi-
ties Board will be run on the same
basis as previously established.
Mr. Crispo hopes to plan "Activi-

ties that correlate with the aca-
demic curriculum of the students,
and have more activities that will
enrich the environment of the stu-
dent body." He would like to
bring more renowned individuals
to the college to give lectures and
perhaps to spend a few days on
campus. With this new forecast,
the students will not only be able
to talk with these various individ-
uals in question-and-answer ses-
sions, but also in personal and in-
formal comersations.

As the Director or Student Ac-
tivities, Mr. Crispo plans to make
the students aware of the existence
of the Student Activity Board
(SAB) and its functions. In addi-
tion, he plans to increase the ac-
tivities made available for stu-
dents during a semester period.

When asked whether his new
appointment will offer any chal-
lenges, he replied, "Yes, definitely.
I like new challenges, especially
this one, for it will bring me closer
to the student body and the aca-
demic resources of the school."

39

March 29th — the musical production "Finians Rainbow'

Th

e

by Mildred Edwards

SAB

Trike race — the March 28th SGA Picnic.

Ballet number durii
tation by the Ruth

Within the workings of this in-
stitution there is an organization
functioning known as the Student
Activity Board (SAB). The main
purpose of this board is to co-
ordinate and encourage campus
activities which are beneficial to
the students and to the college.
The authority of the SAB is un-
questionable and the board is re-
sponsible only to the President of
the College.

Representation of the students
and of the instructors is one out-
standing feature of the SAB. In
contrast, in many colleges which
have similar organizations the
boards consist of instructors and
administrators only. The Student
Activity Board at JCBC is com-
posed of five members of the fac-
ulty and four members of the
student body. The members from
the faculty are appointed by the
President of the College and the
student members are appointed
by the President upon recom-
mendation by the Student Gov-
ernment Association. As the school
continues to grow the membership
of the board will increase also.

40

L

I

life numiia t.-B
im by ife fefe

es of this il-

1 tie Studen;
i). The mail! j
id is to CO- ■
rage campii!.
beneficial to I
the collesf '
: SAB IS K-
board is re-
President c:

the studens
rs is one oai- '
the SAB, k'
olleges whif:.
nizations tlf
istnirtors d
The Student
'CBC is cor- '
;rs of the fa:-
Bbers of i''-
lembers fro:
oiited by li^
lOege d tt' ,
ire app«""^;
upon tecoffi'i
Student GoV'j
AstheschM'i
lemefflberstiip'
icrease also-

h Lyceum presen-
ompany.

There are many outstanding
functions of the SAB, one of
which is to enforce the rules and
regulations which govern all clubs
and organizations, with the excep-
tion of athletics, publications, de-
partmental activities, and drama-
tics. The board also screens all
requests for new clubs and organ-
izations. If the prescribed stand-
ards aren't met by a student
group, or if the board doesn't
agree entirely that the purpose of
an organization is in the best in-
terest of the students and of the
college, it will be denied recogni-
tion. It will also be denied the
use of college facilities, represen-
tation in other college organiza-
tions. Student Government, intra-
murals, and all privileges pertain-
ing to the campus.

The board is responsible for all
student social events and activi-
ties— dances, Lyceum programs,
contests, benefits, etc. — and peti-
tions must be filed and advanced
approval secured for each event.

One of the most important
functions of the SAB is to com-

May 26th — the second SGA Picnic.

pose a recommended budget to
be submitted to the President of
the College concerning the Stu-
dent Activity fees. These fees
consist of the $15.00 activity fee
paid by each full-time student at
the beginning of each term.

Dr. Lee Henderson, of the State
Department of Education, Junior
College Division, commented that,
"The Constitution of the Student
Activity Board of the Junior Col-
lege of Broward County is a good
one, for it spells out the respon-
sibilities of all the students on and
off campus." Former Director of
Student Activities, Mrs. Nan S.
Hutchison, reported that the eval-
uation committee in April, 1965,
was also pleased to learn that
JCBC had such an organization
(SAB) operating on campus. The
committee praised the SAB for
the job it has been doing as a rul-
ing board.

To date, the operation of the
Student Activity Board has
proven very successful, and with
well-qualified members it should
remain as effective in the future.

March 18th Lyceum — "The Barber
of Seville" presented by the National

Opera Company.

41

007 DOESt

By Pam Edwards

THIS is an article about the library. Contrary
to first impressions, the title does have a sig-
nificant connection. So, what is there to write
about a library? Well, it's a building or a complex
of areas, it contains 20,100 books, it seats 224, it's
open 62 hours a week, and you'll find the main
collections on the second floor of building L. Inter-
esting? Not particularly! But, that's it, in a nutshell,
the physical description of your library, the library
at JCBC. Is that all? Not by a long shot!

What types of books does the library house?
Who selects these books? What will the library offer
the students in the near future? These are questions
that should interest every student on this campus,
but how many can answer them? Thus, the purpose
of this article.

The title is not merely a gimmick to make you
read this article; it's a fact! More than likely you
won't find the James Bond epics listed in the card
catalogue, but if you have to find the political out-
come of the Hundred Years War, the originator of
the heroic couplet, or the definition of the thermionic
diode, you couldn't have come to a better place. The
college library exists to supplement classroom work
with independent study and research. Recreational
reading doesn't come under this category. So, unless
Broward Junior College opens a department of
Home Economics, Joe's news stand is probably
better stocked with volumes on "How to Sew in Ten
Easy Lessons" than the library on this Junior Col-
lege campus.

A lot of time and effort goes into the selection
of the books found in the Broward Junior College
library. The reviewers don't wear "I'm Particular"
buttons on their vests, but they are particular. Every
month reviewers for the American Library Associa-
tion review books especially for liberal arts colleges.
Of these reviews, about 3500 are selected and pub-
lished in "Choice," a monthly magazine of the
American Library Association published for liberal
arts colleges. This is the principle device used in the
selection of books for the JCBC library. Even gifts
are either accepted or refused in a discriminating
and tactful manner. To be sure, the accumulation of
books in this Junior College library is no "hit or

^^

m
•a

m

miss" venture. The selection is exactly what the
word implies — very select.

The immediate expansion program for the li-
brary is already becoming a reality. Six central class-
rooms on the ground floor of the library building
have been converted into one large study area. This
provides a place for students to study who are using
their own materials, such as text books, etc. Reserve
books are also kept in this room, as well as the daily
newspapers and duplicate copies of LIFE, TIME,
SATURDAY EVENING POST, and SPORTS IL-

42

LIVE HERE

LUSTRATED. Thus, the Hbrary reading room on
the second floor is reserved for students using all
other references provided by the library.

One expansion factor of the library is constant.
This is the steady inflow rate of new books —
specifically five hundred a month. To comply with
this accumulation, 20% more shelving has also been
added.

Last year, $6,000 worth of books were known to
have been stolen from the library and of these only
one-fifth were returned. These figures suggest one

of two things: that this college has more than its
share of slow readers or that it is swarming with
kleptomaniacs. In either case, if you are the proud
owner of one of these choice specimens, congratula-
tions, you have contributed to a statistic!

When asked what purpose a college library
serves, Mr. Grady Drake, head librarian, gave this
viewpoint: "College presents two general aspects to
the student — that of formal learning and that of
social development. The college library is primarily
concerned with formal learning." Unfortunately,
many students on this campus are guilty of distort-
ing this concept. These students believe that the
library exists to further their personal social develop-
ment. At least that is the impression given when the
library suddenly takes on the atmosphere of a
branch office of the student center. The head li-
brarian has described the self-discipline problem in
the library as "appalling." This may sound like an
expression of a pet peeve, but when was the last
time you were trying to do some last minute cram-
ming for a Chemistry exam and the two girls across,
the table found last Saturday night's dates to be the
subject of the hour? To quote a passage from The
Prophet by Kahlil Gibran, "in talking, thinking is
half murdered."

What attitude should the student take toward
the library so that the individual receives the great-
est benefit possible from what is offered to him? Mr.
Drake gave this response: "In class lectures, students
are exposed to ideas, facts, and controversial opin-
ions. Their own interest and curiosity should propel
them to find additional information to substantiate
or refute these ideas, facts, and controversial opin-
ions. The ideal situation is one in which through
faculty lectures and the library reading, the students
develop their own independent and personal body
of knowledge."

The next time you venture into the library, by
accident or on purpose, take a moment to look
around the room. More than likely all you will see
is a lot of books, doing nothing but just lining the
walls. This "wall-lining" was a rather expensive item.
When was the last time you were offered an $80,000
gift, absolutely free?

43

Excerpts from H
Cnropean Summer

Reminiscences of foreign travels

from the journals of two instructors

of the Junior College of Broward County

THE CASTLE OF CHILLON —
MONTREUX, SWITZERLAND

JUNE, 1965

Like some great beast come
down from the mountains to drink,
Chillon Castle hovers on the edge
of Lake Leman turning narrow-
sHtted eyes up to the Alps and
open-arched windows down, across
the lake. In the belly of the stone
creature is the thirteenth century
dungeon with its "seven columns,
massey and grey," as Byron called
them. The third pillar from the
low entrance has a glass plate
protecting Byron's name, carved
there in 1816. Modern drip-dry
ladies stop, grab for somebody's
hand and whisper, "That's Byron's
name — it really is." And then

By Mrs. Barbara Jean Clark

Anne Hathaway's cottage,
Stratford-on-Avon, England

and Miss Judith M. Rehm

_^ JUNE, 1960

illATHER than the Harrogate-
York route, we chose the Lake
District road to Windmere, Gras-
mere, Wordsworth's Cottage, Kes-
wick and Carlisle to Scotland.
The woods were lovely and, like
the rest of the English countryside
in early summer, quiet, peaceful.
"A corner of England" in the
native's memory is quickly rea-
lized in them and in the beauty

Spanish matador El Cordobes in the arena at Barcelona

44

of the wildflowers — lupen, fox-
glove, and poppies — that we can
touch today, with a little imagina-
tion, from the windows of our
Anglia, they seem so close to us.
Dove Cottage is not very large,
on a main thoroughfare sur-
rounded by hedge. Here the poet
saw into his environment to do
with it as his temperament al-
lowed him; here in tranquillity he
returned to renew his sense of
proportion and tolerance, his se-
curity from the earth. In contrast,
the human variety and often lack
of proportion in the city con-
tinued to dominate Blake's in-
tense images, while the tranquillity
of nature, where it could be found,
he believed had little to do with
men's lives. I disagree with Blake.

JULY, 1960

Most of the decorations found
in the churches of Rome were

Photo Credits:

Color photos through courtesy oi Miss Judith M. Rehm and Mrs. Barbara Jean Clark.

Photo of El Cordobe's from LIFE Magazine

they remember him from school,
or something, and consult their
blue guide sheet to find out what
Byron was doing there besides
carving his name a hundred and
forty-nine years ago. They read of
Bonivard — chained four years —
sixteenth century — too long ago.
The opaque silken cobwebs
hanging like draperies in the bone-
chilling room are almost too thick
to be real. Even Byron seems un-
able to take the webs seriously
when he has Bonivard claim,
"With spiders I had friendship
made, And watched them in their
sullen trade." But one has only
to breathe in the cold, lean against
the moist stone and look long at
those black swaying things in the
corner. Even the drip-dry lady

moves out fast, clutching some-
body by the hand.

Outside the sun gets at the
stone and dries it off, makes
potted geraniums and crawling
vines bright green, floods into the
huge halls. It doesn't quite make it
to the thirteenth century latrines,
but the castle men probably didn't
either since the castle has only
two, nearly inaccessible, with one
seat each extending over the lake.
But there are plenty of places to
wait where sun and men can fuse
into a mood of timeless contem-
plation. Window seats beside the
lake may be medieval, but they
speak to a modern need — the
need to collect oneself in the pres-
ence of vast mountains, deep wa-
ters and the stones laid by men.

Courtyard ot Chilian Castle

added 300 to 400 years ago until
the present decade, such as those
in St. Peter's. Michelangelo's work
for his first commission, "The Dis-
position of Jesus from the Cross"
or more commonly called "The
Pieta," is the first statuary on the
right side within the cathedral.
This sculptor saw Mary not as a
woman of fifty, heartbroken at the
most agonizing moment of her
earthly life as she holds her nearly
dead son in her arms, but as a girl
of eighteen, benign, revealing her
eternal hope in mankind and her
own purity of concentration in the
thought.

AUGUST, 1960

Our usual comforts and cleanli-
ness influence us to reject Spanish
poverty and filth, and to be
disgusted by the ragpickers of
Madrid who make a part time
business of begging. Yet it is too
easy to walk away rationalizing
you can't feed all of Spain's poor.
In Toledo, I saw my first bullfight,
"en la sombra," for I could afford

to pay for the better seats and to
bargain with the saloonkeepers in
their own tongue. El Greco's vi-
sions of his country's two class
system are not so insane, after all.
(Wasn't it a militant court that
acknowledged him unstable?) Both
were present to watch the na-
tional sport; only the green uni-
formed "soldados" carried rifles 'o
prevent any disturbances from
some of the villagers apparently
happy on vino, yet we had noticed
these official escorts and overseers
in other cities, in Barcelona, Zara-
gossa, Valladolid, and in the coun-
try near the Pyrenees border.
Their ominous proximity re-
minded me I might try to under-
stand one of their few forms of
public entertainment rather than
simply dislike it. Why not cele-
brate when a brave torero con-
tends with, and kills ingeniously,
the threat of power upon him?
The bullfight is their comedy; it
is our tragedy as we react so
seriously and literally to the scene

of bandilleros sending shafts into
the bull's shoulders, his attempting
to gore the horses in his anger and
revenge, his beauty, strength and
seeming invincibility in the arena
cut down in the final thrust of the
"espalda."

In reality, as in Spanish art,
the contestants are more evenly
matched than we suppose. My
pounding heart in the last mo-
ments, my turning away at the
strike, and intense ache are a mix-
ture of American sentimentality
and a failure to understand, if not
accept, a violent, dramatic way of
offering and hopefullv achieving
an answer to a difficult life with
few possible, graceful successes.
For the city girl from "The Hub
of the Universe" the matador and
his bull have performed well this
afternoon, and have even recalled,
with surprising awareness and a
chuckle, her initial receptions in
New England questioning a South-
ern education. It was time to
leave!

45

cJntlod action:

The look is complete; the clothes
are so much a part of the whole
that the girl's looks come first.
Only that second glance will tell
you how well dressed she really is.
The result — absolutely great !

THE COURREGES — Belted drop-waist wool jumper fea-
tures solid red top with red and green plaid skirt. By
Picadilly for Juniors 5-15. About $15. Model: Pixie Davis.

-»>^«H8c

AFTER FIVE — Black crepe sheath with sequined bodice —
bowed sleeveless bolero jacket is detachable. Young junior
design featured in Burdine's College Shop, about $30.
Empire waist A-line combines black crepe over cream. By
Gerald McCann of London, featured in Burdine's Gold
Coast Room. About $40. Models: Pixie Davis and Jane
Mall.

THE CLASSIC LOOK — (Left) Dacron-cotton A-line skirt by
Harburt, about $12. Long sleeve pinstriped shirt by Gant,
about $9. Cable knit cardigan in 100% wool, by Cole-
brook, about $18.

(Right) Madras A-line skirt with side-front pleat. By Junior-
ite, about $8. Long-sleeve oxford shirt by Ellen Tracy,
about $5. 100% virgin wool cardigan by Garland, about
$13. Models: Jane Hall and Karen Winkopp.

46

Guaranteed

Su &^atn S(/f{fatc/i

"OP" ART — Dacron-cotton A-line "Hip-Hound" skirt. For
Juniors by Mr. Vifo of Miami. About $8. Cut-out lool< in
a wool courreges jumper with hip-slung belt. By Juniorite,
about $18. Both argyle and checked turtleneck tops in
dacron-cotton and nylon knit. With matching stockings,
by Juniorite, about $10. Models: Karen Winkopp and
Cheryl Fuini.

BELL-BOnOMS — "Stems and Buds" by Mr. Dino. Striped
bell-bottom pants, about $12. Matching cut-out top also
about $12.

"Caprisians" knits by Smartee. Bell-bottom pants about
$15. Sleeveless striped top about $7. Jacket about $15.
Models: Cheryl Fuini and' Jane Hall.

47

. , ta tccttt u<uc (M

BEHOLD THE BIKINI! — Blue gingham hip-hugger by

Jantzen, about $20. Modeh Cheryl Fuini. Blue striped two-
piece suit with yellow trimmed top. By Catalina, about
$19. Model: Karen Winkopp. White arnel skirted hip-hug-
ger, about $18. Model: Jane Hall. Blue and white flowered
print two-piece by Jantzen, about $18. Model: Pixie Davis.

48

. L

KNOWLEDGE

LEADERSHIP

SUCCESS

THE FRESHMAN

RETREAT

by John Leatherwood

DR. E. G. WILLIAMSON

V.

WORKSHOP NUMBER 4: STUDENT GOVERNMENT

HE finish of a brilliant speech; a thunderous,
standing ovation; a fond wish of goodnight and the
second annual Freshman Retreat of the Junior Col-
lege of Broward County came to an end. For two
days, August 12 and 13, almost 150 students and a
sizable number of educators had attended lectures,
speeches and workshops, at Fort Lauderdale's Beach
Club Hotel, in which were explained the purposes.

aims, and plans of the Junior College. All said and
done was for the benefit of the selected freshmen
leaders in the hopes that these students would find
their places, take front positions, and achieve worth
for themselves, their fellow students, and their
college.

Attendance of the eight workshops, designed
to give a complete look at all aspects of campus life,
took up the bulk of time, but all was not work. There

49

The educators discuss Retreat pros and cons at a morning coffee
break.

were a breakfast, two lunches, two banquets, recrea-
tion and get acquainted sessions, and a dance, all
during which the students found ample time to take
a relaxed break.

Leadership, the main point of the Retreat, was
stressed throughout most areas of discussion and its
purpose was probably best summed up by Dr. Rob-
ert Weigman of the University of Florida when he
said, "The person who leads the group is the one
who serves it most effectively." As equally impres-
sive was Florida Atlantic University's Dean Robert
Breitenstein's remark that, "The junior college grad-
uate exceeds in academic excellence over the student
who has been raised as a freshman in his own four
year university." This launched another aspect of
discussion — no one has to apologize for attending
a junior college.

The freshmen who represented almost every
high school in Broward County, were told that upon
entering a four year institution after a junior college
graduation they will earn slightly less "A's" than
the four year students but far less "D's", "F's" or

John Leatherwood discusses the scope of the Junior College literary
magazine, P'an Ku, at the Campus Communications Workshop.

:''M

Dr. Melvene Hardee delivers the closing speech

Freshmen I
number 1

isten intently to the informative discussions of Workshop
Junior College Pros and Cons.

A session
activities.

of the Student Government Workshop discusses Freshman

"I's". They were also informed that a "D" in college
is an "F" in disguise, to join extracurricular activities
but not to spread oneself's interests too thin, to
keep a 2.00 average but to strive for a 3.00, and to
get that degree for it is the key that unlocks the
door to the college of one's choice.

Dr. E. G. Williamson of the University of Min-
nesota, one of the two Retreat guest speakers, gave
an eminent discussion at the first banquet. His main
point of remark, "The striving for excellence is the
characteristic of an educated person," was stressed
admirably throughout his talk. Florida State Univer-
sity's Dr. Melvene Hardee comprised the other
member of the guest speaking duo. Her keynote
speech, "What's Junior About the Junior College?",
was an excellent opening to the two days' events,
but her finale, in which she used her famed traveling
companion Rockhead Freshman and, through the
use of six different pieces of coral rock, each depict-
ing Rockhead in a different light, took him through
every phase of the Retreat in a remarkably inspiring
speech, was a truly grand performance. Stating that,
"Process is the most important part of a retreat,"

50

I

Margi Kitzmiller takes time out at poolside for
an interview.

Dr. Hardee took the meat of the two days' dis-
cussions and ingeniously threw it back to the as-
sembly in a brilliant summation. It was a fitting
end to a very fine and worthwhile affair.

During the afternoon of the last day of the
Retreat, many sophomores made it a point to inter-
view a number of the freshmen in regards to the
various happenings and points that were made in
the days' sessions. There were four main questions
asked: what one thing about the Retreat was most
impressive to you; if you have made previous
opinions about the Junior College has attending the
Retreat changed any of them; what have you gained
most from the Retreat; and did you hold a leader-
ship position in high school. The answers received
were surprisingly rewarding and informative. When
asked if any of his previous opinions had changed,
Mike Katz answered, "Definitely. At first I was
skeptical about Broward Junior but now I've made
a complete change in my opinion. I am very happy
to be here and the Retreat has inspired me to get
out and get the job done." Margi Kitzmiller was as
sincere in her reply, "I was afraid that JCBC would
be filled with clique groups but I'm happy to find
that a clique atmosphere appears absent in college."
When asked what most impressed him about the
Retreat, Dave Brown commented, "I am surprised

Elaine Frate Mike Kati Carol Shafer

with the smoothness of the Retreat, the well-planned
organization, and the good food served to us. I ex-
pected less." Bill Mandeville explained, "The sopho-
more and faculty leaders knew what they were doing
and really had something to offer. I like the array of
teachers and the great amount of intelligence dis-
played."

When Elaine Frate was questioned as to what
she gained from the Retreat, she answered, "I had
no thought of extracurricular activities before the
Retreat but now I desire a club membership." Carol
Shafer was, "Prompted to join Silver Sands and,
possibly, a Student Government committee." When
asked what overall gains he had made by attending
the Retreat, Greg Fitzpatrick replied, "I've gained
a better understanding of college and know what to
expect."

Many freshmen were pleased with the idea
of debating a sound argument with their instructors,
and the well used phrase "you get out of it what
you put into it" really stuck with them. But probably
the most striking achievement of this year's Retreat
was the selling of leadership for, at the close of the
final hour, the great majority of the freshmen had
been inspired to leap into the job and take command.
This alone made the Freshman Retreat a truly
vibrant success.

Dr. Dorothy Leach promotes student leadership at Workshop number 5. The Dance; Freshmen and Sophomores alike jumped to the rolling

beat of the Cellar Dwellers.

51

IN MEMORIAM

JOHN YDST, A.B.

M

S.

MATHEMATICS

JUNE

27,

igDB - SEPTEMBER

5,

19S5

On this day ^ we, the students of the Junior College of Broward County,
wish to express our love and appreciation for the dedicated hfe of a great and
understanding teacher. Mr. John Yost lielped the vast majority of those with
whom he worked. It is with a sense of deeply felt loss that we have him leave
us to go to a rewarding life in the future. Wherever he will be in the timeless
years to come, we know that he will see his God and know that, with us, his
mission on this earth was done well. The Editors and Staff of Silver Sands
humbly dedicate the following Administration and Faculty pages to the memory
of Mr. Yost.

52

Presenting

The ADMINISTRATION

and FACULTY

of the

JUNIOR COLLEGE

of

BROWARD COUNTY

1965-1966

COLLEGE ADMINISTRATION and ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF

E. P. Lauderdale, Ed.D.

Dean of Instruction

Harvey B. Dates, Ed.D.

Dean of Administration

JacK D. Taylor, Ed.D.

Dean of Students

Lester B. Trussler, M,A.
Dean of Admissions and Records

Bernard M. Campbell,
B.A., M.A.

Assistant Director of
Special Programs

Norma B. Chernok, B.S.

Director, Medical Assisting
Program

\ ^\

Gordon Chesser, B.S., M.S.

Assistant Director of
Admissions and Records

Grady Drake
B.S., B.S. in L.S.

Director of Library Services

Ray M. Gover, B.S., M.A.

Assistant Director of
Admissions and Records

.^

\

V

Walter H. Jarecke,
B.S., M.A., Ed.D.

Director of Advisement and
Institutional Research

Rex C. Kidd,
B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D.

Assistant Dean for
Special Programs

Albert Robertson, A.B.

Supervisor of
Business Affairs

Glen A. Rose,
B.S., M.H.P.E.

Assistant Director of
Special Programs

53

Margaret E. Brashears
B.S., E.D.M.

Counselor

Gibson A. Cameron, Jr.
'■^ A, A.S., Ed.M.

"^ ja" Counselor

..;JiJO

Louise R. Dowerman
A.B.. B.S. in L.S.

Librarian

George F. McCall, Jr.
B.S., M.Ed.

Coordinator of
Placement

SPECIAL SERVICE STAFF

James F. McGowan

B.S., M.A.

Director of Law
Enforcement and
Police Administration

^ Ronald A. Narel
B.A., M.A.

Counselor

Mary Pardee
A.B., B.S. in L.S.

Librarian

Margaret F. Porter
B.A., M.Ed.

Reading Specialist

Lois D. Shull,
B.A., M.A.

Librarian

Roger B. Solomon
B.S., B.D., M.A.,
Ed.S., Prof. Dip.

Counselor

Leon Watts, B.S., M.A.

Counselor

Rex Brumley, B.S., M.A.

Chairman of the
Department

Nancy E. Estes
B.S., M.A.

Elaine Gavjgan
B.S., M.A.

Wilbur H. GIfford
B.S.P.E., M.P.H.

DEPARTMENT of HEALTH,

PHYSICAL EDUCATION,

and RECREATION

Alma J. King
B.S., M.Ed.

R. L. Landers
B.B.A., M.E.

William M. McGehee
B.S., M.A.

Clinton E. Morris
B.S., M.A.

■ »» .9* K William A. Porterfield

B.S., M.A.

Leroy W. Wheat
B.5., M.A.

54

,^1

DIVISION OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

Frances Abbott
B.S., M.S.

Biology

A .^^\

- ]<. x^ Alvin D. Aurand

■* %i B.S., M.S.

Engineei'ing

William G. Bailey
B.S., M.Ed.
Chemistry

Wallace E. Bell
B.S.E., M.Ed.

Mathematics

Dan H. Bishop

B.S., M.A.
Physics

VWi^fKf'

Robert C. Cassell
B.S., Ph.D.

Chairman of the
Division

Lucius D. DeYampert
B.S., M.S.T,

Geology

David E. Erikson
B.A., M.A.

Mathematics

Arthur H. Foss
A.B., A.M.

Head, Dept. of Math.

Minerva Holmberg
A.B., A.M.

Biology

Lucille Holmes
B.S., M.S.
Biology

Annie L. Lang
A.B., A.M.
Mathematics

Joel M. Martin
B.S., M.A.E.

Director of
Planetarium

V John W. Medusky

B.S., M.S., M.S.T.

Mathematics

Ben Bockstege, Jr.
B.S., M.S

Mathematics

Henry Paul Graziano
B.S., M.Ed.
Biology

ft»», <J» I Neal T. Morar

B.S., M.S.
. _-, Biology

Alan B. Cantor
B.S.Ed., M.A.

Mathematics

V. 0. Guinn
B.S., M.S.

Chemistry

Ralph H. Naleway
B.S., M.A.

A\ "". Mathematics

George Douglas Clement
B.S.E., M.Ed.

Mathematics

Ronald Haire
B.S., M.S.

Chemistry

Ellen G. Nelms
B.S., M.Ed.

Chemistry

James C. Cindon
B.A., M.S.

Geology

Richard D. Hill, Jr.
B.S., M.Ed.

Head, Dept. of
Physical Sciences

, «* U Dudley A. Palmer

B.S.A.

Horticulture

55

^*^l

Mary Louise Perfect
B.S., M.S.

Mathematics

C. E. Rhodes
B.A., M.A.

Physics

Frank P. Sivik
B.S., M.S.

Biology

Charles S. VanArsdall
B.S., M.A.

Mathematics

Lewis A. Warwick
A.B., M.A.

Mathematics

Albert A. Will, Jr.
B.L.A., M.S.

Horticulture

(K— ..-„ Willard S. OeLara

fsi*9^fM B.M., M.M., D.M.

Chairman o( the
Department

mS^

1*1

I>gK '^W Audelia Blankenship

, - ^ B.M., M.M.

Music

George J. Cavanagh
B.A., M.A.

Speech

Elvira Dunlevy
A.B., M.S.

jk^. Speech

Majorie B. Esco
A.B., M.A.

Speech

DEPARTMENT OF
FINE ARTS

William George Kern
B.F.A., M.A.

Art

Betty McMillion
A.B., M.A.

Music

Mildred Mulliken
B.A., M.A.

Speech

1,1 David E. Pactor

B.S.. M.A,

Lawrence D. Tobe
B.S., M.A.

Art

L k

Mary E. Wallace
B.S., M.A.

Art

Jimmy 0. Woodle
B.A., M.M.

Edward F. Kotchi
B.S., M.Ed.

Assistant Dean for
Technical Education

TECHNICAL EDUCATION

^i

Lawrence R.

Dieterich, Jr., B.S.

Director, Hotel-
Motel Administration

56

%

Walter A. Faiks
B.S., M.S.

Technical Education

^^

Gordon Mondin
B.S.

Technical Education

John A. Sci(;liano
B.S.Ed.

Electronics

Constance M.
Borgschulte
B.A., M.A.

Ann C. Bricgel
B.A.. M.A.

English

Charles W. Brogdon
B.S., M.S.

English

Marina BurdicK
B.A., M.A.

Spanish

A.B., M.A.

English

Alfredo A. Cabaliero
B.A., M.A.

■>> Spanish

' -7K «c| Barbara J. Clark

A.B., M.A.

English

DIVISION OF

LANGUAGE

AND LITERATURE

Homer M. Ledhetter, B.S., M.A., Ed.D.
Chairman of the Division

Harry E. Crews
B.A., M.Ed.

English

Lee Farthing Dickerson
B.S., M.A.

English

Helen A. Easterly
B.A., M.A.

English

Lucile Glaze
B.S.. M.A.

English

Harold B, Hayes
B.A.J.. M.E., Ph.D.,
in MX.

Jouf nalisin

Neda E Hill
B.A., M.A.

English

Grace K. Johnston
A.B., M.A.

English

Willard R. Kempton

A.B., M.A.

Head. Dept. of Mod-
ern Foreign Lang.

s-H Jean Magers

" B.A., M.A.

English

Elsie E. Owen
A.B., M.A.

English

57

John Pawlowski
B.A., M.A.

Spanish

Donald C. Rigg
B.A., M.Ed.

English

Norman S. Stebner
B.S., M.A.

English

jf ^xk Frances Pedigo

' ^ A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

English

Jarrett C. Pharr
A.B., M.A.

Spanish

Judith M. Rehm
B.Ed., M.A.

English

Mary Russell
B.A., M.A.

English

David Alan Shaw
B.A., M.Ed.

English

Natalie G. Smith
B.S., M.A., Ph.D.

German

Arthur Vanmeeveren
B.A., M.A.

English

John Carter Weldon
A.B., M.A.

Fiench

«,S, Roy L. Yater

^f B.A., M.A.

/ English

John F. Lot7
B.S., M.A., Ed.D.

Chairman of the
Department

Timothy W. Donohue
B.A., L.L.B., M.B.A.

Denver L. Ellison
B.S. & B.A., M.A.T.

Joan H. Holloway
B.A., M.A.

Doris M. IHorton
B.S., M.S.

DEPARTMENT OF

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

AND ECONOMICS

Charles B. Howell, Jr.
B.S., M.B.A.

, _, I Dennis W. Neely

.-< -A. A.B., M.Ed.

Mary Paul
B.S., M.S.

Reyburn R. Roulston
B.A., M.A.

Maxine G. Schenks
A.B., M.A.

Peter S. Shenosky
B.S., M.A.

Marion N. West
B.A., M.A.

Millicent Williams
B.S., M.B.A.

58

DIVISION OF SOCIAL SCIENCE

■ I Wayne E. Barton

T~> «~' B.A., M.A.

, ■ Education

Stewart Brown
B.A.E., M.Ed.

Head, Department of
Political Science

t; <^.«^

John M. Bunch
B.A.E., M.Ed.

Head, Department
of History

Paul W. Cauffiel
B.A., M.S., Ed.O.

Head, Department of
Psycfiology and
Education

Dewey M. Stowers, B.A., M.A., Ed.D.

Cfiairman of the Division

**' Gilbert S. Guinn

B.A., M.A.

History

,,^ _^ _» Curtiss W. Oakes

\Wi*»/| B.S., M.A.

Political Science

John L. Redding, Jr.
A.B., M.A.

History

George Roberts
A.B., M.A.

Psycfiology

li Harry J. Schalenian, Jr.

-* *~ - B.S., M.A.

Geography

Ralph Clark

A.B., M.A.

History

John P. Hays
A.B., M.A.

History

E. J. A. Schindeler
B.S., M.A.

Political .Science

Neil S. Crispo
B.S., M.S.

Director of Student
Activities; Sociology

Louis J. Kilmer
B.A., M.A.

Sociology

Harold J. Theriault
^f B.S., M.S.

History

Charlotte Ford
B.A., M.A.T.

Political Science

Dorothy Leach
B.A., M.Ed., Ed.D.

Psychology

John D. Wells
A.B., M.A.

Philosophy

<^<9 Jlmmie C. Styles

■S U B.S., M.A., Ed.S.

DATA PROCESSING

M. J. Ellis
B.S., M.Ed.

59

William R. Odom
B.S.. M.S.

o

Fred I. Scott
B.S., M.Ed., M.A.

Margretta M. Styles
B.S.. M.N.
Director

NURSING EDUCATION

Rosmond A. Gallery
B.S., M.A.

Helen V. Dumas
B.S., M.A.

Mary C. Dunne
BS.N.E.. M.A.

Wilthelma Holt, B.S.

Sandra V. Kindred
B.S.N., M.S.N.

Mary C. Ladwig
B.S.N., M.Ed.

r-m m: n^m Adele Miller,

'* *^ W B.S., M.A.

/I '^a/iewieU to- P^ieAMeMi (luAnmcj.

As this, the first issue of Silver Sands, goes to
press, we have received the sad news that our found-
ing president. Dr. Joe B. Rushing, is leaving the
Junior College of Broward County. Dr. Rushing has

Joe B. Rushing

B.A., M.A., Ph.D.
President of the Junior College of Broward County

resigned to become president of the newly-formed
Tarrant County Junior College District in his native
Texas.

President Rushing's resignation is a kind of
milestone in the history of JCBC. When Dr. Rushing
first came to Broward County, our college was an
idea. He made that idea a reality, first at the old
airport campus, with 700 students and a staff of 42,
and later at the Davie campus he himself planned.
Today, under President Bushings leadership, we
have expanded, and expanded again. We have a
staff of 250, an enrollment of 4,583, and a national
reputation for educational excellence. In addition,
Broward Jimior has become a cultural center for our
community. It has attracted students, professors, and
their families; has presented plays, radio programs,
and exhibits; and has sponsored lecturers and per-
fonners of world-wide stature.

Dr. Rushing should be justly proud of his
achievements as he leaves us. His departure is, in
a very real sense, the end of the beginning at JCBC.

We shall miss Dr. Rushing greatly. We con-
gratulate our founder upon his nesv position, and
we wish him well.

60

HOW TO STUDY

By
GEORGE F. McCALL JR.

L.

JET me say at the beginning, there is no easy
way to learn. Learning takes time and long arduous
hours of work. This work pays dividends that cannot
be equalled by any other endeavor. Study is re-
warding when done properly and in a business-like
manner. Paramount in your mind should be the
idea that this study is being done for your benefit,
not the instructor's.

The skills you will need in college are: reading,
writing, listening, comprehending, memorizing, tak-
ing examinations, making notes, budgeting one's time,
and many others. You already have a certain pro-
ficiency in most of these skills, but are you ready
to put them to work? Can you use these skills effi-
ciently and to your best advantage?

Study is a Do It Yourself program. Learning is
a natural process, requiring stimulations and control
to be productive. Your capacity to learn is far
greater than you realize; you must, however, do
many things to keep the level of learning efficiency
reasonably high and personally satisfying. These
things only you can do. It makes little difference
what you have inherited, what other people have
done for you — no one can give you knowledge,
skill or ability. These you must acquire yourself
through the process of learning.

You must Get Ahead and Stay Ahead. It is
far easier to keep ahead of the course requirements
and assignments than it is to catch up once you
get behind. Preview each unit of study before it is
presented by the instructor. Use your course outline
along with your textbooks to stay ahead. Try this
preview method and find out what a difference it
will make in your attention in class, your ability
to make clear, well-organized notes, your readiness
to enter voluntarily into class discussions, your
ability to ask intelligent questions, and your general
feeling of confidence about the whole college
situation.

Do not be afraid to conform. You can raise the
level of your personal efficiency by conforming to
the specific requirements of the school and to the
way your particular instructor "plays the game." The
"non-conformist" tends to condemn and reject that
which he does not understand, while conforming
rigidly to the dictates of his own limited knowledge.
The non-conformist revels in his own oddity. The
person who conforms and "plays the game" will
make better grades than he who does not, because
the conformist readily accepts the disciplines neces-
sary for efficient learning.

Do not be ashamed of ignorance. There is no
one quite so ignorant as the individual who thinks
he is not. When you admit, without shame, resent-
ment or embarrassment, that you do not know, you
have taken the first step toward learning.

Learning takes time. Do not get in a rush.
When an instructor asks you to prepare a term
paper, theme, or assignment to be handed in at a
specified future date, go to work on it at once.
Evenly distribute the work over the allocated time
with the assignment completed and ready a few days
prior to the due date. Paramount in your mind
should always be: I am doing this to learn as much
as I possibly can by completing this assignment to
the best of my ability, not for the benefit of the
instructor or just to get the job done. Learning is a
slow, steady process which can never be hurried or
compressed into capsule form. You cannot reduce
learning into a few hours just to meet the deadline.

Read, Look and Listen with an active, open
mind and with a definite goal. Preview each new
unit to get the general idea of the whole unit prior
to detailed study. Study with questions always be-
fore you. Ask yourself questions that begin with the
words Who, What, When, Why, Where, and How
as you Preview, Read, Recite, or Review a unit.
This will give direction and meaning to your learn-
ing. Real learning is only effective when you can

61

make active use of what you have read, heard or
seen and can reproduce such learnings. Students
who spend about half their study time or more on
recitation tend to make better grades than those
who do not.

Prevent Catastrophe. Consolidate your learning
gains. Do not attempt to master a new unit in one
sitting — it cannot be done. You cannot hold minute
detail in your mind from study time to examination
time without a series of reviews of the material of
any course for a semester's duration. If you try,
you will find the results disastrous and disappoint-
ing. The more efficient method of learning, remem-
bering, and recalling material is to study the unit
just to the point of immediate recall; then leave it
and review it the following day. Plan to periodically
review every week to ten days, making sure you
can still recall the material easily and readily with-
out either textbooks or notes. Keep testing yourself
on ways you can apply this new learning in unfa-
miliar situations or problems. Schedule reviews every
so often during the terms so that you will be able
to avoid the panic of having to cram for examina-
tions.

Learn to like people. Let them know you HI
them. When people know you like them, your schoc
your teachers, school administrators, your family an
yourself, they respect and like you in return. Tl
path of communication between men is not a on
way street. If you want people to respect you, yc
must show by your behavior that you respect ther
The purposes of teachers and students are exact!
the same; therefore, students and teachers mu
work together.

Practice these basic study methods for a fe
weeks until effective study habits begin to forr
Man, being a creature of habits, should make habi
work for him, not against him. If you still are expi
riencing difficulty, or are not enjoying your collej
work as you should, call the Student Personnel O
fice and have a conference with one of the counse
ors. You may have some little difficulty that require
special attention.

Come in as soon as you are ready to discus
your career plans or your choice of a major fiel
of study.

You are always welcome.

r>

SHinf BfilGfil, PflLf

By Mr. Jarrett C. Pharr

Instructor in Spanish:
Division of Language and Literature.

Illustrated by Lew Alquist

Guns are silent, my fighting done.
The road South calls, a trail is clear;
I'm headed home, though sick with fear,
I dread to reach Savannah.

My horse is black, the moon is full,
A pale light shines on death's wan tone;
Although I ride a known path home,
I seek a lost Savannah.

On through the night and ghostly mist.
My mount runs strong, dull hoofbeats sing
Sadness enshrouds me hovering,
I sense a dead Savannah.

Forward into lonely stretches, ^0

Passing famine, life so fleeting.
Naked hunger, wounds yet bleeding;
I weep for my Savannah.

62

RAMPAGE OF 8AFFLIM6

BETSY

by ANN BARDSLEY

She is just a scattered collection of wispy
breezes now, ruffling the Scottish heather and push-
ing a bit of tumbleweed across the plains of Ne-
braska. Not so long ago we called her Betsy, and
her mighty winds cut a swath of destruction across
the tropics.

She was born in warm waters far to the south,
and as Betsy began her northward journey, pack-
ing a powerful punch. South Florida watched anx-
iously. Our fears seemed foolish, for the big storm
meandered past our danger zone and moved toward
the Carolina coast. Cape Hatteras was already be-
ginning to feel her winds and tides when fickle
Betsy wheeled and headed south, turning our pleas-
ant Labor Day routine into a race against time. We
boarded and taped and sandbagged; and loaded up
on candles, Sterno, and Spam. As always, bread be-
came as scarce as gold.

Big, Bad Betsy lashed the Bahamas in blind
fury, and then hesitated, unsure whether to make
Florida or Cuba her next victim. Resolution restored,
she headed west, raking the fabulous "Gold Coast"
with winds as high as 140 mph, and ten-foot tides.

There were flooded streets and homes, broken win-
dows, soaked rugs, uprooted trees, and boats beached
on the highways. Death came, too, as a falling tree
in Tampa, a flapping shutter in Palm Beach, a heart
attack in Homestead, a live wire on a Miami street.
First-aid stations and shelters, like the one here at
Broward Junior, were havens for those who could
not trust their homes to the fury of the gale.

When it was all over, we began the weary task
of cleaning up the mess. A government inspection
team came, and was kind enough to declare us a
"disaster area," but all in all, we got off easy. For
Betsy moved on to bigger and better things, dev-
astating the coast of Louisiana with 14-foot tides
and winds officially clocked at nearly 190 mph. The
damage there is still being counted. The exact num-
ber of deaths will probably never be known.

If there is a lesson in the saga of Big, Bad
Betsy perhaps it lies in the fact that, although a
voyage to the stars lies just beyond the horizon,
we are not yet masters on our own Earth. We can
destroy ourselves at the flick of a finger but we
cannot stay the winds or hold back the tide.

63

POETRY BY TOM TOHTZ

FOR DR. HOMER M. LEDBETTERS
ENGLISH 230 CLASS

ILLUSTRATED BY KAREN WINKOPP

^o Fujiyama

The morning I walked out
And beheld your majesty
In the clear and thrilling

dawn,
The rising sun painted your

white crown
The color of cherry

blossoms.
I bowed my head, and my

heart
Sang with joy.

Co the "=10.

r

I

arrlord *Tx!/Ao«>e Oou(<>
oQre jCept at ^.aaukuni oAriMe

Brave sons who fought for your land,
Your souls awakened by three claps
Of the hand,
May find rest in hearing Mac Arthur

sleeps.
But his justice keeps
Alive your Imperial land.
Be not sad of our victory
Or of your losing;
Be glad for his choosing
To let Japan live and hatred die.

* Yasukuni Shrine is a sacred place in Tokyo where it is believed the souls of
Japan's outstanding warriors are kept. In the Shinto religion, one claps the hands
three times to gain the attention of the soul to whom he wishes to pray.

64

I" OUR FEATURE WRITERS

JACK CRESSE, author of "Sports at JCBC," is a Sophomore with
extensive experience in journalism. The first half of his Freshman year
he was a staff writer for the Venetian Crier and was promoted to
sports editor during the second semester. Jack is presently associate
editor for the Crier, and is also working as a sports correspondent
for the Fort Lauderdale News.

MILDRED EDWARDS, author of "Neil S. Crispo" and "The SAB,"
is a 1964 graduate of Dillard Senior High School, where she served
as a varsity cheerleader. Mildred is now a staff writer for Silver
Sands and an initiate of Circlettes.

BARBARA GLOWASKI, author of "The New Left," is a recent Au-
gust graduate of JCBC. She is now attending Florida State Univer-
sity and was just appointed Under-Secretary for Junior College Affairs.
At JCBC, Barbara was a Freshman senator. Treasurer of SGA, a
member of Phi Theta Kappa, and Sophomore Girl of the Year.

PAT HART, author of "Cheating," is presently attending the Univer-
sity of Florida School of Journalism and Communications. This past
summer she attended JCBC and served as feature editor for the
Venetian Crier. Pat has also been photo editor for the Seminole,
yearbook of the University of Florida.

SHARON ROESCH, author of "The Freshman," is attending JCBC
on an honors scholarship. During her Freshman year she served as
a Freshman senator, a member of the Student Speakers Bureau, and
worked on the college radio program. Sharon is presently Secretary
of SGA, President of SNEA, Second Vice-President of SFEA, and an
initiate of Phi Theta Kappa.

ti

1

EDITOR'S NOTE

All that remains of Silver Sands I
are some five hundred unclaimed
copies, very little student disap-
pointment, a lot of public praise
and a great deal of success. Well
over two thousand copies of the

yearbook-magazine have been dis-
tributed— a record achievement in
the annals of Broward Junior Col-
lege publications.

But it is just a part of the collec-
tion, others must follow. And, so,
here is Silver Sands II. Most of the
faculty feels we could never excel

our first attempt, many of the
students think it quite possible.
Whether we have or have not can
be seen on the following pages.
Look, read, enjoy, and be the
judge.

John E. Leatherwood

Editor-in-Chief

STAFF AND ADVISORS

Editor-in-Chief John E. Leatherwood

Assistant Editor Pamela Edwards

Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley

Feature Editor David Byrne

Art and Photographic Editor Lewis Alquist

Sports Editor John Wolfe

General Staff Assistant Carol Shafer

Photographers David Porter,

Norman Summey, Bill Martin
and Ken Smith

Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes

Chairman of the Division of Language

and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter

COVER: The annual Broward Junior College
Christmas tree lighting; photo by David Porter.

Seal of Silver Sands

H3VJI

SCIMA

SILVER

SANDS

College of Brouiard County

Fort Lauderdale. Florida

DECEMBER, 1965

TABLE OF CONTENTS

THE BLUE AND SILVER

COLLEGIATE INTEREST POLL 2

THE QUESTION OF SUB ROSAS

Matthew J. Faison 5

FALL FESTIVITIES 8

THE RUSHING TESTIMONIAL Pam Serre 24

APPOMATTOX — AN AMERICAN

TRAGEDY (Essay) Dr. Harold B. Hayes 26

ANN'S REVIEW Ann Bardsley 31

IN REMEMBRANCE OF THANKSGIVING 32

RESPONSIBILITIES (Poem) Dean Bayer 34

HANDS OF LOVE (Poem) Colleen Fairbank 35

ISAIAH 9:6, 7 36

THE URGE TO KILL (Short Story) Marty Roland 38
SPORTS: PEACH BASKET

PREDICTIONS / INTRAMURALS John Wolfe 41

FOOTBALL AND THE JUNIOR COLLEGE

Bill Kelley 44

PACESETTERS WITH A HOLIDAY FLAIR

Pam Edwards 46

THE LYCEUMS Carol Shafer 48

SERVICE CLUBS OF JCBC 50

SGA Ann Bardsley 54

THE COLLEGE STUDENT AND THE DRAFT

Russ Sepielli 58

PATH OF IKEYA-SEKI Joel Martin 60

THE SILENT COLLEGE DILEMMA Charlie Burt 61

ON CAMPUS (Selected Cartoons)

Various Cartoonists 63

OUR FEATURED V/RITERS Back Cover

'T^ BLUE CUtd SILVER

COLLEGIATE
INTEREST
POLL

THIS POLL, WAS DEVISED AND CONDUCTED BY THE SILVER SANDS DURING THE MONTH OF
NOVEMBER. THE PURPOSE FOR SUCH A SURVEY WAS TO DETERMINE AS ACCURATELY AS
PRACTICAL PURPOSES ALLOW THE INTERESTS AND PREFERENCES OF JCBC STUDENTS. THE
CATEGORIES CONSIST OF A WIDE RANGE OF VARIOUS SUBJECTS. EACH OF PARTICULAR OR
GENERAL INTEREST TO ALMOST EVERYONE. BALLOTS WERE CIRCULATED AND THEN FILLED OUT
BY THE STUDENTS. THE ANSWERS WERE THEN COMPILED BY OUR STAFF. THE RESULTS. CON-
SISTING OF THE TOP SELECTIONS FROM EACH CATEGORY. ARE PRESENTED ON THE FOLLOWING
PAGES. NOTE: THE PREFERENCES ARE LISTED IN THE ORDER IN WHICH THEY WERE CHOSEN.

Most Outstanding National Figure

President Lyndon B. Johnson
Barry Goldwater
John F. Kennedy

Most Outstanding Personality
of the 20th Century

John F. Kennedy
Sir Winston Churchill
Dr. Albert Schweitzer
Ambassador Adiai Stevenson

Most Outstanding World Figure

Sir Winston Churchill
Pope Paul VI
U. Thant

Novelist

Ernest Hemingway
Ian Fleming
John Steinbeck

Most Influential Historical Figure

Abraham Lincoln
Sir Winston Churchill
Jesus Christ

Poet

Robert Frost
Edgar Allen Poe
Carl Sandburg

Playwrighf

Tennessee Williams
Arthur /Wilier
William Shakespeare

Spectator Sport

Football

Basketball

Baseball

Artist

Pablo Picasso
Michelangelo
Norman Rockwell

Participator Sport

Football

Tennis

Bowling

News Broadcast

Huntley-Brinkley Report
Walter Cronkite
CBS News Night

Sports Figure

Johnny Unitas
Sandy Koufax
Mickey Mantle

Magazine

Playboy

Seventeen

Life

Most Interesting College Course

English

World Civilization

Psychology

Mathematics

Sociology

Newspaper

The Miami Herald
New York Times
Fort Lauderdale News

TV Show

The Man from U.N.C.L.E.

I Spy

The Tonight Show

Automobile

Jaguar XKE
Corvette Sting Ray
Ford Mustang

Comedian

Jonathan Winters
Bill Cosby
Red Skelton

Past Motion Picture

Gone with the Wind

West Side Story

The Ten Commandments

It's a Mad, Mad, Mad, Mad World

Female Vocalist

Barbra Streisand
Joan Baez
Petula Clark

Recent Motion Picture

Goldfinger

Shenandoah

The Sound of Music

What's New, Pussycat?

Vocal Group

Supremes

Peter, Paul and Mary

Lettermen

Motion Picture Actor

John Wayne
Peter Sellers
Sean Connery

Instrumental Group

Ventures

Tiajuana Brass

Dave Brubeck Quartet

Motion Picture Actress

Bette Davis
Julie Andrews
Elizabeth Taylor

Vocal-Instrumental Group

Beach Boys
Beatles
Rolling Stones

Stage Actor

Richard Burton

Sir Lawrence Olivier

Rex Harrison

Instrumentalist

Al Hirt
Peter Nero
Duane Eddy
Louis Armstrong

Stage Actress

Julie Andrews
Anne Bancroft
Barbra Streisand

Fast Songs

Loule-Loule

Satisfaction

Wipe-out

Mo-Jo Workout

Get Off of My Cloud

Male Vocalist

Andy Williams
Johnny Mathis
Elvis Presley

Slow and Other Songs

More

Moon River

Theme from "A Summer Place"

Cast Your Fate to the Wind

Goldfinger

ffl ouoion Of

By

MATTHEW J. FAISON

Can the college admit organizations which are
admittedly illegal, throw parties at which no restric-
tions are made about serving liquor to minors, and
have entertained reputations that are a great deal
less than enviable?

Can the college turn away organizations which
profess again and again a desire to serve the campus
as organized social clubs, clubs that could possibly
inject adrenalin into the heart of apathy which
infects most school service projects and functions,
and, moreover, in which a large portion of the
student body has shown interest?

These are the horns of the dilemma the college
administration must grapple with. The history is
interesting. The future will be dramatic.

For months the issue of fraternities and the ques-
tion of their legality and usefulness has been pon-
dered by the students and the administration of the
college. There have never been any clearcut pro-
cedures set down for the handhng of students who
are members of off-campus fraternities. No severe
disciplinary actions have been initiated by the col-
lege, the fraternities continuing to flourish.

Past semesters have seen the college and Student
Activities Board refuse the petitions of the fraterni-
ties to come on campus as true Greek letter societies.
At the same time, however, the fraternities were
refusing to compromise with administrative standards.

Controversy raged. The school newspaper, Ve-
netian Crier, obtained photostatic copies of state
laws seeming explicit on which colleges and uni-
versities were to be afforded the privilege of allow-
ing fraternities on their campuses. Broward and all
other junior colleges in the state of Florida were
excluded from the list.

These laws were printed last March and reprinted
again in issue No. 4 of the Venetian Crier on October
1st of this year.

232.39 Secret Societies prohibited in public schools.
It shall be unlawful for any person, group or or-
ganization to organize or establish a fraternity, sorority
or other secret society whose membership shall be com-
prised in whole or in part of pupils enrolled in any
public school.

State law 2.32.40 substantiates the above law by
making it illegal for any pupil in a public school to
join or pledge a fraternity or sorority. The teeth
provided to the administrations of the various public
schools, which include junior colleges, by the law
are in section 232.41.

County boards are hereby required to enforce tlie

provisions of this law by suspending or, if necessary,

expelling any pupil . . . who refuses or neglects to

observe these provisions.

The administration has not yet chosen to expel or
suspend any of the fraternity or sorority members,
although a large portion of the active members are
known to the Director of Student Activities, Mr. Neil
Crispo, and to Dr. Jack Taylor, Dean of Students
and interim college President. The school has made
clear its position to act when it sees fit at any time
in the future without warning to the students
involved.

o o o

For a good many years fraternal organizations
have influenced college life. Often the organization
of social fraternities and sororities has been of service
to the student and to the institution. On other oc-
casions, the results of fraternity actions have been
detrimental.

Before one can discuss the worth of such organiza-
tions on this campus, one must first understand the
differences, deficits, and advantages of the many
types of fraternities.

The oldest and most selective of these organiza-
tions are the honorary fraternities such as Phi Beta
Kappa or Phi Theta Kappa, which serves on a junior
college level. Also included in the general classifi-
cation of non-social fraternities are the professional
groups. On this campus. Phi Beta Lambda, a business
fraternity, and Delta Psi Omega, a dramatic fra-
ternity, are representative. The functions and pur-
poses of these organizations are, as their name
implies, to promote scholarship in the case of the
honoraries, and to provide a common ground for
people with similar professional goals and interests
as in the case of the professional fraternities.

Social fraternities and sororities, on the other hand,
exist in the interest of fellowship and as a media for
social contact. It is not to be denied that social
fraternities contribute to their colleges and universi-
ties by promoting various funds, charity drives and
the like, but the chief reason they continue to exist
is the social life they offer.

In order for the Junior College of Broward County
to incorporate social organizations as part of student
activities as most other junior colleges in the state
have done, including Miami-Dade and Palm Beach, a
considerable amount of support by the administration
and the school board would be required. Neither
group has expressed any great feeling for the move-
ment to date.

In order to get to the substance of the problem it

Members of Sigma Tau Sigma, one of the more noted of the Junior College sub rosas, take avid part in WPA work
like that pictured above. Such activities are categorized as "petty vandalism."

becomes necessary to see the problem as it is seen by
the fraternity member himself.

Walter Swanson had been a member of Sigma Tau
Sigma since its inception in high school when it was
formed by members of the various service clubs at
the school. He was president until recently when he
resigned in order to meet requirements for candidacy
in the student government election. Swanson has
been a leader in the cause for legal fraternities on
this campus and was more than willing to be inter-
viewed.

The reasons fraternities ever began are probably
countless. Walt explained why despite the threats
of the administration his fraternity continued to
grow. "The reason we get as many people as we do
is that colleges are associated with fraternities. The
word fraternity and Greek letters just have a magic
about them."

There is an economic consideration included in the
decision on whether or not to join a fraternity. In
many large universities students avoid fraternities
because of the cost. In contrast to that, one of the
main reasons fraternities exist at non-resident junior
colleges seems to be the money a member can save.
Most of the fraternities at Broward charge dues of
$5.00 a month and that $5.00 usually provides enter-
tainment for two week-ends during that month.
Swanson explained the strategy. "To go out on a
date, even to a movie, usually runs about $5.00 — we
pay that much in dues for the whole month. One
hall party at any of the local halls usually costs
about $100 for the room and the band and we have
enough money left over for a small party later on
in the month."

Swanson was quick to point out that his fraternity
never has a party on the same night as a school j
dance or program. Thus, entertainment was pro-j
vided for three week-ends of the month for about
$5.00 excluding extras.

Mark Fried, president of Phi Lambda Theta,
agreed with Swanson. "Nobody in their right mind
would have a party in their own house." Fried said
that his fraternity paid the same amount for dues as
STS and that their system of renting a hall for
parties was similar. "Most dues pay for the place
and the band. Besides," he added, "it gives you
someplace to go."

Most of the ill will between the administration
and the fraternities can be traced back to a party
that was held last year when the place that was
rented was damaged. The owner brought his com-
plaints to the college since the group involved rep-
resented themselves as a sanctioned organization.
The question of drinking was brought up.

Sigma Tau Sigma, like all fraternities, has had to
make its own decisions about drinking. "We usually
buy the mixers," Swanson said, "but not the booze."
When asked about provisions for complying with
state law and underage drinkers he said, "There are
no restrictions about that now." It is a case of bring
your own — if you can buy it you can drink it. STS
does make use of a disciplinary board which has the
power to ban a member from parties or to make an
offender, usually the guy who drank the most at the
previous party, serve as the bartender. As a badge of
honor he has to wear a dunce cap.

The purpose of the disciplinary board is, in Swan-
son's words, "to make sure that everything is in

"Let's face it, we're breaking the law.'

orderly fashion. To assure that everyone acts like a
gentleman so we can come back."

Places are not always easy to come by. Considering
the drinking issue, Swanson thought a moment.
"Let's face it, we're breaking the law."

Fried's answer to the liquor question was similar.
"Everybody brings his own. Most of the time we
don't even buy the mixers." Occasionally a fraternity
will foot the liquor bill. "We tried that once; it
didn't work out."

Discipline problems are less complicated for Fried.
"We always hire a cop."

The future of fraternities on the campus seems to
be at best uncertain, at least as far as the college is

officially concerned. Fraternities might have a defi-
nite place in the college social strata and they might
serve in a political sense. Swanson feels that they
could be instrumental in the formation of a two
party system in coming elections. He spoke of last
year's SGA in reference to shortcomings in the pres-
ent system. "If they (the administration) had let some
of the fraternity people run in the last election, we
might have had a better student government." To set
the record straight, all but five members of last
year's freshman senate were fraternity or sorority
members. Most of them were dropped due to grades
or resigned as senators when the ruling was passed
that all fraternity members who were in any student
activity would have to either quit that activity or
their fraternity.

Swanson believes that fraternities can offer the
college something in the way of a more complete
social life, something which he feels is lacking now.
"It's hard to get to know anybody without some
social activities." Again Fried agreed. "You get to
meet new people — I met a lot of guys that I have
learned to like."

The interview lost some of its early tension and
Swanson quipped, "It's good to have friends — -some-
body you could borrow a dollar from — if they had
a dollar."

Some of the fraternities have taken steps to pre-
pare for the future. Sigma Tau Sigma has applied
for and received the right to incorporate and is
recognized by the state. Phi Lambda Theta has
flirted with the idea of seeking the sponsorship of an
International Men's Club and petitioning the college
for permission to come on as a service organization.
But foremost in the minds of most fraternity mem-
bers is that time when the college will act — either
to admit them as student activities or to take dis-
ciplinary action.

If the college reverses and decides to allow
fraternities on campus, they will no doubt come
under the auspices of the Student Activities Board
and will be subject to the rules that apply to all
service clubs with a few possible exceptions. In the
past, similar offers were either ignored or refused
for various reasons. One of them being that originally
the college would not allow the use of Greek letter
names and the idea of changing their name and
buying new pins and accessory paraphernalia dis-
couraged the fraternities to whom the offer was
made.

The last question thrown at the past president of
Sigma Tau Sigma and the president of Phi Lambda
Theta was how their fraternities would react if the
administration opened the doors.

Fried, whose organization may be on the verge of
becoming a service club, was cautious. "We have a
different kind of members in the fraternity now than
we did in the beginning. They are interested in
what they can do for the school." He got to the
point. "If the school offers us anything presentable,
we would like to come on as a fraternity."

Swanson was brief. "They would come on just like
— that." He smiled and snapped his fingers.

Semester number one has past and with
it has gone part of the college year. Dur-
ing its days, we saw many changes take
place and many unforgettable moments
occur. Construction phase 2 came to a
completion, our President Joe B. Rushing
resigned, one campus election had little
votes and another had a lot of mud. We
saw our college receive full accreditation
and learned the meaning of "sub rosa."
But, above all. Semester I brought a lot
of fun, frolic, and festivities. The action
was all a go go and it all a went went —
into our lives and into our memories. The
following fourteen pages will recall the
highlights of these events, events that
gave us Fall Festivities of '65.

flUGU

. ^

Execution of justice; the "mob" carries a Rat off to his final reward, a bath in the JCBC lake.

f4

Other rats found their way, and heads, into the reflection pool. Noticeably worn from being put through the paces, Scott Ander-
son prepares for more "high command" interrogation.

10

3 - SfPTtlUBER 18

RAT
ACTIUITIES

A sophomore called "Hey, RAT," and a freshman
doffed his little blue cap and bowed humbly. With
others of his species, he was ordered to a table top,
where the nervous group began a ragged chorus of
"A freshman I am, SIR! ... A freshman I be, SIR!"
"LOUDER!" the sophomores ordered. . ."LOUDER!"

Every day of Rat Week was like that for the
harassed freshman. They wore their tell-tale rat caps
and chanted self-deprecating verses for their sopho-
more audience. Those whose performance didn't
satisfy the sophomores were hauled before rat court,
or received swifter justice at the fountain outside
the Administration Building.

The sophomores, of course, enjoyed the whole
thing tremendously. They were avenged for their
own rat humiliations of a year before.

Exhibiting his expert leadership qualities, Tony Long drills a
troop of rats.

Shades of the Spanish Inquisition; tribunal magistrates Dave

FitzGerald, Mat Faison, and Jack Cresse delivered "fair"

sentences to the condemned rats.

11

SEPTEMBER 13th VV IJ^^TT.

i-'

12

The night of Monday, September 13, the Junior
CoUege of Broward County proclaimed a "First" in
social activities.

On this occasion, eleven Broward County bands
performed at Winterhurst, playing three songs each.
The purpose of the dance was to have the bands
audition for future JCBC functions. Over 500 students
turned out and, of these, 250 voted on the bands,
rating each from "outstanding" to "totally unfit." The
Jesters won the rating with over half of the voters
classing them as "outstanding."

The entire event proved very successful and stu-
dent reaction was extremely enthusiastic.

RHURST ^ ^ ^

13

SEFfEMBER 18

RATS'
REPOSE

Here we are in the Dwight Rogers Room of the
Governors' Club Hotel. The date — September 18,
1965. The room is well decorated with white dinner
linen and every other table has a centerpiece. On
one end of the stage there is just enough decor to
set the mood.

Amid the orderly confusion, Bonnie McFetridge,
social chairman, reigns over decorations, tickets, and
coordinates the proceedings. The Civinettes prepare
to serve the refreshments, proving themselves a
willing and able work force. Bob Ripple, the unof-
ficial Master of Ceremonies and crowner of royalty,
prepares for his part; many others working quietly

14

and efficiently escape popular notice but not grati-
tude. This is a student activity in every sense.

The time comes and the room is prepared. Moving
in steadily is what will be an overflowing crowd of
four hundred students, all with one track minds —
FUN! The Bossmen, band for the evening, start off
with a nimiber bearing little resemblance to the
Vienna Waltz. For a length of time (no one remem-
bers how long) the vast majority of the students will
go into a semi-hypnotic trance as they do every
dance "in the book," plus a couple of their own
inventions, all to the throbbing beat that is pene-
trating waUs for blocks beyond.

Finally intermission comes and we begin the slow
return to sanity. Aware of reality, everybody and his
girlfriend begins to converse. After a short interval,
Scott Anderson and Jule Harke conquer the uproar
with surprisingly little volume as they begin their
folk songs.

Bob Ripple, now on stage, announces the time of
coronation. Chosen to reign over the festivities are
Scott Anderson and Darlene Neely, 1965 Rat King
and Queen. The entire ceremony goes off without
excessive pomp or stiffness and gives a natural climax
to the evening's events.

It all simis up to a terrific night as the "Rat" un-
derdogs are finally given equality and human rights.

15

OCTOBER 2nd, LYCEUM

m'

The Stranahan auditorium was filled the night of
October 22. Peter Nero, the internationally known
pianist, played that evening and tickets for the
performance were exhausted a week in advance.

His performance showed a good variation — from
jazz to classical to folk. Surely there was something
to appeal to every music enthusiast. Mr. Nero was
accompanied by a bass violinist and a drummer, both
of whom complimented the works of this great
pianist.

Mr. Nero and his accompanists were well received
and student opinion was undoubtedly enthusiastic.
One student commented that such music usually
does not appeal to him at all, but with Peter Nero
playing it, it was great. What compliment could be
more rewarding for an outstanding performance?

•i.>*w*-

16

PdEII

17

October 30 meant the annual
JCBC Halloween Dance. Tra-
ditionally there is a full moon, but
no one knows for sure "weather"
it came out or not. The voyage to
the scene was anything but dull.
Wiping the fog off of the wind-
shields kept co-eds occupied while
their dates made educated guesses
at where the road was. In due
time, a sign bearing the name
"Cote Ranch" appeared through
the downpour. Directly ahead a
river appeared, which fortunately
turned out to be a dirt road. Plow-

ing through the water, the barn
could be seen to the port side.
Anchor was dropped and the stu-
dents waded ashore, greeted at the
bam by the odor of carefully-
preserved dry hay.

The Jesters turned on the beat,
the cider poured freely, even when
it was shut off, and the students
danced with more zeal than style.
The costumes were numerous and
imaginative. Some were even con-
troversial, like that student who
came dressed as an Indian rain-
maker. The band rocked out and

OCT

30th

18

The HALLOWEEN

DANCE

the rain faded from conscience as
the beat permeated all.

In the midst of the action, King
Ugly was crowned. Underneath it
all was John Hall, winner of the
collection contest, the proceeds of
which went to charity. The king
reigned in all his hideous glory
while a couple of artificial bats
flopped around.

It was estimated that 600 brave
souls showed up at one time or
another — a real tribute to the
rain gods.

The King is crowned; John Hall — King Ugly
of 1965.

19

NOVEMBER
4 — 16

n MP.

Candidates for president — Craig I

(iUHPillGilS

and Bill Greene

Candidates for vice-president — Ricl(

On November 13, the "ticket" of Greene and Swanson made good use of a hurriedly
staged jam session to boost their campaign . . .

and Wall Swanson

20

A large crowd gatehered to hear the election debate

"It's unbelievable. It's just too great!" Bill Greene
said when the results of the election named him the
president and Rick Barnard the vice-president of the
Student Government Association.

In winning the most controversial and hotly-con-
tested election in JCBC history, Greene chalked up
368 votes to his opponent Craig Barkers 346, while
Barnard received 369 to his vice-presidential oppon-
ent Walt Swanson's 345 votes.

Following the unofficial announcement of the re-
sults by Neil Crispo, Director of Student Activities,
the election was contested and a recount called for.
Crispo explained that the move \mis unnecessary as
it is the procedure to recount the votes after an
election.

Vice-president Barnard chose to comment on the
problems that face the SGA this year.

"The major problem," Barnard said, "is the same
problem tliat SGA has had e\'er since \\e\e been
here — communication beh\'een students and their
SGA. If the people do not know why we're here and
what we're doing for them, dien tliey're not going to
care at all about SGA. As people come to appreciate
student government more, they'll come out and vote,
they'll go to the meetings, and they'll see that SGA
is an effective government and not just a bunch of
people who got together and decided to call them-
selves senators."

And the future of SGA ?

Greene and Barnard both agree that the future
looks "bright."

"The recent turnout in the election," Greene said,
"has shown that the students are interested in student

government. Student interest is the only thing that
can help SGA. Since this is higher and brighter than
ever before, I think that SGA will ha\e its best year. '
Rick Barnard said, "The future of SGA looks
brighter than it ever has been. The people serving in
SGA are intelligent and capable, and relations witli
the Administration are better than any previous SGA
ever hoped for."

It was a lively finish to a very heated week of
election activities.

21

NOV.
24th

THE BONFIRE

22

The JCBC campus was the
scene for the second annual bon-
fire and dance Wednesday night,
November 24. A good student
turn-out witnessed the bonfire, in-
geniously started by the "flame of
spirit" coming from a giant sea-
horse's mouth. Rousing cheers
from the cheerleaders were led by
Bonnie McFetridge and Dave
FitzGerald, the clown prince. A
view of things to come for the
basketball season was expressed
by Coach Clinton Morris and the
team. As the flames died down, a
spectacular fireworks display pre-
sented the grand finale of the
blaze.

To complete the event, the Bon-
fire Dance, feattuing the beat of
the Aerovons, was held on the
Student Center patio.

The bonfire was sponsored by
Circle K, and the Circlettes pro-
vided the refreshments for the fes-
tivities. School spirit and great fun
prevailed, definitely setting the
mood for the Thanksgiving
holiday.

23

THE RUSHING
TESTIMONIAL

Yligk

To

'r^4.

.- '.r""^'

'— l«'V

A numerous crowd oi guests honored Dr. Joe B. Rushing
with a spectacular farewell dinner.

A testimonial is anything which bears pubhc wit-
ness to one's excellence, service, or accomplishments,
by an expression of admiration and gratitude. An
event, such as diis, took place on the evening of
October 23, 1965, at the Governors' Club Hotel.
There, a numerous crowd of guests honored Dr.
Joe B. Rushing with a spectacular farewell dinner,
for the outstanding achievements which he rendered
during his presidency to all of us here at Broward
Junior College.

Among those attending the event were the faculty
and staff, friends and relatives, community leaders,
and representatives from various campus or-
ganizations.

The program began with an invocation by the
Reverend William Hinson, pastor of the First Baptist
Church, and then Dr. E. P. Lauderdale, the Dean of
Instruction at JCBC, presented the evening's lively
toastmaster. Business Director Albert Robertson.

Speeches, remarks, and addresses were given by
Mrs. Virginia Young, Chairman of the Broward
County Board of Public Instruction, Mr. Richard
Ward, Executive \'ice-President of the Fort Lauder-
dale Chamber of Commerce, Dr. Myron Ashmore,
Superintendent of the Broward County Public
Schools, Dr. James Wattenbarger, Director of Com-
munity Junior Colleges, Miss Sharon Roesch, Secre-
tary of SGA, Mr. John Leatherwood, Editor-in-Chief

of Silver Sands, Mrs. M. W. Tustison, Chairman of
the JCBC Advisory Committee, and Mr. Gene A.
Whiddon, a community leader and friend.

Special presentations were made by Dr. Robert C.
Cassell, chairman of mathematics and science at
JCBC, who awarded Dr. Rushing with an engraved
watch, as a token of gratitude from the faculty, and
Mr. Charles H. Gravett, of Coral Ridge National
Bank, gave Dr. Rushing a small remembrance of
Fort Lauderdale Beach to put in his Mustang and
take along to Texas — a surfboard, of course!

Entertainment was provided by the JCBC Glee
Club, under the direction of Dr. W. DeLara. The
musical organization sang selections from "My Fair
Lady" and "The Sound of Music." Also, as an added
surprise, Stranahan Senior Band ended the evening
by playing several favorites ranging from "The
Yellow Rose of Texas" to "He's a Jolly Good Fellow."

The dinner was a tremendous success, thanks to all
the fine people who worked so hard to make it that
way. Special thanks go to Dr. E. P. Lauderdale,
General Chairman, Edward F. Kotchi, Chairman of
the Steering Committee, Dr. Jack Taylor, heading the
Tickets and Invitation Committee, Jimmie C. Styles
of the Arrangements Committee, Mrs. Carol Innucci,
Chairman of the Publicity, the Civinettes Service
Club, whose members worked as usherettes, and to
Tropical Press, for donating the beautiful programs.

24

£By £Pam Selle

I

%^>

A Stranahan Senior High School majorette presents Dr, and Mrs.
Rushing with nostalgic reminders of Texas — yellow roses.

The JCBC Glee Club sang selections
from "My Fair Lady" and "The Sound
of Music."

Dr. Myron Ashmore, Superintendent of
Broward County Public Schools, de-
livered a fine address.

Mrs. M. W. Tustison, Chairman of the

JCBC Advisory Committee, signs the

guests' roll.

25

APPOMATTOX

26

AN AMERICAN
TRAGEDY

By
DR. HAROLD B. HAYES

Illustrated by
John Leatherwood

A painting hangs in the art mu-
seum in Galena, Illinois, indicat-
ing General U. S. Grant is sur-
rendering to Robert E. Lee. The
artist, Thomas Nast, depicts Grant
as a disheveled, beaten and crest-
fallen soldier; Lee as an immacu-
late cavalier, the epitome of a vic-
torious warrior. It's a tragedy of
history that the scene is a painting
and not a reality.

History is replete with such
tragedies. Achilles had his heel.
Caesar had his Brutus. Cleopatra
had her asp. As a result of Ap-
pomattox, the South suffered un-
der all of these — heels, brutes
and asps.

But don't ignore the conse-
quences to the North.

Lincoln could have caught the
last act.

Grant could have finished his
days in peace, with memories of
myriads of battles and bottles.
New York could have saved all
the pomp and expense of en-
tombing him.

Presently, the United States'
annual budget and deficit spend-
ing would be halved. Even with
such a reduction the costs would
still seem unreal.

But back to reality.

Heavy tomes about the Civil
War Between the States for South-
em Independence, Withdrawal and
Secession, 1861-1865, reap cob-
webs on library shelves. North
and South. These books guard the
past with prose. Each year more
and more books volunteer for sen-
tinel duty. Surely, you've read
"Jeb Stuart Was My Co-pilot,"
"Coming in on a Saddle and a
Prayer" and "Crusade in Gettys-
burg"?

Let's attempt to clear the cob-
webs these books have woven and
restore some perspective to his-
tory. We can do this without the
danger of re-opening hostilities
against Fort Sumter. Although,
with the South possessing Cape
Kennedy, Oakridge, Redstone,

Selma and Elvis Presley, the odds
would be a bit fairer than they
were in 1861. Nor should we at-
tempt to revive sectional rivalries.
Ask any Daughter of the Con-
federacy if animosities haven't
long, long been buried. After a full
century such things should be for-
gotten. What follows merely in-
tends to prevail against the mode
of portraying something for the
sake of popularity at the expense
of history.

Mark Twain wrote, "History is
literally — his story — and all de-
pends on who writes it."

The South, living in an intel-
lectual void for many years after
its defeat, devoted its historical
and literary talents to praising the
Herculean accomplishments of the
Confederate armies. With the ex-
ception of Lee, practically every
Confederate general, who was able
to dodge the Minnie balls, wrote
his inaccurate memoirs. These
writers were among the few priv-
ileged Southerners who knew
how to spell "secession." Their of-
ferings were part and parcel of the
South's cultural endeavors follow-
ing the war.

Southern culture in the decades
following the war could be de-
scribed as a jug of corn, a loaf of
cornbread, and how it waddled in
the wilderness. Weasels were more
predominant than easels. The only
sculptures were those of North-
erners using Vermont marble.
These men hacked out hundreds
of Confederate soldier monuments
which stand eternal guard over
county court houses — or until a
freeway came by. No orchestra
was capable of playing anything
more challenging than "Dixie."

A search of literature in the
past century reveals Southern his-
torians have revealed little about
the adverse consequences of Ap-
pomattox. The following appraisal
contains a few random thoughts on
these consequences by a bored re-
constructed Rebel who gets more

bored when he hears that old
melody, "It's Best It Turned Out
The Way It Did."

For anything to be better or
best, there has to be a comparison.
One cannot compare a victory to
a loss. That's a contrast. The
North won, the South lost. How
do people know it's best? No
basis for comparison exists. So,
manning the bastions of dissent,
let's turn the Napoleon guns
around, load up with solid and
grape shot, and hope the fuse
doesn't sputter.

It's unnecessary to delve into
the numerous causes of the war or
the rights of secession. These date
back to antiquity. For instance,
slavery existed in the South be-
cause the climate and soil were
suited to agricultural endeavors. If
cotton could have been grown in
the North, but not in the South,
would Northern secessionists have
fired on Governor's Island in 1861?
It's unnecessary to explore the
creation of man who, Philosopher
Locke said, God begot as an indi-
vidual, endowed with a free spirit
to pursue his own chosen course.
(If Locke was right, then, admit-
tedly, slavery was evil. It was a
dying evil, however. In attempting
to speed its death, the North per-
petrated a greater evil in its de-
nial of the South's right of self-
rule. Pardon the cliche, but "Two
wrongs don't make a right.")

It is necessary, however, to com-
pare the ante-bellum South with
the present. Because slavery, a so-
cial extreme, was an institution
peculiar to the agrarian society of
the South, that society was
roundly condemned as decadent
in the press, in the pulpit, in the
salons, and in the saloons.

Was it decadent? If wealth and
extremes in social classes indicate
a rotteness, then "Look Out,
Yankeeland!" A trip from Harlem
to Park Avenue is a two mile
jump from a garbage can to a
Baked Alaska.

27

Recognizing these contemporary
extremes, many sociologists and
Great Societyikes, taking their cue
from Nineteenth Century counter-
parts, claim that any system which
has class distinction is decadent.
Their words sound as if they were
plagiarized from Pravda. But class
distinctions do exist now — just as
they did in 1860.

For example, in the opening
chapter of Margaret Mitchell's
"Gone With the Wind," a social
gathering at Tara is attended by
the leading aristocrats of the cen-
tral Georgia neighborhood. The
guest list is limited to wealthy^
planters, their families, and a few
upper bourgeoisie. There are no
dirt farmers, artisans or Negroes.

Today, when the Ford family
throws a wing-ding in Detroit for
one of its daughters, bringing her
out, who is on the guest list? Not
the welder from the Falcon plant.
Not the Negro from downtown.
Can the similarity be denied?

Politically, there is, today, a dis-
proportionate number of top lead-
ers in the North who come from
wealthied classes, i.e., the Roose-
velts, the Rockefellers, the Lodges,
Williams, Lehman, Wagner, Joe,
Bobby, Teddy, ad infinitum.
(Space prevents the use of full
names.)

If an economic, social and po-
litical aristocracy is bad, then the
Civil War affected a transplant of
an evil from Peachtree Street in
Atlanta to Woodburn Avenue in
Detroit, to Park Avenue in New
York, to Hyannisport on Cape
Cod, et al.

Actually, the Southern aristo-
crats built foundations of our re-
public. Washington led our first
army to victory. Jefferson wrote
our Declaration of Independence.
Madison was the father of our
Constitution. Patrick Henry was
the first man to speak out for free-
dom and the Bill of Rights. And
what of the Randolphs, the Lees,
the Masons? All of these slave-
holders were products of and lead-
ers of that detested society. It's a
marvel that their democratic con-
tributions have not been censored
out of school history texts.

It is conclusive that, for many
decades after the demise of these
aristocrats in 1865, demagogues
replaced demigods as the South's
significant contribution to govern-

ment. Bilbos and Longs sat in the
seats of Davis and Calhoun. It
was as if the South were attempt-
ing to get even with the national
government by sending its worst
men to Washington. Could it have
been a mere coincidence that the
calibre of political leadership had
fallen to such great depths?

In the past two decades strides
have been taken toward political
rehabilitation in the South. Many
fine and dedicated men such as
Byrd, Rayburn, Russell, Holland
and others have been elected to
office.

Yet, a great political and gov-
ernmental tradition was practi-
cally destroyed at Appomattox.

The deterioration of race rela-
tions, an unhappy aftermath of
the war, is a feast the demagogues
grow fat on. Consequently, the
Negro in the South, today, is the
most persecuted and humiliated
segment of American society.

Shall we speculate on events
had the natural course of manu-
mission been allowed to evolve as
in the North? Compare present
conditions in the South with those
in the North. In the northern
states slavery was abolished peace-
fully and the former owners were
justly compensated for the loss of
their investments, usually by sell-
ing them South.

Now, the northern Negro has
more equality; he has a stronger
voice in the government; he makes
more money; and he is far better
off socially than his brother in the
old Confederate states.

Little reason was evident to sus-
pect the eventual emancipation of
the Southern slave. The trend of
history had already traveled a
long way down that inevitable
road. The French revolution freed
the serfs in 1794; the British, via
Parliament, in 1831; and Russia
in 1861. Thomas Jefferson cut the
bonds of his servants before he
died. Lee freed the slaves he in-
herited (though Mrs. U. S. Grant
still held hers).

Hesseltine says in his THE
SOUTH IN AMERICAN HIS-
TORY that in 1861 there were a
quarter of a million free Negroes
in the Southern states.

The speed of manumission
would have been accelerated by
the improvement of farming proc-
esses. With the rapid develop-

ment of new methods, the need for
large numbers of field hands took
a concomitant downward turn.

The greatest incentive, how-
ever, would have been the South-
erners' own repugnance of the in-
stitution. A society which played a
leading role in winning independ-
ence from England, which wrote
the Declaration, the Constitution,
and which impregnated the nation
with a near-pure democracy under
Andrew Jackson, would not, for j
long, live an hyprocrisy. The abo- '
lition movement was born in the
South, though Yankee mendacities
abetted its growth there.

The trouble was, though being
idealists, the planter aristocrats
were also realists. They foresaw
that the immediate abolition of ,
slavery would give rise to an even I
greater evil. Events following Lee's
surrender proved them to be sages.

Take a close look at the life of
the average Southerner, black or
white, during the malaproprian
"Reconstruction." This view indi-
cates that a greater curse per-
vaded the South than the malaise
of patriarchal servitude. It is dif-
ficult to find anywhere in history
a period so permeated with cor-
ruptness, brutality, or fear.

Coutter says in his THE
SOUTH DURING RECON-
STRUCTION:

"Most of the people who filled the
many offices were untrained and
untried scalawags, carpetbaggers
and Negroes. Had times been nor-
mal their duties would have been
onerous and complicated; with the
times out of joint they took the
easy road and speedily buried
themselves in corruption . . . And
yet the most speculative and exotic
development in government . . .
was to be seen in the part Negroes
played in ruling the South — long-
est to be remembered, shuddered at,
and execrated."

Let's linger a second on this de-
liberate attempt to kill a whole
civilization, the looting of public
and private treasuries, the debase-
ment of proud individuals, the un-
punished physical attacks, the ca-
lamity of abuse and libel heaped
upon the people who followed Lee
with such devotion and love. Re-
construction left a bitter memory
in the hearts of Southerners, more
so than Sherman's pillaging of
Georgia and South Carolina.

The North cared little about
these conditions. The New York
Times said, "Congress is too busy

28

to give much attention to such
commonplace matters as starva-
tion and distress. We want the
Southern people well under mar-
tial law."

The Times got its martial law.
For twelve years the South was
an occupied country, almost three
times longer than Japan and Ger-
many were occupied after World
War II. There was martial law —
but no Marshall Plan. Rather than
using the law impartially to ad-
minister justice, the North used it
to subjugate and confiscate, much
as the Russians did in Eastern
Europe after the last war.

Nor did the United States help
to rehabilitate the economy of the
South with massive foreign aid as
the government did with Japan
and Germany. Instead, the legisla-,
ture put uneducated Negroes and
unwashed carpetbaggers in control
of the state governments. The
Southern white was powerless and
helpless until he found extralegal
means to regain his franchise.
Nightriders, such as Ku Klux Klan
and the Knights of the White Ca-
mellia, organized to cajole the
Negro, and to punish crime which
the occupation forces ignored.

Actually, the U. S. Congress
used the high crime rate in the
South as an excuse for maintain-
ing occupation forces. Referring to
this great increase in crime. Sena-
tor Lucius Lamar (D. Miss.) asked
these embarrassing questions:

When you point to acts of vio-
lence, I acknowledge and deplore
them; but I ask you, who has gov-
erned the states where it occurs for
the past ten years? Have we? Who
has taxed us? Filled our courts?
Controlled our legislators?
The reader may recall that Sen-
ator Lamar was one of the men
John Kennedy used in his book
"Profiles in Courage."

Today, the press takes much
pride in blaming Little Rock, Clin-
ton, Selma, Oxford, riots from sit-
ins and freedom rides, and other
abuses on the ignorance and preju-
dice of the Southerner. Is there
one major paper outside the South
that has placed the blame where
it really belongs — in the radically
controlled Congress of 1865-1876?
From the above mentioned facts
it can be deduced that had right
prevailed in 1865, the ignominious
Ku-Klux-Klan, Jim Crow Laws
and lynching would be alien to

Americans' vocabulary. The phi-
losophy of the White Citizen coun-
cils would be unborn. The white's
fear of the emergence of the col-
ored people would be tempered
with understanding, cooperation
and, above all, communication.

The excesses of abuse on the
part of both the Negro and the
White during Reconstruction left
a residue of hate. Dr. Martin
Luther King said the reason peo-
ple hate each other is because
they are suspicious of each other.
The reason they are suspicious of
each other is because they don't
know each other. The reason they
don't know each other is because
they don't communicate with each
other.

But as a result of Yankee inter-
ference with communicative proc-
esses, then and now, hoeing the
rows of equality in the South
proves a rough task.

So, the Negro was the loser at
Appomattox!

The evil aftermath of Dixie's
defeat isn't limited to adverse race
relations. The capitol building in
Washington constantly echoes the
deep North-South split on political
beliefs. In most cases it is more
difficult to get a Northern and a
Southern Democrat to see eye to
eye than it would be to get Mao
to shake hands with Chaing Kai
Shek. This national disunity can
be attributed as much to historical
distrust as to avid conviction.

Contemplate how the average
Northerner would react had the
U. S. lost and suffered under a
Rebel reconstruction of compar-
able vindictiveness. Grey legions
might have occupied Northern
cities and towns for twelve years.
Only those Northerners considered
politically friendly would have the
vote. All industry would have been
dismantled and sent South. Per-
sonal fortunes would have been
confiscated. Legislatures would be
controlled by Rebels, Copperheads,
and illiterate immigrants. Graft
would have been so terrific that
Pennsylvania would just have
escaped from bonded indebted-
ness.

Had such conditions prevailed
100 years ago, would the North-
erner, today, be a little leery of a
Southern majority in Congress?

Of course, such would not have
been the case even if the Rebels

had ruled supreme. Southerners
were not fighting a war of subju-
gation, only of independence; not
of hate, but of love for self-rule.
And then, the humaness of its
leaders would have precluded any
such spiteful treatment. Lee,
Davis, Benjamin, and others were
not of the same ilk as ol' Thad
Stevens, Stanton, and Grant.

If the preceding points are only
speculation, natural conditions
would have prevented extensive
military rule. The population of
the North was more than 400 per
cent greater than that of the Con-
federate Whites.

So, compassion was vanquished
at Appomattox!

The South has been called by
F.D.R. the nation's number one
economic problem. This hardly
would be the case had the shoe
been on the other foot in April of
1865. Cotton and tobacco brought
undreamed of wealth into the cof-
fers of the agricultural states.
Eaton, in his '"History of the Old
South" indicates that 60% of all
the U. S. exports on the eve of the
war were of cotton alone. All this
ended in 1865. War, retribution,
and graft literally wiped out the
richest area per capita on the
North American continent. Even
today, total recovery is eons away.
For the South has just started to
seriously adopt the industrial revo-
lution.

There are several reasons for
this belatedness. All can be at-
tributed to the outcome of the
war. Being exposed to twelve
years of gross military persecution
inflicted by an alien society which
was a product of that industrial-
ization, the ex-Confederate was
not likely to seek a similar realm
for his own community.

It is axiomatic that some peo-
ple, in face of local opposition,
tried to foster industry into some
Southern states. It was a futile
attempt. Northern industrialists
were not going to allow any com-
petition, no matter how small, to
thrive in the South. They might
have lost a few customers. So,
Northern capitalists raised the
freight rates for Southern rail-
roads over which they gained con-
trol following the surrender.
Southern factories found it im-
possible to compete on the open
market.

29

The major capital available for
investment in the past century
was vaulted on Wall Street. In
spite of pleas by would-be South-
ern manufacturers, little money
crossed over the Potomac until
the start of World War II.

Presently, the South is the fast-
est growing industrial area in
America, But only the naive be-
lieve that this has come about as
a result of human kindness from
Yankee investors. On the contrary,
manufacturers are finding that the
returns from their investments are
far greater in Dixie than in the
North. The Supreme Court has
somewhat equalized railroad rates;
unions have less power; wages are
lower; plant overhead is much less
in the temperate climate; there is
an abundance of cheap hydroelec-
tric power; raw materials are plen-
tiful; and state tax benefits are
fantastic.

In 1960, it looked as if the ben-
efits of increased industrialization
had arrived. Then in March, 1961,
a circuit court of the "victorious"
government, announced that any
plant moving into another state
was required to take the whole
work force along with it, if the
workers so desired. So, thanks to
the forced union with the Fed-
erals, it looks as if the South is to
undergo another period of frus-
tration in economic advancement.

Thus, industrial progress was
the victim of Appomattox.

Control of tariffs, one of the
major causes of secession, would
have been a tremendous boon for
the Confederate states, had they
won and personally exercised that
control. Prior to the war, more
than half of all money going into
the treasury at Washington was
coming out of the states that were
to secede, though these states
comprised only a fraction of the
population. Most of these taxes
were being budgeted for improve-
ment in the North. With military
success, all of that money would
have been rerouted to Richmond
and put to work for the people
who paid it.

This money, too, would have
been sufficiently augmented by
tariffs on United States imports
which would have had to compete
with European goods on an equal
basis. Imports would have been

bought at a cheaper rate and the
tariffs would have been set ad-
vantageously for the new nation.

Economic progress, also, went
down in defeat at Appomattox.

In as much as the former Con-
federate states have always
espoused Jeffersonian democracy
(states' rights) and self-determina-
tion (secession) they would prob-
ably just as eagerly joined in the
crusade against the Axis powers as
did the United States. Dixie would
have been wealthier and more in-
dustrialized, offering much more,
materially, to the joint efforts.
And the South would have fought
as valiantly against aggression in
1918 and 1941 as it did in 1861.

Otherwise, relations with the
United States could have been on
par with Canada. Perhaps, since
the Confederate Constitution, also,
did not forbid secession, it is con-
ceivable that some or all of the
states eventually would have re-
joined with the Federal union. But
reunion would have been executed
only if the union were to be mu-
tually advantageous and not one
of coercion and subjugation.

Political freedom, thus, was sur-
rendered at Appomattox!

So, now down to the old cliche
that "we are better off since the
North won the war." The collec-
tive "we" is perhaps better off.
The British empire would have
been better off if old George had
given his sword to Cornwallis.
Russia is probably better off with
600,000,000 Chinese in the Com-
munist orbit. Collectively, all larg-
er political units are supposed to
be better off, if you follow the rule
of the "Federalists."

The majority segment of a po-
litical union, however, is the main
beneficiary of a forced grouping.
Nineteenth Century Austria was
extremely "better off" when it con-
trolled Hungarians, the Slavs, the
Czechs, and part of the Germans,
Poles and Italians. Austria had a
strong military and a huge popu-
lation.

Historically, nations that de-
rived fame from military strength,
e.g. Napoleon's France and Hit-
ler's Germany, offered little to
civilization except mayhem. Great-
ness in a nation is not necessarily
derived from increased numbers
of citizens or military potential.

India and Red China today are
not great nations in the true sense.
Greatness comes when democratic
societies are left alone to pursue
their own destiny and excellence
without the interference from ex-
ternal forces.

Old Abe, in stealing Webster's
words, said that the battle of Get-
tysburg was fought and won by
the North so "that government of
the people, by the people and for
the people should not perish from
the earth." Since it was the South
that was fighting for self-determi-
nation and the Yankees for sub-
jugation, it appears that the Great
Emancipator would not have been
so morose had he migrated back
to Kentucky before he entered
politics. He wouldn't have been
forced to play the role of a hypo-
crite.

Even today hypocrisy in large
political segments is denying the
South its legitimate role in con-
tributing leadership to the nation.
Eleven of our first fourteen presi-
dents were from the Dixie states.
Since then only two have served
as president, Wilson and Johnson.

Wilson, however, lived in the
North. Admittedly, Lyndon John-
son is from Texas, a former Con-
federate state. But even he prided
himself as being a "Westerner."
Besides, he won the election by
default. If it hadn't been for the
tragedy at Dallas, LBJ would not
now, and probably never would
have been, president. Is there one
other man from the South even
remotely in contention for presi-
dential nomination at future party
conventions?

Finally, democracy was the big-
gest loser at Appomattox.

There is one truth mirrored in
that painting in Galena, Illinois.
That is the historical image of the
two leaders of the two nations.
One has come down as the most
admired and respected general of
all times. The other is remem-
bered as the most corrupt and in-
effectual president in the nation's
history. It's said that the character
of a people is reflected in its
leaders.

The barbed-tongue bard from
Baltimore, H. L. Mencken, was
right when he called the Civil
War a victory of "babbitts over
gentlemen."

30

By ANN BARDSLEY

One of the most delightful vol-
umes to reach the Best Seller list
this past summer was Bel Kauf-
man's UP THE DOWN STAIR-
CASE. Miss Kaufman, grand-
daughter of Sholom Aleichem, and
a high school English instructor
for fifteen years, has written a
wise and uproariously funny pic-
ture of a young English teacher
and her first semester on the job.

Perhaps the most unusual fea-
ture of the book is its style. It is
written not in the usual narrative
form, but rather as a collection of
bizarre memos and circulars from
the administration, student essays,
contributions in the suggestion
box, notebooks, letters, and glean-
ings from the wastebasket. This
innovation is an apt vehicle for a
teacher's eye view of Calvin Coo-
lidge High School — overcrowded
and under-staffed, in a shabby sec-
tion of New York City. From the
principal's super-efficient adminis-
trative Assistant, Admiral Ass, to
his cowed faculty, come strange re-
minders that, "The bell will ring
today at 3 P.M. sharp. This, how-
ever, is uncertain," and puzzling
requests that "Polio Consent Slips
must be collected today." From
her student suggestion box the
teacher gets few suggestions, but
does hear that, "You're the only
teacher who ever learned me Eng-
lish real good," and "Linda Rosen's
got the Clap." Essays on subjects
like integration yield surprising
results. "Can you teU by my writ-
ing if I'm white or not?"

Former high school teachers
may recognize many parallels to
Calvin Coolidge High, where the

janitor, when needed, is never to
be found, the librarian hoards the
library books, windows are always
broken, and students punished for
going up the "down" staircase.
Fierce and funny battles are
fought as the teacher struggles
through the maze of administra-
tive procedure and triviality-in-
triplicate to find a little time for
her students.

UP THE DOWN STAIRCASE
is an hilarious mirror of faculty
life, but as one veteran teacher
put it, "You'd have to laugh — or
you'd cry."

A few years ago a Washington
correspondent wrote a brilliant
political novel that went "inside"
the United States Senate, focusing
upon its traditions, responsibilities,
antagonisms and power struggles.
Almost as soon as it hit the best
seller list, ADVISE AND CON-
SENT was flattered by a host of
imitations, often written by corre-
spondents more imaginative but
less talented than Mr. Drury. The
latest of these political insiders is
SUPREME COURT, which is
about guess what.

Author Andrew Tully is a for-
mer White House correspondent
and ought to know better, but his
fiction is stranger than any truth
could ever possibly be.

Our hero is a handsome bach-
elor Supreme Court justice who,
at the tender age of forty-two, has
already occupied himself as gov-
ernor of Massachusetts and U.S.
Senator before ascending to his
position as an associate justice.
This remarkable gentleman — his
name is Francis — also has a girl
friend with whom he is having an
affair. The girl friend, Beatrice, is
a thrice-married actress who, deep
down inside, is really a nice, mid-
dle-class Jewish girl. The cast also
includes Francis' crony, the Pres-
ident, an extremely popular, ex-
tremely conservative young man
who has just been reelected by an
overwhelming conservative major-
ity (reaUy, Mr. Tully!) and wants
to pack the Court because it's too
liberal. Also included is Freddie,
Beatrice's ex-husband, who plans
to publish a book revealing the
relationship between Francis and
his girl, and a covey of Supreme

Court justices who settle those 5
to 4 decisions by slugging each
other in the robing room. One
character who seemed suspiciously
realistic was the Senate majority
leader who was trying desperately
to earn the vacant seat on the
bench by pushing through the
Court packing bill, and dies sud-
denly from the strain. I was not
really surprised to discover that
exactly the same thing happened
to Senate majority leader Joseph
Robinson under exactly the same
circvmistances during the court
packing battle of the Roosevelt
era.

The reader is welcome, if he
dares, to examine the plot of this
improbable, but rather interesting
cliche called SUPREME COURT.

Three of the most talked abou^
books on the stands this fall were
memoirs by President Kennedy's
closest associates. These long
awaited books, KENNEDY by
Theodore Sorenson, A THOUS-
AND DAYS by Arthur Schlesinger,
and MY TWELVE YEARS WITH
KENNEDY by Evelyn Lincob,
were all serialized by major maga-
zines before they were printed and
controversy has swelled about
them even before publication.

Of the three, the best seems to
be Sorenson's KENNEDY. Though
this book is the least colorful of
the three, it is the most accurate
picture of the late president and
his mission of what Sorenson, one
of the oldest and closest of Ken-
nedy's friends, characterizes as
"conciliation."

Schlesinger, though a Pulitizer
Prize winning historian, has gotten
into much hot water over his
rather sensational revelations and
borderline taste. Nonetheless, his
book is well written and attempts
to place the Kennedy administra-
tion in historical perspective.

Mrs. Lincoln makes no attempt
to record the New Frontier for
history; her book is rather a gos-
sipy memoir on what it was like to
be the secretary of the man who
became President.

Despite their faults, all three are
useful and interesting reading, and
leave us with the wish that we
could have known the late presi-
dent better.

31

IN REMEMBERANC]

t)iS*jisKjisyi>8aiayi>swi>sai>syiis<jig!yi>syi^

"THE PLYMOUTH LANDING"

by
Peon Frost

32

DF

in^M^^^'atvMCi'

THE PILGRIM FATHERS

By Felicia Hemans
(1793-1835)

The breaking waves dashed high
On a stem and rock-bound coast,

And the woods, against a stormy sky,
Their giant branches tossed;

And the heavy night hung dark

The hills and waters o'er,
When a band oi exiles moored their bark

On the wild New England shore.

Not as the conqueror comes.

They, the true-hearted came:
Not with the roll of the stirring drums,

And the trumpet that sings oi fame;

Not as the flying come.

In silence and in fear, —
They shook the depths of the deserfs gloom

With their hymns of lofty cheer.

Amidst the storm they sang.

And the stars heard, and the sea;

And the sounding aisles of the dim woods rang
To the anthem of the free!

wmmmi}^MMjMmjmjmmjm

33

^^/^

; You go eve

IV \\ he

Someday \()u vvil
Take me with y

Together tlie
Universe wel

But not todav,
I am busy;

I

I am learning;
am growine.

\\ hell I .1111 (.i,l 0\\ II

\ii. I \\ ill iif\i'i Ih grnwi
in\ is^'.ow ill WMiild ciiil

I hi II I V\ I II I Id ll,U t III 1 lilt'

So Wind —

Continue willn mt im

At least for a while
lave things fn dn

1^ '4.mc'
^ on cm t lie <'nii^fi ii led

And I

( :ah t

ni t he ( Dinplfti-

HANDS OF LOVE

by

Colleen Fairbank

Illustrated by
Sharon Frost

Hands now idle and scarred by time,
Once held the youthful heart of mine.
Hands then young and smooth with love,
Tenderly guided, formed and gently nudget
That small child that eagerly awaited
Life — and all the joys and wonders,

unabated.
Understanding, firmness and gentle times
Are written, still, among the Unes.
Now gnarled and painfully disfigured.
Though soon, stilled forever will they be —
These hands will always have
The strongest hold on me.

35

r^ov nxda us a cl|tlb^ ts bunt, utttc
us d son is gtlieu: anb tl\t goUerumcnt
s{|aU be upmt i|ts sljoul^er: anh l|ts
name sl|all be citUeh pTonherfuI, Coun-
sellor, ®t|e ttttgl|tg doh, 'Slije eiierlast-
rug (3[irtl|er, "Sllie prince of Peace. (§i
tlje increase of l|ts goiiemment anh
peace tl]ere sl|all be no enh, n^an ll|e
tl^rone of ^aUrh, anb^ upon I|ts ktng-
horn, to orber it, anb to establisij it
6jitl| juhgmeut anh biitl] justice from
t|enceforti| eOen for eOer.

Isaiah 9:6, 7

by
Harvey Olsen

36

i

37

"Be careful, Senor!"

I nodded silent acknowledg-
ment, as I gripped my shotgun,
and started down the tangled em-
bankment.

The tropical downpour stopped
and a warm drizzle covered my
perspiring face. My light raincoat
clung to my shirt and it caked
itself to my sweaty body. The hu-
midity in the Costa Rican jungle
was suffocating and the stillness
unnatural. Insects crawled into my
nostrils and hair and glued them-
selves to the dirt and oil on me.

I paused and looked at my des-
tination, a hundred yards below.
The river crawled sluggishly at
the base of the forty-five degree
slant. Both banks were covered
with a crazy pattern of matted
undergrowth. It looked like finely-
cut bamboo. To penetrate it would
be impossible. To hack my way
thru with a machete would be
back-breaking. As I looked, I knew
I'd find in that twisted underbrush
the reason I'd flown over 2,000
miles. To hunt and to kill —
the "Anaconda," the water boa
constrictor, the largest and most
powerful of the boa constrictor
family. A specie that was a throw-
back to prehistoric days. A snake
so huge that once its coils were
entwined around cattle, it could
easily crush the life out of them.

I also thought of the States and
home and my purpose in choosing
the jungles of Central America. I
told all who inquired I wanted a
snakeskin for a trophy. I almost
had myself convinced. Down deep,
I knew it was more than a gory
souvenir I wanted. I was trying to
prove to myself that I was afraid
of nothing. That I was tougher
and better than anyone else. The
more they labeled it suicidal or
impossible, the more determined I
became to prove to them how
wrong they were. The deadliness
of the hunt only increased the
challenge, and the desire to kill
intensified itself.

I remember the surprised ex-
pressions on the faces of all I told
back in San Jose. At "Un Gran
Hotel Costa Rica," to cover my
nervousness, I joked with the bell-
hop and my steady cab driver. I
promised I'd bring them back a
dead boa. All they could say was:

"No, please, Senor!"

Dead or alive they wanted no

part of any boa constrictor, espe-
cially the "Anaconda." Even they
doubted that I'd accomplish my
mission safely.

My native guide coughed and it
interrupted my day dreams. I
turned toward him but he said
nothing. He, too, was afraid of
snakes. Nobody had any guts. It
didn't make much difference. It
was my hunt and I wanted it to
be my kill. I told him, in my
broken Spanish, to watch the sur-
roundings. I didn't want one to
drop out of a tree on me or acci-
dentally walk into one. I didn't see
any from the top of the hill, but I
wanted to make sure.

I turned away from his fat form
and started my descent. I half
stumbled a few yards from the top
when my foot caught itself in a
low lying vine. My left hand
pounded the ground and needle
sharp thorns ripped the flesh open.
I glanced back at the guide, but
his copper colored face was ex-
pressionless. He stared back at me
open-mouthed. I turned away
again and continued slowly, watch-
ing every step I'd take. Small
gnats festered around the gashes
on my hand. I brushed them off
but their persistence mingled with
the blood and dirt. I concentrated
on what waited for me by the
river.

Twenty or thirty paces further,
the guide called to me. He pointed
up and almost directly above me.
I thought he spotted a boa in the
huge tree above me and cocked
my gun automatically. The light
rain clouded my vision and I
squinted at the dense foliage
above, ready to fire. My eyes
searched the lower branches slow-
ly and carefully. I tried to find
the gnarled mass that deformed a
branch or the trunk of the tree. I
looked up the tree further and saw
nothing. Exasperated and a little
disgusted, I looked back at the
guide. Instead, he motioned above
the tree and slightly ahead of me.
I followed his gestures and saw
what he did. Three or four vul-
tures circled lazily overhead. Some-
thing ahead of me was dead or
dying. I didn't know, but I'd soon
find out.

I lowered my head and con-
tinued my downward journey
watching the moist jungle around
me. As we both looked up, some-

THE
URGE

TO
KILL

i

BY MARTY ROLAND

ILLUSTRATED BY LEW ALQUIST

\

38

thing might've moved between me
and the river. I left my shotgun
cocked. It was a single shot. I
cursed my impatience and stu-
pidity for not waiting an extra
day. I could've gotten an auto-
matic. I might need it before the
hunt was over. It was too late for
regrets and my gripes wouldn't
help me.

As I walked, my foot touched a
patch of mud and I slipped. My
knee doubled and struck a rock in
the ground and my left hand
again hit the earth. It made my
palm raw. As soon as I pushed
myself up, the bugs were back at
it again. They seemed to enjoy
the blood and dirt on it. My knee
made me limp slightly as I started
again.

Half way down, I came across
the decayed body of what was left
of a jaguar. It was covered with
flies and worms. The stench from
it almost made me vomit. I looked
up. The vultures were directly
overhead. Their lust after death
disgusted me and I peered at the
surroundings. My first glimpse of
death in the jungle made me feel
uneasy. I told myself there was
nothing to get jittery about.
Another ten steps, more or less, a
bush ahead shook slightly. I stop-
ped and a chill ran down my back.
I raised my gun and slowly crept
closer. I took a step and waited,
another and waited again, until I
was only a few feet from it. My
gun was thrust forward and I was
ready to fire. I circled it slowly
and as quietly as I could. I saw
nothing. I couldn't believe it. Any-
thing at all wouldn't have sur-
prised me as much as seeing
nothing.

I lowered my gun again and
glanced back at the guide. I could
see him watching me, but the dis-
tance was too great to tell the ex-
pression on his face. As I turned
back and moved on to my original
path, I couldn't help wondering
about the bush. There was no
breeze at all, yet it moved. Some-
thing must've moved it, and if so,
where could it have gone? There
was nothing; my search proved
that. Not even a hole in the
ground.

I thought —

"Had I imagined it? Had fear
given me illusions?"

I tried to dismiss the thought.

39

My fingers touched the cold
steel of the trigger guard. It felt
good. It was reassuring. I momen-
tarily glanced at the flap on the
gun holster, that hung loosely at
my right side. It was tucked back
ready for use. Its shocking power
wasn't much if I had to resort to
it, but I probably wouldn't have
to use the pistol anyway. I had
forced a shell in the chamber of
the .32 automatic, before I started
on my downhill creep.

"Had I released the safety
catch on it?"

I stopped and cradled the shot-
gun in my arm. I pulled the auto-
matic out of its holster and con-
vinced myself that I had. As I
pushed it back into its resting
place, I looked ahead. I could see
the wild closely-knit brush that
fringed the river more clearly. It
was higher than I thought.

"Fifty or sixty feet more, I'll be
there," I told myself.

My knee throbbed as I started
my measured walk and the stiff
cowhide in the Costa Rican boots
cut into my instep and into my
ankles on the angle I was walking.
The holster hung too low, I
thought. I don't know why I didn't
realize it sooner, but I wasn't
going to stop again until I got to
the river. It was level there and
I'd have a better chance of mov-
ing freely and firing successfully.
The sooner I could get the kill
over with, the sooner I could get
back to the top of the hill. The
slope was gentler as I moved
closer. The trees were farther
apart, the undergrowth less wiry.
I could move a little faster, my
eyes riveted on the river ahead
and its surroundings.

Twenty feet from it, my boots
touched mud and ooze. I started
sinking slowly. Panicky, I jumped
back. I didn't notice it, until I
stepped in it. I could see a stretch
of from six to seven feet in width,
lay between me and the river. I
didn't know what it was. I had
never been warned of quicksand
and I had never even given it a
thought.

"What if that's what it was and
I couldn't have gotten out fast
enough? The guide might've
helped me, if he could've gotten to
me in time."

Sweat trickled down my greasy

face.

I had heard stories of quick-
sand. The sucking, inevitable death
that entombed humans and ani-
mals alike. I could visualize my-
self being dragged helplessly down
into the earth. I could even feel
the horrible sucking as it would
swallow my legs, then engulf my
body and finally would swirl
bubbling over my head. I shud-
dered involuntarily.

I was thinking too much. I was
letting my imagination run wild
and allowing myself to be weak. I
was getting as gutless as everyone
else.

I cut short my mental pictures
and looked toward the river again.
My eyes followed the patch of
mire trying to find a way across.
I had to get to the river. A short
distance away I saw a fallen tree,
and headed toward it. Just before
I reached the tree, the brush on
the other side, near the river,
crackled and swayed. I stopped in
my tracks and tried to make out
what caused the noise and the
movement. My heart quickened
its pounding wh6n I saw what it
was. A gigantic boa constrictor
slithered in and out of the thicket.
It resembled a log twisting its
shape. It was no imagination this
time. I tightened my hand on the
shotgun and hurried to the tree.
As I half sprinted, I watched his
glistening coils weave slowly away
from me.

I reached the broken stump and
started to climb. My right foot
was on the tree and my left one
still on the ground. I kicked what
I thought was a branch of a tree.
Suddenly it came alive. It was like
a huge arm that whipped itself
around my leg. The shock and
power pulled me down. As I slip-
ped from the tree, my holster
swung behind me and my right
foot came down on the writhing
coils below. I saw for the first
time, a huge boa constrictor, and
could feel that same arm entwin-
ing itself around my right leg. I
fired, without thinking, at the con-
torting coils. Blood spurted from
them. They relaxed momentarily
and I tried to drag myself out. As
I strained to pull free, they tight-
ened again. I saw the head, for
the first time. It was shaped like
two cupped hands and its tongue

darted in and out of its mouth at
me. It was light brownish and
covered with black designs. I
grabbed the barrel and swung at
it. It drew back out of range and
bobbed back and forth. It gave a
hissing sound and the tongue kept
darting in and out. I struck at the
winding, wrapping coils on my
legs. I raised the gun and lashed
at them, again and again. The
more savagely I pounded, the
tighter they twisted. It was like
giant fingers squeezing my legs. I
could see the blood dripping over
the coils and on the ground below
us. The pressure kept increasing
and the coils crept above my
knees. My legs felt like they were
on fire. It felt as tho' the skin on
them was being torn off.

I knew I had to keep beating at
them. I couldn't risk stopping for
a moment to try to reach behind
for my pistol. My arms were like j
lead weights, as I repeated blow ^
after blow. I couldn't keep it up
any longer. His tongue still flashed
in and out of his weaving head.
My legs became numb. My feet
felt like they were asleep. I knew
I was losing. He'd never loosen up.
I hit weakly, with the shotgun in
my left hand, at the twisting coils
that worked themselves below my
thigh. I had to get to my pistol.

I groped behind me with my
right hand. My fingers touched the
side of the holster. His contorting
threw me off balance and I started
again. This time my fingers
grasped the butt end of it. I
pulled it out carefully and as I
brought it in front of me, the coils
had reached my waist. I was get-
ting dizzy. I pointed the auto-
matic at the dancing head and the
darting tongue. As I squeezed the
trigger and fired three or four
times at it, the bobbing stopped.
The bullets tore into his head and
it plunged to the ground. I fired a
few more rounds into the con-
vulsing head. The pressure stopped
and the coils loosened their grip.

I was weak and still dizzy as I
forced the writhing coils open. I
dragged myself out and away
from them. My legs were so badly
bruised, I couldn't stand. As I
crawled up the hill, I looked back
at the bloody form, still twitching.
I remembered the snakeskin.

"The hell with it!" I thought.

40

SPORTS

Peach Basket Predictions Intramurals

Sports writers must, out of ne-
cessity, live a dangerous life. They
are always being called upon to
predict what the upcoming season
will bring. This really isn't too
dangerous when they know what
they're doing, but when they don't,
it's downright suicide. Well, since
the varsity basketball season is
upon us, the time has come for a
few comments about the prospects
for the Seahorse cagers. "I regret
that I have but one life . . ."

The Seahorses are under the di-
rection of Clinton Morris. Coach
Morris played his college ball for
Livingston St. (Alabama) College.

by
John Wolfe

Before joining the Seahorse coach-
ing staff, Morris coached at sev-
eral high schools in Georgia and
northern Florida and was assistant
basketball coach at McArthur
High School.

The assistant basketball coach
is R. L. Landers, his first year in
this capacity. Coach Landers
played his college ball for Baylor
University and, for the past two
seasons, has served as assistant
baseball coach at JCBC.

The cagers will compete in Dis-
trict IV of the Florida Junior Col-
lege Conference. Other teams in
the district are Miami-Dade, Mon-
roe, Edison, West Palm Beach,

■ o

41

and Indian River junior colleges.
The Seahorses will also participate
in a Christmas tournament in Co-
lumbus, Ga., and have scheduled
several games with university
freshmen teams.

The Seahorses will play their
first six regular season games on
the road, awaiting the completion
of the new gym to open at home.
The gym will be christened on
Jan. 15, when the Seahorses host
the Stetson Freshmen.

Miami-Dade, last year's state
champions, appear to be the class
of the district. JCBC and Edison
(Fort Myers) JC should fight it
out for second place. Upstate,
Chipola JC and Gulf Coast JC
should be the best in the north,
while St. Pete JC and Manatee
JC should be tough to beat in the
central part of the state.

Although more than half of last
year's squad returns, the Sea-
horses face several problems. In
the offensive department, they
must find someone to replace Gil
Ford and Stan Cowherd, who ac-
counted for more than half the
offensive output last year. Among
the leading candidates to take
over are Kenny Kulp, Steve
Cairns, Steve Nealy, and Bobby
Keimedy. Kenny, a sophomore,
came on strong at the end of last
season and displayed a real scor-
ing potential. Cairns, a 1964 grad-
uate of McArthur, transfers to
JCBC from Florida Presbyterian.
Steve will fit right in with the fast
break offense the Seahorses will

42

employ. In addition to his offen-
sive threat, Steve will help greatly
on defense. Steve Nealy, the third
leading scorer from last year, is
back and, if he fulfills his poten-
tial, will be one of the team's out-
standing individuals. Kennedy, a
6'4" All-County selection last year
from Pompano Beach, should help
the 'Horses both in scoring and
rebounding.

The second big problem is
height. The Searhorses have Steve
Hall, a 6'6" sophomore, Kennedy,
and John Gordon, a 6'3" Pompano
graduate, who should help, but
this lack of height will certainly
hurt the 'Horses more than once
before the season is over.

Defense is the third problem.
Last year's defense was extremely
generous in allowing their oppon-
ents an average of eighty points a
game. If the Seahorses are to chal-
lenge anybody for anything, this
will certainly have to be improved.

Other sophomores who return
from last season are Bryn Jones, a
rugged defensive star and an out-
standing rebounder, Barry Allison
and Marvin Hodges.

Last year Coach Morris launch-
ed an extensive recruiting program
in the county and will reap the
benefits this year. Joining Ken-
nedy and Gordon are Pompano
teammates Bill Fauerbach and
Mike Mulford. Bill Mandeville
and Greg Fitzpatrick, starting
guards at Stranahan last year, will
help the 'Horses' defense. Also,
sophomore Mark Brier is out for

the team this year and should
help both on defense and in the
rebounding department.

* * *

The prospects for the 1965-66
season contain a lot of "ifs." IF
the Seahorses can replace their
lost scoring punch, IF they can
plug up the defense, and IF their
lack of height doesn't hurt them
too much, then the 'Horses will
give somebody some trouble.
Though the picture might seem
dark from here, the Seahorses
have the talent to do it. Kenny
Kulp and others should take up
the offensive slack and Steve
Cairns will prove to be a leader
both on offense and defense.
About the defense, it can't do
anything but improve.

From this comer, the prospects
for the Seahorses to improve
upon last season appear very
bright indeed.

A Note on Intramural Athletics

An important phase of any col-
lege's overall program is athletic
competition. At JCBC, although
the intercollegiate program is well-
rounded and among the best in
the state, it cannot fulfill the
needs of all the students.

Thus the intramural program is
of particular importance. Unfortu-
nately it, like many other college-
sponsored activities, is conspicu-
ous for its lack of interest. It need
not be that way. This year, the
HPR Department is offering intra-
mural competition in virtually all
sp)orts in which classes are taught.
With this variety, everyone can
find some spKsrt in which he or she
participates. Not only does the
student owe it to himself to keep
in good physical condition, but
many of these sports can continue
to be a source of enjoyment and
exercise in his later life.

If you are not signed up for one
of the intramural sports, then by
all means drive your car over to
that distant building and "get in
the swing of things."

You too, girls.

* * ie

Men's basketball inaugurated
the JCBC intramural year. Always
a popular sport, no less than ten
teams competed for the champion-
ship this year. Basketball was di-
vided into two leagues this year,

each with five teams. "A" League
was made up of the "Adipose
Wrecks," the "Hustlers," the "Spi-
der and His Flies," the "Gators,"
and the "Bombers." "B" League
consisted of the "Shot Guns," the
"Road Runners," the "Hot Shots,"
the "Beavers," and "Deacon's
Men."

In "A" League, the "Adipose
Wrecks" led all the way to capture
the league crown. The "Shot
Guns" and "Deacon's Men" waged
a fierce battle for the "B" League
crown, with the "Shot Guns"
wrapping it up with a 77-59 win
over "Deacon's Men." In the cham-
pionship game, the "Shot Guns"
shot down the "Adipwse Wrecks"
by a score of 79-65. The winners
were led by Gil Ford, who scored
27 points, and Stan Wood. Steve
Cairns and Paul Pologruto had 22
points apiece for the losers.

Immediately following the
championship game, an All-Star
game was played matching the top
players from the other four teams
in each league. The "A" League
All-Stars were Steve Hall, Marvin
Hodges, Bill Mandeville, Bill
Fauerbach, Bobby Kennedy, Mike
Mulford, John Gordon, and Kenny
Kulp. Representing "B" League
were Bryn Jones, Mark Brier,
Mike Grizzle, Bob Murrill, Barry
Allison, Robert Judson, Bruce
Kinder, and Craig Skok.

Led by Marv Hodges and Ken
Kulp, each with 32 points, the "A"
Leaguers overwhelmed the "B"
All-Stars, 98-61. Mark Brier was
high point man for the losers with
21 points.

FINAL STANDINGS

"A" League

Won Lost
Adipose Wrecks 3 1

Hustlers 2 2

Spider and His Flies 2 2

Bombers 2 2

Gators 1 3

"B" League

Won Lost
Shot Guns 4 0

Deacon's Men 3 1

Hot Shots 1 3

Road Runners 0 4

Beavers 0 4

Next on the men's intramural
calendar was flag football. With
six teams competing, the season
was spotlighted by exciting play
and several high scoring games.

Teams in the league were the
"Transcendentalists," the "Road
Runners," the "Magnificents," the
"Tigers," the "Crimson Knights,"
and Circle K.

The "Transcendentalists" won
the league championship with a
perfect 5-0 record. (Editor's note:
If they were as hard to beat as
their name is to spell, it's a won-
der the rest of the league even
bothered to show up.) Ken Mc-
Mahon won the individual scoring
title with 42 points. Max Colom-
brito and Frank Gossett ran close
behind with 36 and 30 points, re-
spectively.

An All-Star game is to be
played at the end of the season.
The All-Stars, composed of play-
ers from the other five teams, will
challenge the "Transcendentalists."
Members of the All-Star team are
Max Colombrito, Bill Bettis, Mike
Johnson, Tom Robertson, Ken
McMahon, Max Christian, Frank
Fawl, Dennis Maugere, Bart Lof-
tis, John Galli, Butch Wilson, John
Bundy, Bill Conley, Tom Parko,
Ernie Jones, and Bill Jenkins.

FINAL STANDINGS

Won Lost
Transcendentalists 5 0

Crimson Knights 4 1

Magnificents 3 2

Road Runners 3 2

Circle K 0 5

Tigers 0 5

While the men's intramural pro-
gram was concentrated on foot-
ball and basketball, women's intra-
murals was focusing on volleyball.
Although very few teams entered,
the season was by no means dull.
Pam Bedford captained her team
to the championship by downing
a determined team captained by
Joyce Fillichia. Others on the
championship squad were Carol
Warner, Patti Carpinelli, Janice
Grooms, Anne Marie Cramer, and
Diane De Martino.

43

Fomiuii

Six weeks ago in Ann Arbor, Michigan, over
100,000 football fans turned out to witness the
Michigan-Michigan State game. Unfortunately this
situation will never occur between two junior colleges
in the state of Florida.

Other junior colleges in Mississippi, California,
Oklahoma and Texas support weekly football games
with great enthusiasm, but starting a junior college
football conference in Florida is out of the question
at the present time. In order for a program of this
nature to get started it would have to be submitted
before the state department of education and, if
approved there, it would go before the legislature.
The philosophy in this state by the legislature is
strictly against junior college football. The legisla-
ture doesn't feel that the junior colleges are finan-
cially ready to support football teams.

In 1948, Chipola Junior College organized a foot-
ball team and was the only junior college football
team in the state until it abandoned the sport four
years later. George McCall, guidance director at
JCBC, was a member of the Chipola football team
in 1950-51. McCall is very familiar with the pro-
gram that would have to be set up. He personally
doesn't feel the state or JCBC is ready for another
try in setting up a football league.

"It would cost too much and how could we be
sure we would have enough people who would
support it," McCall said.

Athletic Director Rex Brumley shared the same
feeling as McCall in saying, "I think we would be
smart to stay away from football because we prob-
ably couldn't afford it."

44

It would be impossible to finance a team on just
the students' activity fees, so from what source
would the money come? The money taken in from
gate receipts would hardly cover the expenses of
lights, renting a field, and dressing out the players.

Traveling Expenses

The east coast of Florida stretches over 400
miles, not to mention the long distance across the
panhandle. Having the team travel in a chartered
bus would cost at least $300. Presuming the team
would play at least ten away games, this already
involves over $3,000.

Equipment and Meals

The team would carry forty-four players. Equip-
ment for each player would cost at least $150. The
total cost of the equipment for the whole team would
come well over $6,000. Repairing equipment would
involve an additional undetermined amount.

While the players are on the road for one night
the school would only be responsible for one meal.
The average cost of the meal per player would run
about one dollar and a half. For the entire ten game
season, these would cost $660.

Housing

Housing the players overnight would involve $300
a night. Overall this would cost three thousand dol-
lars not to mention the coaches, managers, etc. Medi-
cal expenses would also prove costly as all the in-
juries would have to be treated immediately.

Football in junior colleges would certainly prove
to be an advantage for universities throughout the

By Bill Kelley

Illustrated By Diane Dasher

state. Knowing boys are getting experience playing
college ball would be ideal conditions for Coaches
Ray Graves of Florida and Bill Peterson of Florida
State. The two colleges mentioned could easily divide
the colleges in half and recruit the players from the
schools which have been divided.

Bill Bondourant, sports editor of the Fort Lauder-
dale News, was asked if Broward County fans would
support a JCBC football team. "I don't think so. I
think it would be almost impossible to set up a
junior college program in Florida and especially in
this area due to the popularity of high school foot-
ball. The games would also conflict with the U. of
Miami and the new American Football League fran-
chise coming to Miami."

Starting a football team could also prove to be the
downfall of basketball, baseball and tennis teams.
The money involved could easily affect the success-
ful program which is currently underway. Basketball
has been the fastest growing sport at the college
and, with the completion of the new gym, basketball
will have all the necessary tools that could lead
Seahorse basketball teams to state championships.

The football program in California has not met
with one-third of the success it hoped to reach. The
legislature in that state has made up certain rules
which all the junior colleges must follow in order to
participate in football. The first two damage the
program the most. They are:

1. A junior college can't play another college out-
side of its area. This could mean only playing
two teams all season.

2. A junior college is not allowed to give scholar-
ships to any boys outside its area.

The average attendance of junior college football
games in California is only 3,000, while the average
high school game brings nearly 4,000. Also in Cali-
fornia there is no state play-off, nor is there a state
championship game. The same situation exists in the
other states.

Most students in this area were good supporters
of their high school football teams and many junior
college students can be found at high school games
every Friday night. Also, giving the boys who didn't
quite earn four year scholarships another chance to
show off their talents at a two year school could
earn them a scholarship upon graduation. It seems
that students enjoy screaming at football games and
doing it once more on the junior college level would
only turn out to be more fun.

With the philosophy of the state legislature being
against football, there will never be junior college
football teams in the near future. These men must
have looked into this program before they decided
to vote against it. Perhaps, if starting a program of
this sort at the present time did turn out a failure, it
would only embarrass the state and the junior col-
leges as well.

The students of this college have a fine program
set up as it sponsors golf, tennis, baseball and basket-
ball teams. Would it be worth trying to start another
sport at the risk of losing four?

45

This evening ensemble presents
the striking contrast of white on
black. The dress is of Mattelasse
and features an empire waist with
a white scoop-neck bodice; the A-
line skirt is in black. The evening'
coat, also of Mattelasse, is a vision
in white. About $70 at Saks Fifth
Avenue in the Sunrise Shopping
Center. Model: Dawn Miller

Pacesetters ivvt

Serenity in yellow crepe is por-
trayed by Safinia. This design
presents an empire waist and
straight skirt with special emphasis
on the cut-out bodice. About $45
at Saks Fifth Avenue in the Sun-
rise Shopping Center. Model:
Sandy Uetz

46

riphday rimy

This versatile three-piece theatre
suit features a slim skirt and
lapeled jacket over a delicate lace
shell. The beige rayon-acetate fab-
ric presents the illusion of silk. A
junior petite by Patricia Fair. About
$25 at Lory's in the Coral Ridge
Shopping Center. Model: Peggy
Williams

Elegance and simplicity are synon-
ymous in this young junior de-
sign. The empire vi/aist and the
wine velveteen bodice are accented
with a bow; the pale pink slim
skirt is of crepe. About $23 at
Lory's in the Coral Ridge Shopping.
Center. Model: Sue Lopez

47

^lu

LYCEUMS

What does your college offer in entertainment?

It offers a variety of selections from the area of
cultural arts. Would you like to hear a folk singer,
a ballet, or a piano concert? Maybe a comedian, an
opera, or a choir performance would better suit
your tastes. Your college's Lyceum program features
all of these. Evening performances are free to all
full time students.

If past Lyceum performances are characteristic of
future programs, students can expect many more
very entertaining evenings. Those who heard Peter
Nero's piano performance showed a definite apprec-
iation for it. The attendance was a record for JCBC.
More recently, talented Earl Wrightson and Lois
Hunt gave an excellent concert entitled "The Ameri-
can Theatre in Concert." The versatile Miss Hunt
sang "Smoke Gets in Your Eyes," while Mr. Wright-

By Carol Shafer

son displayed his tremendous style with "Old Man
River" and "If Ever I Should Leave You." Their
natural wit and humor prevailed throughout the
program. These are just two examples of Lyceum's
fine entertainment.

Lyceum had its beginning in 1960 when the
college first opened. This year, Mr. Neil Crispo,
Director of Student Activities, is responsible for the
Lyceum programs. When asked about the purpose
of Lyceum, Mr. Crispo commented, "The programs
are to encourage the cultural development of stu-
dents as well as to entertain them." Dr. E. P.
Lauderdale, Dean of Instruction, complimented the
students when he remarked that they are sophisti-
cated in their cultural tastes.

The full house attendance of past programs has
illustrated this comment quite well.

^ftmmei ^ei/citnetA

World famous Mark Twain impersonator, Hal
Holbrook gave his excellent and unique por-
trayal to a capacity audience on June 18 in
the Stranahan auditorium. Holbrook's per-
formance was a most enjoyable, never-to-be-
forgotten addition to the Summer Lyceum
programs.

Leon Bibb, renowned American folk singer, gave an impressive performance on
July 24 at the Stranahan auditorium. His very fine production was a brilliant
finish to the Summer Lyceums.

Talented Earl Wrightson and Lois Hunt gave an excellent
concert in November at the Stranahan High Auditorium.

49

Service Clubs of J.C.B.C.

CIRCLE

The Circle K booth was the hub of much activity during the
opening days of the first semester.

^

The student body of the Junior College of Brow-
ard County can surely be proud of its Circle K club.
The club has brought the Junior College publicity
around the nation as well as serving the school in a
true sense of the word.

The club originated on the JCBC campus in 1960
and has progressed to the point where it now has
over forty members. The motto of Circle K is "We
Build," and the Broward club has more than lived up
to it. Along with service, the club is dedicated to the
building of character in men.

On the international level the club attained the
highest honor that a Circle K club can receive. This
was the International Achievement contest First
Place Award, which is presented annually to the out-
standing Circle K chapter of the six hundred or-
ganized chapters throughout the United States and
Canada. The club has also received recognition from
the United Fund, the Easter Seal Clinic, and its
sponsor, the Beach Kiwanis Club. In addition. Circle
K received the A. P. Phillips Award in 1965 for
excellence in undergraduate extra-curricular activi-
ties. This award is in state competition with any
organization on junior and senior college campuses.

Some of the club's projects are the sponsorship of
the Halloween Dance, the Bonfire, the Bonfire
Dance, Health Awareness Week, the King Ugly
Contest, the United Fund Drive, manning the polls
for SGA elections, aiding in student registration,
assisting in the bookstore, Thanksgiving food dona-
tions for the needy, helping the Opportunity Center
for the Handicapped, collecting for the Easter Seal
Drive, ushering for Lyceum programs, and Opera-
tion KID.

Operation KID is probably the high point of
service by the club. For this project, every other
Sunday Circle K members act as "big brothers" to
juveniles who have been in trouble with the law.
Circle K men take these boys out on picnics, to
baseball games, roller skating, and other activities
which produce a good healthy atmosphere. On this
project alone. Circle K members produce an average
of forty service hours per two-week periods.

This year the club is under the leadership of Presi-
dent Ron Gustinella, Vice-president Chuck Drago,
Secretary Bill Conley, and Treasurer Bob Klein. The
campus advisors are Mr. Harry Schaelman and Mr.
David Shaw. The Beach Kiwanis Club advisor to
Circle K is Mr. Joe Furgeson.

This year the club will be host to the Florida
District Convention to be held in March, at the
Statler-Hilton Hotel. It will be responsible for the
entire planning and execution of this meeting for
over 250 delegates from throughout the state of
Florida.

50

The Circlettes of the Junior College of Broward
County play an important part in almost every
phase of campus life. They are seen working in
every department as student assistants and of the
eighteen female members of SGA, fifteen are either
active members or applicants of Circlettes.

Circlettes also play an important role in the social
activities on campus. They co-sponsored the Hallo-
ween Dance and the Bonfire Dance along with
Circle K.

As a yearly project the Circlettes volunteer their
services in Anne Storke's home for handicapped
children. They are working on the United Fund and
Multiple Sclerosis drives again this year. One of the
largest projects that Circlettes had this year was
helping to coordinate the Christmas gifts for the
soldiers in Viet Nam. By working with the various
branches of the service, they were able to distribute
the gifts to those soldiers who receive no mail from
home. The gifts were shipped overseas by a special
transport plane that delivered them directly to the
men. Besides setting up the Christmas gift project,
the Circlettes have also initiated a "Write to a
Soldier in Viet Nam" program. Not only will this
help to raise morale, but it will also keep the service
men in Viet Nam better informed on happenings in
the U.S.

The club is presently initiating a program in which
all service clubs will participate. This program is in
association with VISTA and will supply aid to the
children of the migrant workers. Circlettes still have
their orphan. Shin Bong Hi, and are hoping that
other organizations will follow their lead.

The annual fashion show at the Beach Club Hotel,
which is a joint project of Circlettes and Civinettes,
was presented on December 5 and featured formal
wear from Gowns Unlimited and sports attire from
the Tack Room.

Circlettes are seen ushering at all Lyceum pro-
grams and will be selling cokes at all basketball
games. They also aid in student registration and
assist in the book store.

Under the leadership of President Clarkia Dennis,
Vice-President Bonnie McFetridge, Secretary Sandy
Pryor, Treasurer Joan Nugent, Chaplain Jane Han-
cock, and Sponsor Miss Charlotte Ford, the Circlettes
have planned a busy year and hope that it will be
the most successful one yet.

Betty Huntting (standing) and Circlettes President Clarkia Dennis do

their part in helping to make Christmas for the soldiers in Viet

Nam a bright success.

51

«_. * i fc

Civitan is responsible for a clean-up campaign, the purpose
of whicfi is to rid tfie campus grounds of unsightly trash.

CIVITAN

The Civitan club of JCBC has placed its service
emphasis on getting the campus back into shape.
They are responsible for a clean-up campaign, the
purpose of which is to rid the campus grounds of
unsightly trash. In addition, Civitan members spend
their Sunday afternoons helping to landscape the
area around the Administration building and are
also in the process of repairing the campus road
signs and curb stones.

Next semester, Civitan plans to compile a "first"
for the college, a student directory. They will also
co-sponsor the Valentine's Day Dance with the
Civinettes.

During November and December, the club will

participate in the annual Civitan International fruit
cake sale.

Civitan was represented by two members at the
state-wide convention in Tampa which was held in
late October. At the convention they were awarded
a plaque for the most increased membership in the
past year.

This year Civitan is under the leadership of Presi-
dent Ron Steadman, Vice-president Dave Rowett,
Secretary, Hagen Kohler, Treasurer Mike Milan
Sergeant-at-arms Dave Richardson, and their spon-
sor, Mr. Roberts. Their off-campus sponsor is Plan-
tation Civitan.

52

mnettes

"Builders of Good Citizenship" is the motto of the
Civinette club at JCBC and they fulfill this goal
through their unlimited service on this campus. Dis-
playing dependability-plus, Civinettes focus their
efforts on assisting other students, faculty members,
and the administration.

Their on campus services have consisted of dis-
tributing the Student Handbooks to both freshmen
and sophomores; assisting in the bookstore, the
library, and the Dean's office; weekly distribution of
the Campus Calendar; selling tickets to Dr. Rush-
ing's testimonial; also, ushering at the testimonial;
serving refreshments at the Rat's Repose. Off cam-
pus, they are working on the Multiple Sclerosis
drive.

Regardless of their active service schedule, Civi-
nettes still manage time for the social aspect of
campus life. In February, Civinettes will co-host
the Valentine's Dance along with Civitan, their
brother club. Twelve members represented the
JCBC club at the state-wide convention at St.
Petersburg, October 22-23.

In conjunction with their parent club. Plantation
Civitan, Civinettes will be participating in the annual
fruit cake sale during November and December.

Under the leadership of President Carolann Clif-
ford, Vice-president Vicki May, Secretary Ginny
Shulby, Treasurer Barbara Brent, and Chaplain
Tommy Anne Tyler, Civinettes plan a very success-
ful year.

The annual Civinette-Civitan picnic.

53

Th* heels of student apathy.

The Student Government meet-
ings begin at 3:30 and sometimes
run until sundown. They begin
with routine business like approv-
ing minutes and committee re-
ports, roll calls, and aimounce-
ments. By the time they are over,
the meeting room is filled with
smoke, shirtsleeves are rolled up,
and the senators are mad at each
other. Bills are introduced, resolu-
tions passed, and clubs chartered.
Debate is sometimes witty, often
heated, always spirited.

This year the voters of JCBC
found themselves with a new kind
of Student Government. Heavy
class loads, the no longer glamor-
ous reputation of SGA and the
usual student apathy caused a
sharp drop in the number of per-
sons registering to run for office
in the elections of last May and
September. Election officials had
to look hard to find students will-
ing to run, and those who did
were unopposed. The candidates

who signed up were interested in
politics and government, and in
getting things done, but many
lacked the winning personality
necessary to win an election. A
"no contest" election gave birth to
a new breed of senator.

There is little pettiness or self-
ishness in this year's SGA. Its
members are, for the most part,
cooperative, imaginative, and bliss-
fully unafraid to voice their opin-
ions. The freshman senators, and
many of the sophomores, have
never faced a competitive election.
Their own vote alone would have
been sufficient to win them their
office, yet they are sharply aware
of their responsibilities to "the rest
of the kids."

The people who make up SGA
are its real wealth. They come
from all over the United States,
and have a wide variety of major
fields, hobbies, and political ideas.
They are hard working, get above

average grades, and, though most
enjoy a good table-pounding argu-
ment, they show an astonishing
ability to get along with each
other.

Despite its great personnel as-
set. Student Government is ham-
strung by serious problems. The
greatest of these has been lack of
student support. Few students
bother to run for office or even to
vote. They have no idea what SGA,
can do for them or how it is set
up. There are many complaints
that SGA merely follows the "fac-
ulty line," and provides no real
leadership in getting things done.

From the outsider's viewpoint
the complaint is justified, although
Student Government members bit-
terly resent it. The core of the
problem lies, say the senators, in
lack of communication. "They
don't know what we're doing, so
they conclude that we're doing
nothing," one SGA member sum-

54

lis people
Its plights
its potential

BY ANN BARDSLEY

marizes. Almost all the senators
have ideas for improving the com-
munications, especially in telling
their constituents what legislation
is pending, and what happens to
their student activity fee.

To add to its problems, the SGA
found itself, early in the year.
without a president or vice presi-
dent. The president elected the
previous semester had not returned
to school. Judy Hancock, who was
elected vice president, assumed
the presidential post, but fell ill
soon afterwards and had to drop
out of school. The result was a
leaderless Student Government.

To fill the gap, the two remain-
ing SGA officers. Secretary Sharon
Roesch and Treasurer Joyce Lea-
gan, plus the Sophomore and
Freshman class chairmen. Senators
Bonnie McFetridge and Larry
Ellis, shared the presidential re-
sponsibilities. Surprisingly, the ar-
rangement worked well. Having
their own members as leaders

eliminated the traditional friction
between the executive and legis-
lative branches of SGA. The easy
camaraderie among the members
replaced the usual rivalry, and
SGA swung into high gear.
SGA was well upon the way to
overcoming the first and second of
its problems when the presidential
election was announced. The elec-
tion was intended as a solution to
the lack of e.xecutive leadership
since the resignation of President
Hancock, and to provide strong
presidential leadership.

The election, however, proved
to be a sharp divisive force in the
Student Government. A majority
of the senate supported the presi-
dential ticket of Craig Barker and
Rick Barnard. A strong and de-
termined minority came out for
the team of Bill Greene and Walt
Swanson. The campaign was one
of the most heated ever to take
place at Broward. Charges, coun-
ter charges, and lots of mud flew,
and the election commission cen-
sured the campaigners right and
left. Senators on both sides of the
political fence stacked their repu-
tations upon the outcome of the
bitter contest.

When the votes were counted,
both sides waited anxiously for the
result. The winners — for president.
Bill Greene, for vice president.
Rick Barnard. Remembers one ob-
server, "It was like electing Barry
Goldwater with Hubert Hum-
phrey."

The election had ended in an
apparent stalemate.

From this point on, the future
of Student Government remains to
be seen. It may be that the politi-
cal wounds opened by the election
will not soon be healed. If this is
the case. Student Government will
remain at an impasse, with tlie
president engaged in a constant
struggle with a hostile senate led
by the vice president. The SGA
members themselves will lose little
by all of this, but the student body
will lose a great deal.

Another possibility is that the
senate will accept the inevitable,
and, while reserving the right of
sincere dissent, will weigh the
issues without bias and try to do
the right thing for the students. A
third possibility is that of mass

resignations, allowing the presi-
dent to appoint his own supporters
to the vacant senate seats.

Of these three courses, the sec-
ond seems the most likely, as well
as the fairest to all involved. It is,
however, not an easy one. It is
difficult for people strongly dedi-
cated to one personality or plat-
form to compromise on an issue to
which they have committed them-
selves, or to get along with some-
one they bitterly oppose. This may
well be the biggest problem SGA
will have to face.

There are many things the SGA
members hope to accomplish this
year, and they \\'ill talk about it to
you with eloquent zeal. They are
interested in bread and butter is-
sues like better food, recognition
of fraternities, constitutional re-
visions, the dress code, ID cards,
and school rules and services in
general.

Yet they are interested, too, in a
larger concept of student govern-
ment. The SGA members would
like to see Broward in closer con-
tact with other colleges and uni-
versities. They wish for less faculty
interference in student affairs, and
want to see the powers and re-
sponsibilities of SGA expanded.
They are sharply critical of stu-
dent apathy, and are anxious to
excite student interest in their go^'-
ernment, and hope that the unique
position that SGA finds itself in
this year may excite some. Most of
all, the senators are eager for the
recognition and confidence of the
student body. They want to prove
that they are, indeed, the voice of
the students, and that they can lift
the campus from the apathetic
morass into which everyone con-
cedes that it has sunk.

The Student Government As-
sociation stands at the crossroads.
It has great potential to either rise
above its previous reputation and
more recent political divisions, or
it can stalemate itself in the heat
of partisanship, and sink even
lower into contempt and obscurity.
The responsibility for its future
lies not only with the members
themselves, but with the student
body, without whose support and
encouragement the idea of effec-
tive student government may well
be doomed to failure.

55

OFFICERS

BILL GREENE, President, is nineteen years old
and a native of New Jersey. He graduated
from South Broward High School in 1964,
and is now studying Law. Bill is interested
in government and politics, and considers
himself a Republican.

RICK BARNARD, Vice-President, is from Ala-
bama, and, at 22, the oldest member of SGA.
He graduated from Miami Norland High
School in 1961, and is studying Journalism
and History, Rick is interested in history
and politics, director of the college radio
show, and considers himself a Democrat.

CAROLANN CLIFFORD, Secretary, is from New
York City and is eighteen years old. She
graduated from Ft. Lauderdale High in 1964
and is studying Fine Arts and Spanish. She
classifies herself as a Democrat, but adds
that she sometimes feels "One party is as
bad as the other, if not worse, as far as
being 'for' Americans and America."

JOYCE LEAGAN, Treasurer, is a native of
Massachusetts and graduated from Pompano
Beach High School in 1964. She is nineteen
years old and is studying Elementary Educa-
tion and World Literature. She keeps busy
with student government, reading, and "seek-
ing seclusion," and explains her political
opinions as "conservatively confused."

SOPHOMORES

ANN BARDSLEY is a native of Massachusetts.
She is nineteen years old, and a 1964 grad-
uate of McArthur High School. Ann is study-
ing Journalism and Political Science. She
works on the student publications staff, and
considers herself a "rather liberal" Democrat.
When relaxing, she enjoys reading and oil
painting.

CLARKIA DENNIS is a nineteen-year-old native
of New York. She is a 1964 graduate of
Stranahan High School and is majoring in
English and History. She is a busy oil painter,
active in school clubs and considers herself
a political independent.

RON GUSTINELLA is from Ohio. He is eigh-
teen, and graduated from Ft. Lauderdale High
School in 1964, and is majoring in Pre-Medi-
icine and Biology. He is also interested in
electronics and sports. He lists himself as

mm

><tliv a Republican.

BONNIE McFETRlDGE is chairman of the Soph-
omore Senate and a native Californian. She
is nineteen, and graduated from Ft. Lauder-
dale in 1964. Bonnie spends her spare time
with modeling, sewing, sports and cheerlead-
ing. She is studying Biology and Education.

JtV^&4^

f^7

GERALD MUCCI is a nineteen-year-old from
Massachusetts. He, too, graduated from Lau-
derdale High in 1964, and is studying Busi-
ness Administration and Marketing. Jerry is
an articulate student of politics and also
enjoys tennis and his hi-fi. He calls himself
a "Conservative, by whose definition?"

SANDY PRYOR, nineteen, is also a '64 grad-
uate of Ft. Lauderdale High. A native Penn-
sylvanian, she is now majoring in Elementary
Education. Sandy is an active member of
Circlettes and SNEA.

TRACY WILKINSON is nineteen years old and
comes from Michigan. She graduated in 1964
from Stranahan High School, and is majoring
in Chemistry and Math. She lists her inter-
ests as "Religion, politics and people," and
is a Conservative Republican.

FRESHMEN

SCOTT ANDERSON comes from New Jersey
and graduated there, from Montclair High
School, in 1964. He is nineteen years old
and is studying English and Speech. Scott
plays the guitar and likes folk music. He
considers himself a liberal political inde-
pendent.

BRENT BALCH is eighteen years old and
comes from Illinois. He graduated from Car-
dinal Gibbons High in 1964 and is majoring
in Liberal Arts. He lists himself as a Con-
servative Republican.

RENEE BAYUK is an eighteen-year-old native
of Pennsylvania. She graduated from Lauder-
dale High in 1965, and is studying Spanish
and History. Renee enjoys dancing, swim-
ming, tennis and singing. She is a Repub-
lican.

WILLIAM BEHERENS, eighteen, comes from
Illinois. Bill graduated from Stranahan High
with the class of '65, and is taking Engineer-
ing and Electro-Acoustics. He likes sports
cars and his hi-fi. He is a Conservative
Republican.

JAMES BIRKETT is eighteen years old and
from New York. He graduated from McArthur
High School in 1965 and is studying Political
Science and Mathematics. He likes boxing,
basketball, reading and politics. He leans to-
ward the Democratic party, but adds that he
may be open for a change.

56

THE PEOPLE

%^1

MIKE BURGIO, eighteen, is a native New York-
er and a 1965 graduate of Chaminade High
School. He is majoring in business admin-
istration. IVIil^e enjoys surfing in his spare
time, and lists himself as a Democrat.

DAVID BYRNE is eighteen years old and a na-
tive of New York. He graduated from North-
east High in 1965 and is majoring in Pre-En-
gineering. Dave's many interests include elec-
tronics, flying, politics, philosophy, "rough-
ing it." He considers his political interests
"independent," with "conservative leanings."

LARRY ELLIS, eighteen years old, is a 1965
graduate of Stranahan Senior High School and
Chairman of the Freshmen Senate. A native
New Yorker, Larry's major studies include
Law and Creative Writing. His Interests are
found in music and sports and he considers
himself a conservative Republican.

BRUCE EVANS, is a native of Ohio and a
1965 graduate of South Broward High School.
He is majoring in Dentistry, and likes music,
drawing, and skindiving. Bruce lists his
political preference as Democrat.

GARY FOSS is an eighteen-year-old Floridian.
He graduated from Pompano Beach High
School and is studying Chemical Engineer-
ing. He is a personnel officer in the Civil
Air Patrol, and a Republican.

JEAN HOLDER is eighteen years old and also
from Florida. She graduated from McArthur
High School with the class of '65, and is
majoring in Marine Geology and Gemology.
Jean is interested in jewelry, politics, his-
tory and horses, and considers herself a
conservative Republican.

ELLEN KING is eighteen and comes from New
York. She was part of Lauderdale High's class
of '65 and is studying Education. In her
spare time she enjoys water skiing and
dancing.

LINDA KNIFFEN is eighteen years old and
comes from Michigan. She graduated from
McArthur in 1965 aind is majoring in Educa-
tion. She lists herself a conservative Re-
publican.

'•-t

TERRY LABELLE is a Floridian. He is seven-
teen years old and a 1965 graduate of Cham-
inade High School. Terry is studying Law and
PoMtical Science. He lists himself as a Dem-
ocrat and is interested in sports cars and
politics.

DAWN MILLER is an eighteen-year-old native
of Ohio. She graduated from Pompano Beach
High in 1965 and is majoring in Education.
She enjoys swimming, dancing, bowling, and
tennis, and considers herself a Republican.

CHRISTINA MURPHY is eighteen and comes
from Massachusetts. She is a 1965 graduate
of Ft. Lauderdale High School and is study-
ing Journalism and History. Chris is on the
Crier staff and is a devoted fan of female
vocalist Peggy Lee. She is a political inde-
pendent.

BARBARA GLGES is an eighteen-year-old na-
tive of Kentucky. She graduated from Pom-
pano Beach High School in 1965 and is study-
ing Mathematics and Science. Barbara's many
interests include art, music (she can play
the organ), sewing, and handcrafts.

CRAIG PALMER comes from Ohio. He is eigh-
teen years old and graduated from Cardinal
Gibbons High School in 1965. Craig is study-
ing French and Education, collects tropical
fish, and lists himself as a Republican.

JULIE POOLE is a native of New York and
is eighteen years old. She is a 1965 gradu-
ate of Ft. Lauderdale High and is majoring
in lournalism. Julie pursues "happiness and
all forms of motion." She lists no political
preference, except to say that "the world
should be kept free from tyranny."

DIANA RACE, an eighteen-year-old, 1965 grad-
uate of Ft. Lauderdale Senior High, is attend-
ing the Junior College of Broward County on
an honors scholarship. A conscientious stu-
dent, Diana is politically "conservative."

JAN SOUZA is an eighteen-year-old native of
Massachusetts. She graduated from McArthur
with the class of '65 and is studying Public
Relations and Interior Design. She enjoys
drawing, music and dancing, and is politically
non-partisan.

57

the colleae student and tlie draft

BY RUSS SEPIELU

58

If you are a male student, and
your grades aren't too good, you
had better start hitting the books
or you may open your mail box
and find a letter from Uncle Sam.

As the war in Viet Nam soaks
up manpower, the draft calls are
rising, and local Selective Service
boards are cracking down on bor-
derline students. Also in danger

are the perpetual students, men
who go to college one term, drop
out the next, and return again,
and graduate students not en-
gaged in the study of science or
some field directly related to the
"maintenance of the national in-
terest."

There have already been re-
ported cases of students who were
taken from college and drafted.
Those involved were borderline
students who had exhausted sev-
eral years of deferments.

This sudden increase in draft
induction began in August, when
President Johnson ordered rein-
forcements sent to Viet Nam. As a
result the draft call jumped from
17,000 in August, to 35,000 in
October, and to 45,000 in Decem-
ber. This means that every young
man, between the ages of 19 and
26, who is not deferred for rea-
sons of health, education, or mat-
rimony, has probably been called.
In many parts of the country
married men without children are
already being called. Under exist-
ing laws, college students can be
called only after the pool of single
or childless men has been de-
pleted.

Mrs. Margaret Goodwin, Ad-
ministrative Clerk of the Selective
Service System in Broward Coun-
ty, said that, "College students are
in no immediate danger of being
drafted. Any student carrying 12
hours and in good academic stand-
ing," she said, "will still be de-
ferred."

One must keep in mind the
fact that the college student is de-
ferred from the draft only under
the present draft laws. The draft-
evasion movement has already
hastened a re-examination of the
way our draft laws are admin-
istered.

Many people feel that college
should not be used as a refuge
from military service, or that just
because a boy's family is rich
enough to send him to school, he
need not serve the nation in any
capacity.

On the other hand, this country
is traditionally anti-militaristic
and has always encouraged stu-
dents to continue their studies
and broaden their knowledge.

Some observers, like Robert G.
Spivak, of the New York Journal-

American, feel that a medical stu-
dent or a science student could be
more valuable to the nation out-
side the armed services than
inside.

It would be unfortunate for
such students if Congress were to
change the draft laws without first
carefully reviewing the situation.

Perhaps the greatest damage to
the student's case for deferment
is being done by the protesters.
Their rowdy demonstrations are
giving college students a bad repu-
tation as being anti-government.
In actuality, the anti-Viet Nam
and anti-draft demonstrators rep-
resent only a small minority of
college students. The tactics of
the protesters, however, are be-
ginning to backfire. Many student
groups are now forming that sup-
port our government's policy in
Viet Nam. Two of these, the Circl-
ettes of the Junior College of
Broward County and the Student
Government of Miami-Dade Jun-
ior College, are organizing a drive
to send Christmas presents to
servicemen in Viet Nam. Organi-
zations such as these are appear-
ing on campuses all across the na-
tion. Their actions are proving
that the demonstrators are a def-
inite minority, and that the ma-
jority of the students support our
government's policies.

If college students continue to
be deferred, and if the draft call
remains high, colleges can prepare
for a tremendous population ex-
plosion next fall. Between now
and next September some 3,000,-
000 men will reach draft age.
These youths represent the fantas-
tic crop of "war babies," those
children born in 1946 and 1947.
Of these men some 40% will
enter college, which will put a
great burden on many schools.

For the others, those not enter-
ing college or those that are un-
decided, there is advice from Lt.
Gen. Lewis B. Hershey, head of
the Selective Service System: "If
you know what you want to be,
then go on to college. If not, go
in the service."

This entire situation that we
are experiencing boils down to
two alternatives for college stu-
dents. STUDY HARD AND DII^
IGENTLY, OR GET FITTED
FOR KHAKIS.

59

by Joel Martin

Director of the Astronomy Program

It is not every year that a col-
lege astronomy program can fur-
nish a real, live comet for the
students. But 1965 was one of
those years.

This year the observing pro-
gram for Astronomy 101 included
Comet Ikeya-Seki, alias 1965f,
alias Sungrazer VIII. The depend-
able Moon, Venus and Saturn
were also on hand.

The 160 novice astronomers
were given day-by-day directions
for following the comet. Last
minute position measurements
were received regularly from the
Central Bureau for Astronomical
Telegrams, a service of the Inter-
national Astronomical Union.

The only real difficulty was the
ungodly hour at which the comet
could be seen. After all, 5:30 a.m.
is beyond the call of duty — even
for a student in desperate need of
an A or a B. The comet was best
seen in Fort Lauderdale on Octo-
ber 25 and 28 after it had passed
perihelion — and after the news-
papers had consigned it to their
special kind of oblivion.

Kaoru Ikeya, the Japanese who
discovered the comet, is exactly
the same age as the students of
JCBC. One big difference between
him and the students is that he
works full time for $35 a month,
and spots comets in his spare time.

Ikeya is improving every year.
This comet is his third and his
best. What will his next one be?

Ikeya is persistent. He arises
before dawn to pursue his avoca-
tion. He discovered his first comet
after 350 hours of searching in the
pre-day light constellations. This
was in 1963.

Locally, more than 220 inter-
ested people attended JCBC's first
comet party to see Ikeya's first. It
was, however, dim, small and hard
to see.

His third comet — one anyone
would be proud of — represented
more than 2,332 hours at his home-
made telescope. Though he spends
a lot of time, Ikeya spends little
money — a total of $22.32 on the
parts for his astronomical instru-
ment.

The picture of Comet Ikeya-

Seki should help students remem- ■
ber this unusual event. The next
big comet is due about 1986 when
Halley's will return. It may be as
impressive as 1965f, and it may
not.

60

61

"Because the colleges are afraid to deal frankly
with the normal sexual drives of young people, the
consequences for students can be tragic," states
Gerald Walker, recipient of the National Conference
of Christians and Jews' Certificate of Excellence for
Journalistic Achievement.

Every generation, of course, has had to deal with
the problem of premarital relations among young
people on the college level. As the Harvard "Crim-
son" put it in a recent article, "In sheer wildness,
today's college students do not compare with their
fabled predecessors." It also lists two factors, how-
ever, that make the cm-rent students different: (1)
premarital sex in all its forms is much more wide-
spread and openly discussed among students; and
(2) in the midst of this apparent sophistication, at a
time when highly reliable methods of birth control
exist, the majority of students are nearly as ignorant
of the facts as die poorest, illiterate Indian peasant.

"College pregnancies seldom appear in the pub-
lished figm-es on illegitimacy (which has been rising
throughout tlie nation)," states Milton I. Levine,
M.D., "because die majority of diem end in abor-
tions." Through an abortion grapevine, which exists
around most colleges, these desperate giils tiy to
find their way to some doctor, rather than a quack.
If they are lucky enough to find an M.D., the coeds
arrange to have the abortion performed over die
weekend, so they can be back in class Monday
morning. Usually, dieir parents know nothing about
it. Of course, the gu^ls are taking enormous chances,
for if the operation is badly done, they risk death.

Odier girls decide to have their babies. They drop
out of school and out of sight, then usually surrender
the child to an adoption agency. James Poling, pro-
fessor of family life at Oregon State University,
stated that research has foimd, however, that few
young women who give up dieir babies ever recover
completely from feelings of guilt and remorse.

The third possibility is for the couple to marry —
even though they may be far from ready for it

emotionally. Moreover, they may be totally unsuited
to each other. Such "quickie marriages" load the
dice against them and dieir children.

Colleges should face these facts realistically. Their
primary purpose is education, yet, they cannot escape
responsibility for die emotional and physical life of
young people on their campuses. Since schools are
aware that a certain number of students will have
premarital sexual relations, administrators should try
to make certain that all students know how to avoid
the serious consequences.

There is a world of difference between advocating
free love and merely giving honest answers to ques-
tions which houble students. Such questions as,
"How do you describe the contraceptive diaphragm?"
and "Is it possible to become pregnant without com-
plete sexual intercourse?" are common inquiries
among college students. One way to answer these
questions in advance would be to provide each fresh-
man with a recommended reading list of reliable,
forthright books, such as Dr. Alan F. Guttmacher's
"Babies by Choice or by Chance" (Avon, 1961, 50
cents) or his more detailed "Complete Book of Birth
Control" (Ballantine, 50 cents). Both paperbacks are
easily available at newsstands and drugstores, as well
as at bookstores. The "Complete Book of Birth Con-
trol" gives full descriptions of all accepted methods
and includes what is probably the clearest explana-
tion of the "rhythm" method, the only one that the
Catholic church will consider.

Certainly the colleges could help students under-
stand better the physiological, psychological, socio-
logical, and moral implications of their sexual ma-
turity. To do this effectively, however, colleges
should take into consideration the sexual activity
that exists on campuses today and try to develop
their policies to deal with it as realistically as pos-
sible. The "problem" exists, has been evaded, and
will never be completely solved until the issue is
faced squarely. Let us hope diat our colleges at
least make an attempt.

62

"Landscape! Landscape!"

"As close as I can figure, Mister, your machine just vomited"

63

Commercials We'd

Like to See —

". . . Mah Man Packs

a .38 — Lifebuoy!"

tt>^

"I don't like your attitude, Mr. Smith!"

64

"There's something here holding
a Yankee Go Home sign"

OUR FEATURE WRITERS

CHARLIE BURT, author of "The Silent College Dilemma", will gradu-
ate from JCBC in December. Immediate plans after graduation include
attending the University of Florida as an advertising major. Off
campus, Charlie was a ski instructor for Mirador Ski School.

t-

^

w

BILL KELLEY, author of "Football and the Junior College", is pres-
ently a freshman English major. An avid sports enthusiast. Bill was
the sports editor of the newspaper at South Broward and is currently
Sports editor for the Venetian Crier.

PAM SERRE, author of "The Rushing Testimonial", is a 1965 gradu-
ate of Cardinal Gibbons, where she was a staff writer for "Insight",
their school newspaper. An elementary education major, Pam is a
member of the French club and an initiate of Circlettes.

(^

MATT FAISON, author of "The Question of Sub Rosas", is a sopho-
more and plans to graduate in April. As a freshman, he was selected
Freshman Man of the Year and is a member of Delta Psi Omega,
dramatic honorary society. He is currently the editor of the Venetian
Crier and is a member of the Student Activities Board.

f^Jth

RUSS SEPIELLI, author of "The College Student and the Draft",
attended the University of Florida during 1963-64. He is currently
working for WQAM and plans to attend the University of Miami next
Fall, majoring in speech therapy.

L2 4

V/

513VJI

EDITOR'S NOTE

To break from tradition is a hard thing to
accomplish, especially when the break results
in such a noticeable change. Silver Sands is
no exception, for the transformation that has
taken place in the yearbook has caused an
undercurrent of comment on the subject un-
paralleled at the College, in the county, or
in the state.

Silver Sands is not for the ultra-conserva-

tives or the adorers of those overly-common,
hard-bound books that just about every
school in the nation has been clinging to
for the past century. Such statements as "I
wish we had a yearbook like the one back
in high school" are a little behind times.
For you, high school is a thing of the past
but the Junior College is a very present fact.
It is thus fitting that Silver Sands be a
different publication, for it tells of life at
an institution that is itself different from all
other "traditional" forms of educational

structure. As a visiting student put it, "The
magazine is something fresh, a new look, an
escape from staleness."

We, the members of the staff of Silver
Sands, are proud with our break from tra-
dition and earnestly believe other colleges
will follow. If this. Silver Sands III, does
nothing else for you, we hope that it will
remind you that you are now in college.

John E. Leatherwood
Editor-in-Chief

MARCH, 1966

STAFF AND ADVISORS

Editor-in-Cbiet John E. Leatherwood

Assistant Editor Pamela Edwards

Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley

Feature Editor _ Sheryl Martin

Art Editor Lewis Alquist

Sports Editor John Wolfe

General Staff Assistant Carol Shafer

Photographers David Porter and

Norman Summey
Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes

Chairman of the Division of Language

and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter

COVER: Steve Hall leaps for rebound against
Miami-Dade Falcons; photo by David Porter

SILVER

'^m

The Junior College of Bromard County

Fort Lauderdale, florida

MARCH, 1966

TABLE OF CONTENTS

BAHAMA WIPE OUT Lee Bacall 2 SPORTS: INTRAMURALS/INTERCOLLEGIATE

PUBLICATIONS Ann Bardsley and Jim Flavin 4 John Wolfe 37

THE SCENT OF LILAC (Short Story) WINTER FROLIC 40

. ' Norm Stebner 10 TEAHOUSE OF THE AUGUST MOON

-ANN'S REVIEW , ". Ann Bardsley 13 Phil Mansueto 42

ON NATURE AND MAN (Essay) „.,r.. Carol Shafer 14 THE CHRISTMAS DANCE 44

THE PROBLEM OF CAMPUS LANDSCAPING VENETIAN HOLIDAY Pam Edwards 46

Bruce Scharman 16

THE FACE OJl^VJET NAM Jack Cresse 18 THE SOCK HOPS 48

THEPSISC^GE DROPOUT Paul King 26 SALUTE BRAZIL Jeanne Cooney 50

TrOTE on a SHOESTRING Ann Bardsley 28 SING OUT 66 John Leatherwood 52

WHAT AM I? (Poem) Leonard Bauer 30 CLUBS AND ORGANIZATIONS Sheryl Martin 55

BE KIND AND TOLERANT, O YOUTH (Poem) j THOUGHT OF BEAUTY (Poem)

Cassandra Kenf.eld 31 ^^^^^ j^ ^^^ j^^^. ^^^^^^ 53

ON CAMPUS (Cartoons by Lew Alquist) 32 t »,;r „r^ .r^ . ^ j t, .. , , ^,

BE SUCCESSFUL -ATTEND COLLEGE! (Essay) ^ ^^ "^ ^^"^""^ Cassandra Kenfield 63

Betty F. Niesen 34 MULTIPARTITE (Poem) James Higgins Gray 64

By

LEE BACALL

Illustrated by
Paul King

BAHAMA

WIPE

OUT

Wi

IND AND SEA both combine to give
birth to an ocean wave. It is this ocean
wave which the surfer reveres. It is foi;
this wave that the surfer prays. It is from this wave
that the surfer will get his thrills.

Wind is the father of the ocean wave. It is he
who delivers the seed of direction to his mate. The
sea is the mother of the ocean wave, for it is she
who will bear a child, a child in the form of an
ocean wave. And it is the ocean floor who in the
form of a midwife will deHver the wave unto the
surfer.

Blowing for many days in one direction, the wind
gives stimulus to the sea. Heavy swells of water are
formed. These swells are long, flowing, smooth
waves. These swells, often 1,000 feet in length, are
sometimes found by ocean liners to be running at
speeds of 43 knots.

Allowed to run uninterrupted onto a beach, the
swell will gradually build in height, and lessen in
length. When a ground swell reaches a sand bar, it
changes form due to friction from the bottom, and
compression. A steep sided short wave is produced
from the long shallow wave, which breaks usually
where the water is shallowest.

Because south Florida is blessed with an offshore
neighbor acting as a breakwater, i.e. the Bahamas
island chain, there is a lack of surf. Grand Bahama,
Eleuthera, and Great Abaco Islands prevent the long
ground swells from reaching our shores.

It is reasons such as the Bahama chain that one
finds armouncements such as this:
SURFERS:
Ride wanted to Daytona or Melbourne areas
over Thanksgiving vacation. More than willing
to share expenses in order to ride decent surf.
Ask for Bob 98-9-2365.

But why if there is such a paucity of surf in south
Florida do surfers surf?

Answers to this question which was posed to
surfers along the coast, ranged from "I dunno" to
"It's something to do."

When Russ Sepielh was confronted with the ques-
tion, he gave this reply, "When I am going to school,

it is an escape from my problems. I get a feeling of
personal satisfaction and accomplishment on a big
day when I make the waves." It's personal he said,
it makes me feel good.

Butch Herndon, from the Little Hawaii Surf Shop
in Hollywood, said a mouthful about surfing when
he said, "It is something you have to try before you
can appreciate it."

Whatever their reason, and whatever their moti-
vation, surfers are buying boards and equipment in
numbers almost unbelievable five years ago.

For years people have looked with disdain upon
the sport of surfing and its participants. Even today
there is a certain dislike of surfers by the older
generation.

People may laugh at the bronzed young adven-
turers paddling their boards in tranquil waters. But
sure as the water erodes the sand, the surfer will ride
the waves.

There are people who do not laugh at surfers.
These people are tlie enterpreneurs in the "Surfing
Racket." Many people do not realize the multi-
miUion dollar importance to the American economy.
Consider tlie fact that the average surfboard costs
from $125 to $175 with some custom boards costing
even more. Taking as an average $150 as the price,
and multiplying it times the estimated one million
surfers there are, you come up with the staggering
figure of 150 million dollars invested in surfboards
alone. This does not take into account all the people
the business employs, nor the materials used.

Surfing has been the stimulus for many products
in the consumer market. Like every group, surfing
has its own publication, Surfer magazine. There is a
national organization getting underway, the USSA
. . . the United States Surfers Association, dedicated
to betterment of the sport. And too, like every grouj),
organization, club, or field, surfing has its own spe-
cialized words.

There are regulation clothes to be worn . . .
baggies for tlie boys, and bikinis for die girls. When
it is cold, everyone must wear a diver's tyjje wet
suit. Many big name manufacturers of swimwear
such as Jantzen, and Cole have gotten into the surf-
ing trend.

Movie moguls have joined the bandwagon, along
with recording artists and companies. On and on the
list could go, including surfer cartoons, and skat-
boards.

Not unlike the hula hoop, the surf craze is now
upon us. But, imlike a fad, surfing is real, has been ■
real for many years.

It has only come of age.

A free student press has been, for many years, of
vital importance to almost all of America's colleges
and universities. It reflects, through the airway and
the printed page, the intellectual, social, and political
ideas of its institution, and keeps the individual
student in touch with all the activities on an often
sprawling campus. A good student press, however, is
more than just a mirror of college life. It encourages
action, controversy, and self expression. It takes a
leading role on the campus it serves.

The Junior College of Broward County has four
publications, a weekly newspaper, yearbook-maga-
zine, literary magazine, and radio program. All four
are entirely operated by students, and are financed
from the student activity fees.

PUBLICATIONS

BY ANN BARDSLEY

AND

JIM FLAVIN

Most of the editorial staff of all four publications
are paid by workship or scholarship, and most intend
to make journalism or a related field their profes-
sion. Many of the staff members, however, are un-
paid volunteers who receive nothing but experience
for their labors.

Putting out a publication is tiresome and un-
glamorous work, with the frustration of inflexible
deadlines and numerous unforeseen problems. Type-
writers sometimes rattle in the cluttered publications
office until late at night.

The weary staff members often wonder aloud,
". . . Why do I bother, anyway? . . ." The truth is,
they like it. For them, there is a creative thrill and
pride in producing a newspaper, a magazine, or a
radio show, that nothing else can match.

Editor-in-Chief Matt Faison and Associate Editor John Teitschied.

$WM

Peggy Williams, Assistant Editor

Perhaps the most difficult job
among all the publications be-
longs to the staff of the VENE-
TIAN CRIER, JCBC's weekly
newspaper. Editor Matt Faison
and his staff must, within a tight
schedule, gather and write news
stories, columns, and editorials,
find photographs and an editorial
cartoon, and then correct copy
and proof sheets, lay out and
paste up the pages, and fold and
distribute the finished paper every
Friday morning.

In addition to gathering news,
the Crier staff has sponsored ac-
tivities such as a forum on the
war in Viet Nam and has taken
editorial stands on school politics
and policies, local and state issues
affecting the college, and national
problems such as civil rights, the
student protestor, and the Ku
Klux Klan. The Crier's sharp com-
ments have occasionally sparked
angry letters to the editor and one
issue was actually burned by the
partisans of a candidate the Crier
criticized during a Student Gov-
ernment election. Despite the
storms that sometimes ruffle the
breeze of the Crier offices, it con-
tinues a pohcy of impartial news
coverage and outspoken editorial
comment.

Gerry McManus, Managing Editor

Marci Coyle, News Editor Pidgeon Darbro, Feature Editor Ed Dempsey, Sports Editor

SILVER
SANDS

John Leathenvood, Editor-in-Chief, and Paul Bundy, Jr., Tropical Press representative
discuss the quality and design of the Silver Sands II color flat.

Lew Alquist
Art Editor

Q Edvfards, Assistant Editor

Ann Bardsley, Literary Editor

Sheryl Martin, Feature Editor

SILVER SANDS, the quarterly
feature magazine of JCBC, is, to
both its staff and its readers, an
exciting experiment in college
journalism. This year Silver Sands
replaced the traditional yearbook
beloved of high school students.
The editor, John Leatherwood,
and his staff are trying to tell die
real story of one year at JCBC
without being, as they put it,
"trapped \\'ithin the rigid year-
book format." The magazine re-
tains many yearbook features, such
as photographs of the faculty and

the graduating students, but in-
stead of the usual page for every
club and acti\'ity the magazine
publishes articles of \arying length
about major organizations and so-
cial events, often lumping related
events together in one feature. In
addition to the usual yearbook
subjects, Siher Sands prints book
reviews, poems, cartoons, short
stories, and nonfiction articles that
reflect the ideas and issues which
characterize each year of college
life.

John Wolfe
Sports Editor

Carol Shafer
General Staff Assistant

P'AN KU

Helen Anne Easterly, P'an Ku faculty advisor, studies
layout design and content of a rival publication.

For the creative writer, a small
staff produces JCBC's literary
magazine, P'AN KU. The best ser-
ious literature, both prose and
poetry by Broward students and
faculty, is published in the mag-
azine's two yearly issues. Any stu-
dent can submit original poetry,
essays, and short stories, and the
P'an Ku editorial board chooses
the best manuscripts for publica-
tion. The magazine is illustrated
with appropriate drawings, engrav-
ings, and woodcuts chosen by
editor John Charlton and Karen
Winkopp, the art editor. In this,
its second year of publication,
P'an Ku is published in December
and April, and has expanded from
32 to 64 pages of art and litera-
ture.

Editor-in-Chief John Charlton

The staff of Community
College Calling (Tri-C):
Jim Flavin, Nancy
White, Alan Kent,
and Tri-C Director
Rick Barnard.

nity

Commu
College
Calling

The newest and largest circulat-
ing of all the JCBC publications is
COMMUNITY COLLEGE CALL-
ING, a weekly radio program
which reaches an estimated five
thousand listeners in Dade, Brow-
ard, and Palm Beach counties. The
program broadcasts from the
W\VIL studios at 4:30 every Sun-
day afternoon. Rick Bamard, Jim
Flavin, Nancy Wliite, and Al Kent

produce half an hour of campus
ne\\'s, music, interviews with fac-
ulty members and special guests,
and a short "spotlight" interview
with a student personality. The
student staff does all of its own
taping and editing and designs
the program to publicize special
campus activities and to inform a
largely adult audience about the
junior college.

T//ie Scent

By
NORM STEBNER

EMMETT was washing the breakfast dishes
when he heard the dog bark at a car turning
into the farmyard. He paused, and then
dropped the chipped, white enamel cup into the
soapy water.

He Hved alone, except for his younger brother,
Johnny. The house was utilitarian. Emmett had
thought of having an inside pump, but the old well
outside was still good, its water cold and sweet;
besides, he had outside chores whatever the weather.
So he had given up the idea. The seats of the two
wooden chairs at the oilcloth-covered table where
he stood had long since worn through successive
layers of paint. The wood grain glowed with a dull
luster. The woodbox by the stove showed the batter-
ing of years. Next to the canebottom rocker was his
mother's lamp table, a source of pride to him, with
its clawed feet clutching the large green-glass orbs
with perpetual ferocity. On the wall, a Currier and
Ives print receded into mistiness behind a fly-
specked glass, itself bounded by an ornate, once-
gilded frame. In one corner of the room, the brass
bedstead held a heavy quilted cover which still
retained the residue of variegated splendor.

He wiped his hands on the floursack remnant
with thoughtful deliberateness as the car -door
slammed. The dog's half-hearted growls accom-
panied the footsteps across the porch. A man's
shadow abruptly blocked most of the light coming
through the unscreened opening.

"Mr. Elders?"

"Yes," said Emmett hesitantly, as he moved on
age-stiffened legs toward the door. The rapidity with
which the stranger had reached the door had caught
Emmett somewhat by surprise.

"I'm from the State Welfare Board," said the
stranger.

Emmett retreated a step. "Come in," he said,
acceding to the stranger's official tone.

"Are you alone?" asked the agent, confidentially,
without moving.

"Yes, I'm alone," said Emmett slowly, adding,
"Johnny's out."

The agent moved into the semi-dusk of Emmett's
house. He turned to glance out of the doorway
where the dog, eying the intruder, had stopped at
the sill marking the interior of the house.

"G'wan," said Emmett, motioning. The dog
retreated.

The agent, seemingly relieved, said, "Good watch-
dog, I suppose?"

"Too old," said Emmett gruffly, looking past
the stranger.

Outside, brushing the porch, a new-leaved lilac
bush was vibrant with the imminent explosion of
violet. The windmill rasped once uncertainly. The
rusty red of the farmyard stopped at the edge of
the new green winter wheat. Already, the heat waves
blurred the line where green and blue met. Emmett
peered intently for a moment, eyes narrowed in a
face lined with more than age. The agent, face pale
in the dusky light, stood flat-footed, straw hat in
hand.

"Might as well sit down," said Emmett, indicating
the rocker.

The agent moved gingerly toward the rocker,
almost declining the invitation in deference to his
light straw-colored suit. He seated himself carefully,
and after holding his straw hat for a moment, laid
it on the lamp table, resisting the impulse to blow
the dust off first. He bent over as if to open his
briefcase, but instead, propped it against a clawed
table leg, unopened.

Emmett apologized with a glance at the dishpans
on the table. "Have to do the chores first around
here." He pulled a chair around to face the agent.

As the agent leaned forward, Emmett inter-
jected, "The other fellow didn't come." It was neither
a statement nor a question.

"Mr. Polp?" asked the agent.

Emmett nodded, although he didn't know the
former agent's name.

10

The agent continued, "He's been assigned other
work in the department."

Emmett rather wondered at the other work, but
didn't ask. He was more concerned about the
change. The last agent had stopped in several times;
questions about him, about Johnny. All written
down on forms. Emmett remembered the carbon
paper, how worn it was. It would hardly write and
yet the agent had put the carbon in the forms very
carefully. Even when it hardly wrote. He wondered
if this new agent had some new carbon paper.

"When I was driving in, I couldn't help noticing
your horses. Sure are big."

Emmett recognized that the agent was really
commenting on the fact that he still used horses,
but he said proudly, "Belgians. Go almost two thous-
and pound. First ones in these parts to use 'em.
They can pull all day.''

The agent settled back in the rocker. Emmett
continued, "My dad paid a thousand dollars for one."

The agent focused on Emmett's dirt-stained
knees. Emmett felt obliged to look at them too. He
had set out a couple of dozen tomato plants that
morning, carefully placing shingles to protect them
from the sun. He saw no reason to explain, so he
said, "1927. Kansas City. Big stallion, called him
Barney."

The agent's "Uh-huh" was faint, mostly to him-
self.

"We used to have a dozen or so around. Raised
'em. Three years ago I sold a matched pair for
fifteen hundred." Emmett said it as if to convince
the agent that the horses were a good investment.
When the agent didn't react, Emmett said, "Got
four left. Need 'em.''

Emmett interpreted the agent's silence as recep-
tiveness. "How 'bout a cup of coffee?" He stood as
he said it.

The agent extended his arm so his wristwatch
was exposed and said in a quick tone, "Yes."

Emmett opened the stove lid, decided that chips

Illustrated By
SHARON FROST

would do. He rummaged in the woodbox. The agent
used the opportunity to open his briefcase, extracting
a number of papers which he read and shuffled.
Emmett shook the grate, added a dipper of water
to the blue-enamelware coffee pot. Going to the
shelves that served as a cupboard, where rows of
jars, some empty, some full, stood in the near-
darkness that obscured their contents, Emmett
raised a little curtain at one end and carefully
removed two flower-decorated cups. Glancing now
and then at the agent engrossed in his papers,
Emmett washed and polished the cups until they
shone. When the coffee pot made hissing noises, he
raised the lid and peered into the murky liquid.
The odor reassured him, and he filled both cups
with a steady hand.

The agent was so preoccupied with his reading
as Emmett approached, that he had to place the
cup on the lamp table. Returning to his own chair,
he sipped his coffee. His lips smacked, and a satis-
fied "ah" was distinctly audible. The agent continued
his reading. Emmett took another sip of coffee, test-
ing the flavor in his mouth. Although the taste was
reassuring, he set his coffee on the table beside him.
The dog's toenails ticked softly across the porch. He
lay down just outside, floppy ears half-raised, evalu-
ating the silence.

"Besides,'' said Emmett abruptly, "Johnny likes
to ride 'em. Got one out there 's a pretty good rider."

The agent continued reading. Emmett added,
with a trace of humor, "Big enough, that's sure."

The agent glanced up. "Oh," he said, like
a question.

"And I don't have to worry "bout him on that
horse. Got too much sense. Won't even go far from
the place. Comes home when he's had enough."

The agent finished his reading. He let the papers
rest on his lap, knees together, and reached for the
coffee with both hands, a necessity since the lamp
table was just a little below his eye-level. Emmett
watched the maneuver carefully, half-expecting to

11

see coffee stains appear on the straw-colored suit.
The agent managed a small sip, however, and re-
turned the cup to the table. Emmett felt relieved
and almost irritated at the same time.

"Course, he can't do much 'round the place." It
wasn't an admission, but a statement of fact.

The agent very deliberately tapped the papers
into neat order on the arm of the rocker. He placed
them on top of his straw hat with an air of dismissal.

"Don't really matter, though, 'cause I can still
do what needs to be done around here.''

At this, the agent's face brightened and Emmett
felt as though he had been complimented.

"Lot's to be done," agreed the agent.

Emmett reflected a moment. A tumbling pro-
fusion passed through his mind.

"Don't know why the Howards should be com-
plaining 'bout Johnny, though," he said. His voice
held a bitter edge.

"They would just rather not have Johnny around
their place," said the agent, his voice indicating that
this was not an unreasonable request.

"I know. But he don't bother nothing. Their li'l'
girl likes to play with him!" After a moment Emmett
added, "He plays real nice with her too. Used to
give her horsie-back rides. Just sits by the fence and
looks at her books. Doesn't even go in their yard
anymore!"

"Uh-huh," said the agent, as though to indicate
the Howards hadn't made any complaints recently.

A big blue bottlefly buzzed aimlessly through
the doorway. The agent flinched to himself and
watched the fly, darting and pausing, bumping
around the rjDom. Emmett's eyes followed the fly
too. The opaque light of the window by the stove,
begrimed inside and out, finally attracted the fly.
Both watched as the fly smashed repeatedly against
the window, finally buzzing helplessly as it pressed
itself against the glass.

Emmett spoke again, his urgency pleading against
the irrelevancy of his argument. "He's big, but he
wouldn't hurt the little girl."

The fly continued to buzz, more faintly now.
Occasionally it rested. Emmett looked out of the
open door, where the colors under the ascending
sun were more vivid, yet blurred. He became aware
of the heat and wiped his face with the dish towel.
Only when he had finished did he notice, and em-
barrassed, he crumpled the towel and tossed it on
the table as though it didn't matter. Somewhere out
in the yard, a rooster started to crow, but stopped,
his throat to dry to finish.

His thoughts were clearer now. Mornings, feeding
Johnny oatmeal, some dribbling down out of the

corner of his mouth into his beard. Winters, wiring
his coat on. Or shaving him, trying to get him to sit
still — the time he grabbed the razor and cut his
hand because he didn't want to be shaved. Or
bathing him. If he got him into the tub, he splashed
water all over the room. Johnny and the eggs. He
liked them best warm from the hen, to take them
and crush them in his big hands, arms upraised, so
the warm yellow ran down his wrists and arms.

Emmett shook his head, one hand rubbing the
back of his neck. The dog, nose on the doorsill,
looked with brown eyes at Emmett, his tail thump-
ing faintly now and then. The agent stirred in his
rocker, his fingers tracing the creases in his trousers
down to where they disappeared at his knees.

Softly, Emmett said, "He's my brother."

The fly was silent now, a spot of dark against
the hazy gray.

The agent reached into his briefcase and pulled
out a pad of printed forms. Emmett turned at the
rustling and watched as the agent raised the pages
one by one and methodically inserted the worn
carbon paper squarely, firmly.

"It would be best to take care of it today," said
the agent, approaching Emmett with the forms.

Emmett pushed aside the coffee cup.

"You'll need to sign all four copies." The agent's
finger pointed. Emmett picked up the pen, and the
agent said, "I'll take him with me this morning."

Emmett paused, reaching for the towel. "He's
probably down at the Howard's." The towel muffled
the words.

When Emmett had finished signing, the agent
put the forms into his briefcase, snapping the lock,
and fastening the straps.

"I'll pick him up on the way."

Emmett shook his head from side to side, slowly,
his white hair strangely full. He brushed at his dirt-
stained knees with quick swats of his hand. Rising,
he walked with steady, measured steps, past the dog,
out on the porch, stopping on the edge in the
bright sunlight. Clearing his throat first, he called,
"John-ny," but his voice cracked. Reaching out to
the lilac bush, he broke a small branch. He smelled
its fragance, noting that it would bloom tomorrow.
Taking a deep breath, he tried again. "John-ny." His
voice was stronger, but not strong enough to carry.
The dog padded up beside him. One hand went to
scratch the dog behind the ears; the tail moved
rapidly. Then straightening up, Emmett threw the
lilac branch aside, and called once more, "John-n-ny!"
His cry pierced the shimmering stillness. Down the
road, a faint call came echoing back.

I

12

/f«^4 REVIEW

BRENDAN BEHAN, as
some may recall, was an
Irish author, playwright,
and humorist who died a few
years ago. He drank himself to
death at a very early age. While
he lived, Behan was a colorful fig-
ure who was known for his coarse-
ness, profanity, and love of liquor
as much as for his writings.

Brendan Behan was born in a
Dublin slum and grew up in the
turmoil of the Irish revolution. He
joined the Irish Republican Army
and was sent, at the age of 16, to
England, to blow up a battleship.
In that year, 1939, battleships were
sorely needed by the British. The
young terrorist was caught, im-
prisoned, and later sent to a re-
form school for teenage offenders.
It is about this period in his life
that Behan wrote in his autobio-
graphical BORSTAL BOY, first
published in 1958 and now reis-
sued in paperback.

BORSTAL BOY (a borstal is a
British reform school) captures all
of the boredom, squalor, and deg-
radation of prison life, yet it is a
surprisingly funny and entertain-
ing book. Behan has a fine Irish
wit and a great skill with words.
He laughs at himself and thumbs
his nose at the British Empire. He
waves the Irish flag, yet displays a
real insight and tenderness towards
his English prisonmates.

Behan being Behan, however,
BORSTAL BOY is not for the
prudish. He writes in the idiom of
English prison and Irish slum and
he did so so authentically that the
book was banned in his native
Ireland. The four letter words, al-
though distracting, do not detract
from the book, but add to realistic
tableau of life in prison.

As prison literature, BORSTAL
BOY is excellent, but its worth
goes beyond mere shock value.
The reader learns a great deal
about Ireland, the Irish, and Bren-

/5^ Ann /],cuid4.le{f,

dan Behan, in particular. Perhaps
it was his years in tlie borstal that
caused him to reject, in his later
life, any real discipline as a writer
or as a person. Reading his de-
lightful, if rather lengthy and de-
tailed autobiography convinces the
reader that Behan was one of the
great might-have-beens of Irish
literature.

Irving Stone, author of LOVE
IS ETERNAL (about Abraham
and Mary Lincoln) and THE
PRESIDENT'S LADY (Andrew
and Rachel Jackson), has written
another fine biographical novel
about a famous presidential couple.
This one is the moving love story
of John and Abigail Adams, set
against the panorama of the Amer-
ican Revolution.

Abigail Smith was a pretty,
saucy girl from Braintree, Mass.,
who, to the surprised disapproval
of her family, fell in love with,
and married, prickly, impoverished
young Lawyer Adams. Their long
life together had more than its
share of grief, war, and long sep^
aration, but theirs was an exciting
marriage in an exciting age. Abi-
gail saw the Boston Massacre
trials, the Batde of Bunker Hill,
and the inaugurations of George
Washington and her own husband
as first and second Presidents of
the new United States. She fol-
lowed John from Braintree to New
York, to the American embassies
in France and London, until she
finally hung out her wash in the
White House. She knew Jefferson,
Franklin, Washington, and all the
giants of that era.

Mrs. Adams left a large collec-
tion of letters to posterity and
author Stone has made liberal use
of them in piecing together the
lives of the Adamses, relying on
his imagination to fill in the de-
tails of their marriage that history

has failed to supply.

THOSE WHO LO\'E looks like
another best-seller for Irving Stone.

One of the less recognized re-
sults of war is its use in encourag-
ing literature. Countless thousands
of books, some good, many bad,
have come out of every war, and
the conflict in Viet Nam is just
now beginning to produce its
share. The latest of these is OUT-
POST OF FREEDOM, by Roger
Donlon and Warren Rogers. OUT-
POST is Capt. Donlon's story of
the guerilla war in Viet Nam, and
particularly of the terrible night
the Viet Cong tried to wipe out
the little jungle outpost he com-
manded. For his heroism in that
battle, Capt. Donlon won the fust
Congressional Medal of Honor
awarded since Korea.

Donlon is writing of his own
experiences, but his story is essen-
tially that of any professional sol-
dier combating the Viet Cong. In
the war he fights, there are no real
battles, only raids in the dark, am-
bushes, and booby-traps. The Viet-
namese soldiers are quite as likely
to fight each other as they are the
enemy. (On the night of the battle,
Capt. Donlon thinks at first that
all the noise is being made by
rival tribes within his own forces
shooting at each other again.)
Even die sweet-faced children
who beg for bubblegum in his
camp may be spies for the enemy.

It is a strange, frightening war,
from which it is hard to separate
good and bad, friend and foe.
Capt. Donlon and his men are
professional warriors, not politi-
cians. They had a job to do, to
hold their position, and they did it.
Their courage seemed, to me,
mindless and futile, but it was
courage and patriotism none the
less. Capt. Donlon and his team
are among the first authentic, old-
style heroes to come out of the
war-that-is-not-a-war in Viet Nam.

13

On Nature and JSl^

an

^ ^a\o/ ^f^Aa^el

. . . Nature's peace will i
into you as sunsl
flows into trees. The wi J
will blow their freshi \
into you and the storms t. \
energy, while cares will a
off like autumn leaves

JOHN MI '

Joseph W. Krutch is the author of a small book
of essays, The Twelve Seasons, in which he discusses
man's relation to the natural world. It is an excellent
book and is very beneficial in considering Nature's
meaning. Mr. Krutch has lived close to Nature's
world, learning to appreciate fully its significance. He
realizes that the natural world offers many rewarding
experiences to those who will look closely at what
is happening there. The natural world is not still,
but is full of life and of change.

In the natural world, "there is so much that is
not man." Gods creation includes a great deal more
than man himself. The Creator has provided a vast
world of plants and animals for our discovery. If we
would open wide our eyes, ears, and all our other
senses in disco\'ery of Nature, we would be amazed
at our findings. We would learn, but in addition,
fello\\'ship with Nature would lift our spirits to new
heights. E\'en a few moments spent each day with
the living, nonhuman world would be a worthwhile
experience.

Try to develop this sensitivity. Find a flower, any
flower, and examine it closely. Feel the softness
of its petals. See how perfectly it is designed. Notice
its beauty in color. Where do you see such loveliness
in man's great enterprises? Do you see it in the
towering, steel skyscrapers of the architect? Is such
beauty found in our hard, concrete buildings?
Definitely not! These cannot compare in beauty and
design with the simple flower.

On the other hand, consider the oak tree. Its
strength is in extreme contrast with the delicateness
of the flower. The oak stands strongly against all

14

weather because its fiber is tough. Year after year,
destructive forces try its strength but the oak's life
force endures. Our own bodies become ill so easily
that we must depend on pills to bolster our health.
The tough oak is able to live successfully in most
of the world's climates.

Even when we see in the trees the "stark
symmetry" of winter, we know that soon the life
force will emerge in new green leaves.

Through studying the author's work, one becomes
aware of man's efforts to "confine" Nature. Notice
how neatly trimmed we keep our yards; we are
careful to landscape with just the right amount of
foliage. The grass surrounding our trees is cut neatly
away; our hedges are trimmed periodically in order
to keep them at a certain, specific height. Why can't
the natural world be allowed to show its beauty in
its own way?

It is always disturbing to see heavy bulldozers
clearing the land free of every living thing. Why
should machines be allowed to strip the land of
all vegetation? Why does civilized man think that he
can improve upon Nature? He seems determined to
redo the world's landscape. Those persons who
have really considered Nature's significance realize
that the natural force is a powerful one, as great as
human life. It cannot be tamed by man, despite all
of his efforts. The life force has a will of its own.
We cannot understand this force fully, but we must
accept it. When we do, we will experience a joy
in knowing that we also belong to God's great
plan for life.

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H^^^^^^^B^^^AZX^W^^tt^u?!^^

X y

■^x

■'•■:::irt;'^:-^ ,.'

\\.^:-y.. '•

THE WIND blows across the fields of the
campus picking up sand as it speeds on its
course. The flying sand attacks the finish of
autos in the parking lot. It stings and burns the eyes
of students as they hurry from class to class.

The rain comes, and stays for days. It fills the
low spots of our campus grounds and parking lot
with the e.xcess of water. The Classroom building, or
more correctly the adjoining parking lots, are prob-
ably the most in need of adequate drainage. To cross
the water, students are forced to wade through or
build simple bridges out of boards and unused con-
struction materials.

Sometimes, in the warm months, the sun heats
tlie grounds near the classrooms, and makes the
white sand radiate heat like a stove. Reflections of
heat waves shimmer just off the ground and bathe
the campus in a smothering blanket.

This characteristic of the JCBC we students all
know well. But it won't always be this way. The
Dean of Administration, Dr. Harvey B. Oates, is the
man seeing to it that the campus will eventually be
properly landscaped. He is handling the financial
end of the project and coordinating the construction
of the new buildings and the landscaping of these
buildings.

However, Dr. Oates points out, it probably will
take several years before this extensive job is com-
plete. The change from barren fields to buildings
and trees will not be a radical one. Rather, it will
be a very gradual change. Every year there will be a
new building or two and a little more greenery
around the campus.

Mr. Albert Will will be personally in charge of
the selection and placement of shrubs, trees, and sod
on campus. As the head of the Horticulture Depart-

16

i;f''^'^>mf'f^^V?':^^^fms>T^\ -,,

^^■.w ^

ment, he is well acquainted with the problems and
expense involved in a venture of this size.

The Horticulture Department is growing the
plants which are going to be used to landscape the
campus grounds. Already, Horticulture students are
doing the work and growing plants for this project.

Mr. Will says that although construction will be
completed by 1970, the landscaping will be con-
tinuously expanding and changing.

The amount of land which can be landscaped on
campus right now is severely limited because of the
low spots on the grounds. These low spots must be
filled and brought up to the level of the present
buildings before they can bfi landscaped. Also,
buildings are going to be constructed on many of
the low spots.

City water is being used to irrigate the present
landscaped area, with the exception of the area

around the Administration building. This is very
expensive and will be eliminated when pipes are
installed and well water is pumped on campus for
irrigation purposes. Ho\\c\cr, water pipes cannot be
installed until these low spots arc filled. There is no
way to water the new landscaping \%ith the campus
U'ell water, at this time.

Mr. Will said that for those students who wonder
what is planned to eliminate the periodic flooding, a
system of drainage pipes will be laid underground
and will carr\' \\'ater from the center of the campus
to the perimeters, where ditches will be dug to hold
the excess water from the heaviest rainfalls. These
drainage ditches will be dug alongside of the roads
which surround the campus.

How can students help in landscaping the cam-
pus? Will had these suggestions: Civic groups are
being encouraged to install landscaping, therefore
any student or group of students could help by just
donating a few hours of their time. Labor is what is
needed right now. The plants are all ready and
waiting to be planted. Any interested group could
work in four shifts on a Saturday and install sod and
plants in locations which are ready for landscaping.

The east side of the Science building is suitable
for landscaping right now. The new Classroom build-
ing will be ready for beautification in late winter or
early spring. Will said, "Students can play a big part
... in landscaping their campus."

The model of the completed campus in the A
building is fairly accurate, but some changes have
been made in that original plan. Notable in these
changes is the fact that many of the lakes and much
of the area that was intended for beautification will
be transformed into badly needed parking lots.

Benches and shaded spots will be scattered
around the campus as in the manner of the benches
outside the A building. The A building is a fairly
good example of what the buildings around the
campus will look like when the construction and
landscaping are complete.

On the financial end of the landscaping project,
Dr. Gates says that taxpayers are willing to pay for
educational expenses, but they are reluctant to pay
for landscaping costs. At this time tlie funds for
landscaping are coming from the vending machines
located in the student center and from profits of the
book store. Over the next ten years. Dr. Oates
estimates the total bill for campus landscaping will
run to $500,000.

That's a lot for greenstuff in anyone's book.

17

The Army compound at
Thu Bai brandishes a maze
of barbed wire; thorned
protection against the Viet
Cong.

liv^i^r.

MSB

«M

What is Viet Nam?

... it is a struggle between right and
wrong with Httle discernible between the two.

... it is a nation that can open the
door to world peace or pull the trigger blast-
ing the world into oblivion.

... it is man killing man so that man
may live.

... it is understood and misunder-
stood.

... it is the beginning of life for
some and the end for others.

... it is the Red vs. the Red, White
and Blue.

... it is the new vs. the old and the
ancient vs. the young.

... it is more than a revolution and
less than a war.

... it is a mother praying and a
grown man crying.

... it is home for some and far away
from home for others.

For eleven months and 15 days it was home
for two Junior College of Broward County
students. They saw what Viet Nam is. The
struggle, the killing, the WAR! ! They saw

i?:';'»«»^5

IS

mm

ymi^

^m

Jii mm

t:-^ri*i'VX

rm^

M

THEFJ

18

'€

"f*-

'^1

1 %n?=vi

.:".•?' "'J :

E OF VIET NAM

BY JACK CRESSE

yt:i/A

i%

u

I1>».vt

19

VIET NAM HAS BECOME A PART OF OUR
LIVES THAT CAXXOT BE IGNORED. IT
HAS RETURNED AMERICANS TO THE
REALIZING ANGUISH OF MILITARY COM-
BAT. A MONSTROUS HELL THAT HAS
PLAGUED OUR NATION TIME AND TIME
AGAIN. BECALSE THIS CONFLICT IS SO
ENCOMPASSING IN SCOPE TO THOSE IN
THE FIELD AND THOSE AT HOME. WE.
THE STAFF OF SILVER SANDS. PRESENT
THIS ARTICLE IN THE INTEREST OF THE
COLLEGE. THE STUDENTS. AND ALL
WHO READ IT.

WHAT APPEARS ON THE FOLLOWING
PAGES IS THE VERY REAL. VERY
FRIGHTENING. AND VERY UNFORGETTA-
BLE STORY OF TWO MEN WHO LIVED
THIS WAR. THE PHOTOGRAPHS YOU
WILL SEE WKHE ALL TAKEN IN VIET
NAM AND ARP: REPRODUCED HERE
THROUGH THE COURTESY OF WILLIAM
BECKETT AND GREGG TURNBULL.

WHATEVER YOU MAY CALL IT. THIS IS
WAR. LET i:S HOPE THAT IT WILL SOON
SUBSIDE INTO LASTING PEACE.

JEL

A PROTEST marcher burns his draft card, a
draft-dodger fights his way through Botany,
a president rests in Texas with the burden
of world peace on his shoulders, a parent prays, and
a Special Forces officer peers through the dark,
waiting.

All have been affected by Communism. In some
ways their actions result from the war in Viet Nam.
It is easy to see why.

The protest marcher would have us ignore the
Communist threat and forget the war. A draft-dodger
is afraid of the war. President Johnson fully realizes
the Communist threat and leads the major persistent
opposition to it. A parent prays that the war will
not take his son's life. The prayers are for a man
stationed in a small hamlet located somewhere in a
country that has suffered under Communism for the
last 20 years.

In their own way each of these individuals is
scared. Each represents a small segment of the free
world's protector — the United States.

There is a story of a small boy who refused to
wear shoes because the "clodhoppers" cramped his
feet. A look at a severe case of trench foot cured the
boy's phobia and he was never seen again without
heavy boots. In a way it tells the whole story of the
American outlook toward the conflict in southeast
Asia.

The exact nature of the war is misunderstood by
the vast majority of the "Great Society." Because of

this widespread ignorance there is a slight but loud
opposition to U.S. policy. The basis for these protests
also has a less subtle but more encompassing effect
— apathy. More than a protest nation, the United
States has become an apathetic one. If the nature of
the United States' policy was known to all, many say
protest marches would be confined to civil rights
and apathy would be replaced by understanding.
Like the story of the small boy, the knowledge of
the war in Viet Nam can place the shoes of under-
standing on the barefeet of misconception.

The best insight into the war can be found in
someone who has been there.

William Beckett and Gregg Turnbull are now
students at the college. Both were soldiers in Viet
Nam. They volunteered and served the standard
term of 11 months and 15 days. Bill was stationed in
Hue, a small village 60 miles from the 17th parallel,
the dividing line between north and south. Gregg
worked in personnel at Saigon, tlie capital of South
Viet Nam.

Both had comments on a number of subjects re-
lating directly to the war effort and the reaction of
the people there. They talked about the war, its
effects directly and indirectly on the U.S., and any
other questions that popped up in the discussion.
But, more important than the mere answers is the
fact that what they have to say is based on fact.
They were there.

The conflict's beginning was typical as was the
ensuing Communist infiltration of the country. The
Indochinese war (1945-54) between France and Viet
Nam (then Indochina) over colonial claims, left the
nation divided along the 17th parallel; Communists
in the north and non-Communists in the south. Viet
Nam became the ripe apple for the worm of Com-
munism. It burrowed deep into every village and
hamlet, spreading propaganda and supporting rebel-
lious segments of the population.

Ngo Dinh Diem became ruler of South Viet Nam
and declared it an independent republic, centered
around a strong central government. The north
which had been Communist since the early days of
the Indochinese War, became the focal point for
a Communist-inspired movement to control the entire
country. The effects of this movement were notice-
able but as yet had not met any dynamic propor-
tions. However, the withdrawal of the final French
troops in 1956 opened the door still further to the
Communists.

An unsuccessful attempt at Diem's life was fol-
lowed two years later by a just as ill-fated try at a
military coup. Diem soon realized that the Cold War
was getting hotter and called to the U.S. for help.

20

Uncle Sam obliged, taking the heat off with a cool
15 million dollar loan, which Diem used to supplant
his meager troops with well-trained and better-
equipped personnel.

Ironically, President Eisenhower, now a politician,
forgot his military background and was reluctant to
pour persormel into Viet Nam. Although Ike did send
some "advisors," the real move to supply manpower
came with a non-military president, John F. Kennedy,
in 1961, after several more attempts had been made
on Diem's life.

Attempts on the lives of the average Viet Nam
citizen were becoming more successful by the day.
As the deaths began to increase, so did U.S. aid, now
in the form of both men and money. Diem still
wasn't resting easier, and time would tell a very good
reason for his sleepless nights.

On November 1, 1963 Diem's regime was over-
thrown by a military coup led by General Duong
Van Minh. Diem was killed, during Madam Nhu's
hair-raising tour through the U.S. A touchy situation
developed since it was not known if the new govern-
ment would be pro or anti U.S.

BiU relates the story in Hue which is representa-
tive of the general feeling everywhere. He said,
"Neither the South Vietnamese nor the U.S. knew
what was going to happen. At any moment the U.S.
and the Minh troops' ties could have been broken,
and we would have been at each other's throats.

"We were on 'Red' alert (Prepare for immediate
action) in Hue. They (Nimh's army) had their heavy
cannons lowered right at us from their position across
a barbed wire fence. We played the waiting game
and wondered what would happen next."

Eventually, a pro U.S. military junta was estab-
lished, probably because Nimh saw the value of U.S.
aid. Chances are he would have received it any way.

The Viet Cong had taken a staggering toll of
lives and property in the Mekong Delta. However
the real U.S. resistance was ignited by the Tonkin
Incident in 1964. Tlie U.S. soldiers stopped being
advisors because of the harassment of Navy shipping
in the Gulf of Tonkin. Americans retaliated by bomb-
ing North Viet Nam strongholds. It must be men-
tioned that the fuse was touched off by many other
incidents as well.

The heat was on even in Saigon where Viet Cong
terrorists are still a menace to the poulace and
soldiers alike.

Today, terrorists are everywhere and they are
continually bombing stores, bars and homes. The
main targets are the always busy bus stops. They
leave bombs in the form of a harmless package that
will explode on contact. A bicycle may be a time

bomb; even cars are used effectively. A lone shoe-
shine box may be armed to the teeth with TNT.
Soldiers and towns people are warned to touch
nothing— especially if it looks harmless. They are
told to trust no one, because bombing isn't the only
thing employed by the all too tricky Viet Cong
infiltrators.

The city is full of street vendors who would like
nothing more than to take American money in trade
for poisoned fruit or a bomb cleverly disguised as
a balloon or a trinket.

Most of the traveling in Viet Nam is done in
"Circlos," three-wheeled bicycle-line carts but some
interesting times are had with many taxi drivers in
Saigon.

"First you must tell the driver where you want
to go and then barter for the fare. They have no
meters. If that isn't enough, you must then give the
driver constant directions," Gregg explains. "It's easy
to get lost and when you do, watch out!"

Why? Gregg tells of an incident.

"A buddy and I were out late one night and got
into one of these taxis. We just wanted to get back
to base but pretty soon we realized that the driver
had taken a wrong turn and we didn't know wliere
we were. Paul, who was in the front seat, told the
driver to stop, but the car kept right on going. Paul
had to stop the driver by showing him the working
end of a switch blade — neck high."

"I was scared of those monkeys ever since,"
Gregg remembers, "I didnt know if the guy was
setting us up for an ambush or just didn't under-
stand us."

But you don't take chances in a war like this.

Young girls are favorite spies used by the Viet
Cong. Several of these women have been arrested
for extracting information from GI's. Bill tells of
one such lady who was thought to be tlie nicest
thing that ever came along. The Vietnamese arrested
her and her brother and both were shot for treason.

Now all Vietnamese must carry an ID card, and
if an American soldier is caught with someone with-
out a card, he has "hell to pay."

The Vietnamese police, affectionately called
"white mice" by the Americans, because of their uni-
forms, do some to control the terrorists but citizens
feel they could do more.

Most of the time you get a "Yinloi" which trans-
lated means "Sorry about that." "You hear it from the
day you get there to the day you leave," Gregg said.

It's that kind of war.

By the end of 1965 the U.S. had extended its
total output in Viet Nam to 200,000 men and is still

21

Sunset over Vhu Bai bathes sky and mountains with a reddened glow.

pouring them in. By the end of this month, the total
may reach 250,000.

With the rising tide of U.S. intervention, the
Vietnamese war has become the center of contro-
versy, so intense that it completely dominates the
everyday conservation of Americans. The conflict
is subject to the hottest anti-U.S. policy demonstra-
tions in the country's 190-year history. Even though
these demonstrations are the work of minority groups,
their actions ring loudly in other countries and es-
pecially in the ears of the American soldier in
Viet Nam.

"More than anything else, these demonstrations
affect the morale of our fighting men," Bill explains.
"It isn't easy to come back after weeks of the most
miserable fighting you can imagine, and pick up a
newspaper full of headlines about some draft card
burning. If they understood what was going on, these
kids would think twice before doing anything like
that," he continued. "It's like a small child first learn-
ing to express himself; it's the only way he knows
how."

Bill believes in the right to demonstrate as a
fundamental gift of our constitution, and further
quotes Hubert Humphrey as saying, "The right to
demonstrate does not necessarily mean the right to
be taken seriously."

Many feel that the fighting in Viet Nam actually

defends the right to demonstrate. But, "You don't
think about things like that when your getting shot
at," Bill says.

Gregg is less subtle in his remarks concerning the
demonstrators. He says they should be given two
choices. One would be revoking their citizenship,
giving them free passage to any Communist nation
of their choice, or they should be inducted into mil-
itary service.

Even though the first idea is infeasible, it is the
general conscensus among military personnel that
the second might not be a bad idea.

Both point out other harmful effects of these
demonstrations.

It makes great propaganda. Something to the
effect that, "See how much the American's care
about the war . . .," or "If the American people
are so much against war, why do the imperialists
leaders insist on killing innocent people."

The propaganda is very effective on the unedu-
cated villagers, who are under continuous pressure
from the VC. A favorite trick is to parade a war
prisoner through a village. The conversation might
go like this. Remember the \'illagers have already
been indoctrinated with anti U.S. propaganda. The
trained VC says, "See this man, the one who just
last week pillaged your village, poisoned your rice
paddies, killed your children, raped your women, and

22

JffK

■ '**»^^t#y»»a»«»t<-*'"^"'"J »v^'*Vg».»*^^tggEt<

Buddhist sell cremations have become a sickening part of the Viet Nam war. The monk
pictured above meditated for 48 hours, wrote his will, and then . . .

destroyed your homes. He is a Pig." Another VC
moves swiftly and with one stab of his machete,
kills the "dirty dog." Effective? You bet.

If it is not difficult to understand why the VC
propaganda is so effective, consider the examples
that Bill gave.

Ever since the French left in 1954, the Viet-
namese have hated any Caucasians. The French
left Viet Nam a ravaged collection of broken down
villages and so embittered the natives that they
carry their hatred over to the Americans.

If you were approached by an Asian who offered
you a better life under Communism you would think
he was a nut. So is it too with the Asians, when an
American approaches him and offers a better life
under democracy. It works in the opposite way also.
An Asian will believe an Asian, and an American will
believe an American.

It's that kind of war.

It is easy to see what a difficult task the Ameri-
cans face in winning friends. Practically everything
is going against him, the terrain, the weather, time,
the enemy and the nature of his supposed allies.

Time is on the enemy's side. The VC have every-
thing to gain and his nature tells him they have all
the time in the world. The Asians believe basically,
"Just let things ride and everything will take care
of themselves." They can afford to wait until the

U.S. -Vietnamese make a move, then make their
move. Their chief weapon is surprise, first hitting the
enemy here and then there. It is difficult to fight an
enemy as unpredictable as the Viet Cong.

The weather in South Viet Nam is among the
most sporadic in the world. The North has two sea-
sons, the hot-dry and the cold-wet. In the south;
three seasons, the hot, the dry-hot, and the cold,
are found.

When the monsoons start, it is unbearable and
the combination of low temperature and constant
rain makes life unbearable for anyone.

"Once I didn't see the sun for seven weeks, " Rill
relates.

It's almost as bad in the hot-dry season; all you
see is the sun and the days are hot as hell — literally.

What is the enemy like?

Malcom W. Browne, who won a Pulitzer Prize
for his reporting in Viet Nam, offers the best insight
into the enemy. The most outstanding mark of the
North Viet Cong is his use of propaganda, which has
already been mentioned, but the fighting soldier sees
an entirely different enemy.

Although the picture has changed in recent
months, the Viet Cong still display the outstanding
quahties that, up until late last year, accounted foi
their being "ahead in the war. " They are tough, and
as Bill says, "They're no amateurs."

23

. . . alter being soaked with gasoline, he cremated himself. His charred heart, now enshrined,
is worshipped by Buddhist followers.

They are tremendous jungle fighters, being accus-
tomed to the terrain, and they can subsist for weeks
on a diet of rice and "nuec mam," a sauce made from
decayed fish. "They let the fish dry in the sun for
days until it turns a sickly black color. It is eaten
with rice and really isn't too bad if you can stand the
smell," Gregg explains.

A favorite tactic of the Viet Cong is to recruit
young, indoctrinated men from the villages. This is
how it works:

After visiting a previously unharmed village, the
VC, who have been trained by Agitprop (the com-
munist propaganda organization), play on the ignor-
ance of the villagers, and soon win them over. The
young men are trained in guerrilla tactics, and after
the VC see fit, they are allowed to actually partici-
pate in a raid on a "barbarian" camp. They strike
usually after dark or before dawn, catching the
soldiers by surprise. There was a time when these
raids were very damaging, but they are now few and
far between, and less effective.

Not only is the enemy well-trained, he is excel-
lently equipped and now has anti-air missiles, sup-
posedly supplied from a communist neighbor. The
jungle is the battlefield and the VC will stoop to
anything to win, including ambushes, booby traps,
and bizarre maneuvers. They seem to be everywhere,
which accounts for the war being spread over such a

wide area, with no specific battle lines — only scat-
tered perimeters. Early last summer, the VC con-
trolled most of the country and, spread throughout
their holdings, were small areas under southern rule.
Holdings are continually changing. One day a hamlet
may be northern controlled and the next day under
southern occupation.

It's that kind of war and the accounts of activities
are unlimited.

Gregg tells of the death of a friend. His name
shall be Carl. "Carl was a medic in the fourth corps,
stationed in Can Tho, just southwest of Saigon. An
emergency call came in for troops to repulse an
attack on a hamlet not too far away. Carl volunteered
to go since the injured would run high. About half
way there, the group was ambushed, and as he dived
for cover, Carl received a machine gun blast across
his chest. He didn't know what hit him, and he
wasn't the only one to die that day."

The silent tactics used by the VC in the field are
brutal and account for many lives. Most of them by
ingenious traps.

The paths running through the jungle are barely
wide enough for a single file line, and are the scene
of the most barbaric of these traps. A huge ball of
any material, holding numerous blades protruding
at all angles, is fastened by a rope to a tall tree
bordering a path. It is lifted to another tree several

24

yards from where it is tied. A second rope holds the
ball in the tree — waiting for a line of men to come
along. The rope is cut and the ball swoops downward
in a pendulum-like arch. By the time it reaches the
startled men, it is just inches above the ground and
is traveling fast enough to knock over a box car.
What it does to the six or seven men is best left
unsaid.

Land mines that jump above the ground several
feet before exploding are used. Holes are dug and
poisoned nails, bamboo spikes, or glass are imbedded
in the traps, which are covered with branches and
grass. Steel bear traps are planted where a GI is
most likely to step. Poisoned darts are used, and just
recently some of nature's own creations are being
turned into instruments of death. Banana snakes are
tied with strings to the inside roof of some vacated
hut — head or shoulder high. The poison from these
snakes can kill within two minutes.

The terrorism and the killing will continue, ex-
perts tell us, for a long time.

Many ask why we are there? And why did we go
in the first place? The questions are legitimate and
so are the answers.

If the U.S. pulled out, Viet Nam would be under
communist rule within a month. The communist
takeover would be tolerated by the average \'ietna-
mese citizen, but the far reaching effects of com-
munist rule cannot be overlooked.

For one, a pro-communist takeover would com-
plete the communist circle around Thailand, one of
the wealthiest countries in southeast Asia.

The communists must be prevented from secur-
ing its anchor in the Straits of Malacca. The straits
are the life blood of trade with the Southwest Pacific.
Ships, now passing through the straits at a rate of
over 200 a day, bound to and from ports in Japan,
India, Indonesia, Australia, and the Philippines, carry
about 98% of the Oriental trade. The riches of
Burma, Laos, and Cambodia, already nearing com-
munist control, would be threatened. Viet Nam is the
hinge with which the open door of trade with these
nations rests on.

Japan, now one of the most industrial nations of
the world, would collapse within a month if the
Straits were closed. To survive would mean an al-
liance with Red China. For the safety of the- Free
World and because of prior attachments with these
nations, the United States is honor-bound to protect
the world from the communist threat.

The protection principle is a fine reason for
Americans being there, but some still ask why a
nation as powerful as ours, has failed to end the
war already.

If we followed the same procedure used in the
Philippines following the Spanish-American War, we
would first suppress the rebellious segments by
establishing a military government. Gradually con-
trol would be given back to the natives, but as more
and more of this control is relinquished, more and
more communist segments would pop up and the
war would start all over again.

The danger of such an all-out offensive is in
possible Red Chinese intervention. If the Reds
entered the conflict, the result would be all-out war
between the U.S. and Red China.

The allied armies total 2.7 million men, 500 ships
and 4,000 jet aircraft. These figures would seemingly
outnumber the Red Chinese forces of 2.5 million
men, 50 ships and 2,000 jets, but when one considers
the population figures, which supply men as they
are needed, it makes you wonder. The allied popu-
lation numbers 325 million. In China alone there are
700 million people. Still some feel that the Ameri-
cans could win. The Russian worry is shrugged off
with the belief that the Soviets would actually be
on our side.

Nonetheless a victory in a war with Red China
would make peace in the Pacific a reality, not an
unstable promise.

Another challenge comes from the United States
itself. The war now is not a popular one. The U.S.
can supply the needed men and weapons, but as yet
it lacks the ultimate support of the American people.
The end will depend upon the willingness of the
Americans to cooperate with the Asians.

If we wait, there is the chance that Red China
might develop an ICBM and declare open war on the
U.S. which could lead to annihilation of both sides. If
they were stopped before this could happen, all the
better for the U.S. and world peace. But you don't
just go around declaring war on countries just be-
cause there is the chance they might eventually start
something. The U.S. has learned this. It's too bad
other nations have not.

We can play a preventive war and hold our
ground, but chances are this would lead to another
Korea or Berlin. The only alternative left is to force
the North Vietnamese to the bargaining table.

They offered to sit down and talk things over
once before, but the U.S. refused because it was felt
we had not militarily established ourselves enough to
make any firm demands.

The question of how and when the Viet Cong will
see the futility of war is unanswerable. Much de-
pends on mankind, not his ingenious ability to make
war, but his inherent desire to make peace.

25

SIX out of ten students who
enter college today drop
out before graduation,
and this includes your classmates
at JCBC. George McCall, coordi-
nator of placement, says the drop-
out rate here has been as high
as 66%.

A Life magazine survey pre-
dicted accurately that of 1.1 mil-
lion students who entered college
in 1963, over 600,000 would drop
out before they finished.

Students drop out of college at
about the same rate and for the
same reasons as they did 40 years
ago. But in 1925 society was in-
clined to accept dropping out as a
frequent necessity. Today the act
is regarded as a social catastrophe.
This stigma has resulted from the
increasing pressure by parents and
business and social groups who
place such a heavy emphasis on
the possession of a college degree.

Students drop out of college for
a variety of reasons. In a joint
interview with Dr. Jack Taylor,
Dean of Students, and Dr. Walter
Jarecke, Director of Guidance, and
Director of Institutional Research,
it was pointed out that the most
predominant reason that students
drop out is because they are not
achieving the level that they ex-
pected to. Sometimes this is due
to a lack of preparation. Dr. Ja-
recke said they're not sure of what
they want, and in some cases this
means there is a lack of moti-
vation.

Mr. McCall stated that students
mainly drop out due to a lack of
interest. He feels that interest is
needed for motivation, and the
motivated person is interested.
Students with a goal in mind are
not plagued by the doubts that
infect the student who doesn't
know where he is going.

Lack of motivation itself can be
so disturbing that a student will
withdraw from college in an at-
tempt to find what he wants. The
student becomes entangled in a

net of rationalization and doubt
when attempting to satisfy himself
that leaving is the right thing to
do. Often a student will alienate
himself from his school, its instruc-
tors and policies by reasoning
with half truths. For example, he
might say, "Exams and courses
seem arbitrary, and obviously are
compromises. Teachers themselves
apologize for the fact diat they
must omit material because of
time limitations. Often they never
agree among themselves on what
should be included. One teacher's
reading list for one English course
differs widely from another's list
for the same course."

This complex web of reasoning,
the doubts, and the anguish a stu-
dent suffers are common exper-
iences to thousands of college
students each year.

Sometimes a student has a le-
gitimate reason to criticize a col-
lege. In a "School & Society" mag-
azine editorial, William W. Brick-
man explains that situations exist
in some colleges which permit
dropouts. Instead of dropouts, they
might be termed "Run-outs." Be-
cause of poor teaching, students
are swamped and lost. This can
kill their interest and motivation.
Mr. Brickman suggests, "It is an
obligation upon higher education
to organize its house in such a
way as to make each student want
to succeed in his studies."

Emotional problems can cause a
student to drop out. An unsuccess-
ful romance can disturb a student
to the point that he loses his
motivation and his interest. Then,
because he doesn't study, his
grades drop below the passing
level and he has to leave the col-
lege. His record says that he was
an academic failure. In reality he
was simply a heartbroken student.

Other reasons for the high num-
ber of dropouts include illness,
jobs or the armed forces. Some-
times the financial responsibility
that is forced upon certain stu-

dents is too great and they must
withdraw. A student should not
leave until he has exhausted all
possibilities that might allow him
to stay in college. For example, a
student with too much financial
responsibility should apply for
scholarships or college loans. Many
students who leave for these rea-
sons definitely plan to return later;
one JCBC student felt it neces-
sary to drop out and get a job in
order to help his widowed mother.
However, he plans to return to
school as soon as possible.

Some students are not psycho-
logically ready for college. For
these few students psychiatric
help is needed. However, when a
psychiatrist is needed, he might
not be used because a student
feels that it would place a blot on
his record. Dr. Jarecke mirrored
modern thinking when he said that
he doesn't think it hurts their rec-
ord any more than when they go
to the doctor for a cold.

A coUege dropout is not neces-
sarily a failure. Bobby Darin,
Sandy Koufax, and Woody Allen
are all college dropouts. They are
successful, but they had an im-
portant aid when they dropped
out — talent.

Dr. Taylor explained that
roughly 35 to 40 per cent of our
population will be absorbed in
professional jobs which demand a
college education. The rest of the
jobs in our society must be filled
by workers who couldn't get a
higher education. Mary Sheahan,
the personnel manager for Sun-
beam Electronics in Fort Lauder-
dale, says that many positions in
accounting, management, etc. are
open for young men. She said that
a college degree is not required,
but that it would help a young
man entering the business.

Someone must be the grocery
store manager or the sales clerk in
a department store. However, if a
student has the ability to get a
college education and doesn't, he

26

is cheating himself. He is hmiting
his abiHties and the things he
can do.

Mr. McCall said that statistics
show the largest number of drop-
outs will always come at the end

THE COLLEGE

of the second semester. April is
rapidly approaching . . . This type
of educational fall-out is nearly as
tragic as the radio-active type, be-
cause the student who does drop
out will have to live with the con-
sequences the rest of his life.

DROPOUT

by Paul King

27

^EUI

BY ANN BARDSLEY

-■#5'-"... :■;;}[ it! tw

YOUV'E got the travel bug.
Admit it. You duck into
travel agencies and browse
through their shiny folders from
faraway places. You hoard picture
post cards, foreign stamps, and old
copies of NATIONAL GEO-
GRAPHIC. You drool through
your World Geography course,
and shiver when you see a jet
liner take off, or a steamer going
out to sea.

Stop drooling, and throw those
NATIONAL GEOGRAPHICS
away. That trip to Europe that
you've always wanted is not as
impossible as you think. Thousands
of American students cross the At-
lantic every summer. Some are
financed by rich parents or are Ivy
League socialites spending their
junior year abroad, but many are
ordinary young college men and
women to whom the trip repre-
sents many months of saving and
careful planning. They have done
it, and you can do it too.

If you have at least a thousand
dollars to invest in your trip to
Europe, your best bet is one of the
many agencies which organize and
lead groups of students abroad
during the summer months. These
tours handle all your transporta-
tion and hotel arrangements, your

meals, and your schedule. They
range from the very luxurious,
where you travel first class, and
visit the best hotels and restau-
rants in Europe, to less expensive
tours by bus, station wagon, or
bicycle.

Slightly lower down the price
scale (not very far) is the Experi-
ment in International Living. This
program, which costs about $900,
will arrange for you to live with a
family in another country. You will
go to your host country with a
group of nine other students and
an instructor. Besides living with
the family, you and your group
will travel in the host country and
in nearby countries. In special
circumstances you may be able to
join the E.xperiment tour for a
lower price. Mr. Harry Schaleman
is the Experiment agent on this
campus.

If you're looking for something
in a more realistic price line, don't
give up. The opportunities are
numerous.

One of the best tour programs
is offered by the United States
National Student Association. The
USNSA organizes student tours,
study programs, and special in-
terest trips in many parts of the
world. The study programs focus

on politics and economics, lan-
guages, and art, and the special
interest groups include bicycling
and hosteling, work camps, and
music and art festivals. The pro-
grams usually last about two
months and are open to American
college and university students,
and to students entering college in
the fall. The cost for the USNSA
programs, including transportation,
begins at $750, but may go as
high as $1,600.

For Catholic students, the Na-
tional Federation of Catholic Col-
lege Students, and the National
Newman Club Foundation offer
five "Meet Europe" summer tours.
The trips last from 22 to 49 days,
and cost from $340 to $759. The
considerable cost of transatlantic
transportation, however, it not in-
cluded in the tour price.

If you are the venturesome type
^vho wants to plan your own trip,
know what you are doing. It will
be much cheaper and an exciting
experience, but requires careful
planning and budgeting.

The largest single expense of
the trip is your round-trip trans-
portation. It will probably cost
more than all the other tour ex-
penses put together.

28

PE ON A SI

Ordinarily, plane and ship pas-
sage to Europe costs about $400
round trip. There are, however,
several less expensive methods of
transatlantic transportation for the
independent traveler.

If you can join a bona-fide
group of t\venty-five or more like-
minded travelers (or form your
own group and give it a name)
your New York to London fare
will be only $325 per person. If
traveling alone, you may be able,
as many students do, to take ad-
vantage of the low transatlantic
prices offered by Icelandic Air-
ways. Some Icelandic fares are as
low as $270 to $350 round trip.
However, their prop-flights take
ISVz hours, and Icelandic is not a
member of the International Air
Transport Association.

If you are planning to travel by
ship, tlie Council on Student
Travel, a federation of more than
140 educational institutions, re-
ligious agencies, and national or-
ganizations provides special stu-
dent transportation to Europe each
summer. The Council arranges
special chartered all-student sail-
ings for the 9 day voyage. Social
and intellectual life are plentiful
aboard the one class ships. An
orientation program helps the trav-
elers to prepare for their visit to a
foreign country, and there are
forums and discussions on inter-
national issues, lectures on art and
architecture, language practice,
films, a ship's newspaper, religious
services, dances, and impromptu
hootenannies and concerts put on
by the students.

Prices are $160 to $180 one way,
from New York.

The cheapest way to cross the
Atlantic is by charter flight. All

universities are eligible to sponsor
a charter, but the group should be
large enough to fill an airplane.
Fares from New York to London
are bet\veen $225 and $300 round
trip. To form a charter group,
check with an airline representa-
tive for complete details and fares.'

When you arrive in Europe, you
will find living expenses compara-
tively cheap. In fact, it is possible
for a thrift minded, light traveling
student to live on almost nothing
— if he plans carefully.

Inexpensive travel inside Eu-
rope may be done by bus, train,
motorcycle, or bicycle. Many trains
and bus companies offer special
"thrift coupons" and "guest tickets."
These low cost tickets allow the
bearer special privileges such as
1.000 miles or seven days of un-
limited travel. Motorcycles are fast
and use little gas, but they must
be rented or purchased in Europe,
and gasoline is very expensive
there. Bicycles, though slow and
rather tiring, are a cheap way to
really get to know the country you
are visiting. For long distances
cyclists can take the train, and
bring their bicycles with them for
a very small extra charge (about
75 cents in Britain for a 60 mile
trip). Ferries and airplanes connect
Ireland with Britain and Britain
with France. Though slow and
sometimes crowded, the channel
ferries are an inexpensive con-
nection betsveen the British Isles
and the continent.

The cheapest housing for the
student traveler are the youth hos-
tels which dot Europe. At a hostel
the student hiker or cyclist can
find pleasant if not luxurious
dormitory accommodations. Many
of the hostels serve simple, inex-

pensive meals and most provide
cooking facilities for those who
wish to do their own cooking. In
the British Isles a night's lodging
in a hostel costs 2s 6d (about 50
cents). On the continent prices
may be slightly lower. Guests at
the hostels, which have facilities
for both men and women, are ex-
pected to help with the chores.
More expensive accommodations
include college dormitories, which
are open to traveling students in
the summer, YM and YWCA's,
and private homes. These last cost
from S1.50 to 82.50 a night.

Food in ta\'ems, pubs, small res-
taurants, and cafeterias is filling
and fairly cheap, and you can eat
your fill for about SI. In many
countries beer and wine are drunk
instead of \\'ater. (Be sure to visit
these!)

If you have the necessary shots,
passports, and \'isas, sufficient
funds, and a realistic, carefully
planned budget, plus a little pio-
neering spirit, a shoestring \'isit to
Europe can be a wonderful ad-
xentirre.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION

Council on Student Tra\'el

777 United Nations Plaza

New York 17, N.Y.

Icelandic Air Lines

610 B 5th Avenue, N.Y., N.Y.

The British Travel Association

680 5th Avenue, N.Y., N.Y.

American Youth Hostels, Inc.

14 W. Sth St., N.Y., N.Y.

U.S. National Student Assn.

265 Madison Ave., N.Y., N.Y.

National Federation of Catholic

College Students

1312 Massachusetts Ave.

Washington, D.C.
All fares in this article are approxi-
mate and subject to revision.

29

WHAT AM I?

By Leonard Bauer

' Illustrated by
Joanita Taormina

Who are you, sitting here Hstening to me?
I am unliken to no one, yet who can I be?
Who are the learned and who are the good?
I am a person Hke you, sometimes hard to be

understood.
Who are the wicked and who are the wise?
I am a mere man who one day lives and one day

dies.
What is life, involving us in time?
I am being in his likeness in body, soul, mind.
But will I ever really know what I am?
And will I ever really truly understand
Myself?

f ~''^

%

.ft

x-^

•-.Nv

~V .

K "A

"V

:rsa^?»-

.'.^

i

i'^~

Be Kind and Tolerant, O Youth

By Cassandra Kenfield
Illustrated by Sharon Frost

Be kind and tolerant of us, O Youth
Know in your hearts tomorrow
What we were knowing yesterday.

t' JTn your all-iinknowing superiority
pYou ran rough-shod over the
-■%Ove we ottered.
iii¥,ou disowned us when we were
'* troublesome

Th^n reclaimed us for our riches.

How often did we advise and
strengthen you
|s^,^ ^nd a hundred times did you

With cool disdam

Refuse us even comfort

Vfhen v?e needed it.

you
uth,

very bemg is golden light
too

with your dying eyes
back the tears

at heart and in need of love
•rself

d and lonely
pderness of Age.

^S^'- iSi^f^'^W^"

*«SiJS5ip5S5i?r;NV

31

Says,

EVJL

'BtARTJ

BAN

THE

STyOENT

fJE60m7E

Mil

IP

32

SiV^^ Saa/ds

JtctMOffenc/eJ B/ ^^ ^

itributing yearbooks is a boring
J, one that requires a good deal
time and patience. But for the
istically talented, the job be-
rries less of a problem when you
able to put your efforts to
odiing instead of watching the
)ck.

ver Sands Art Editor Lew Alquist
just that during those long,
lely hours of Silver Sands II dis-
bution. The very best of his
30rs appears here for your en-
('ment.

Cartoons by Lew Alquist

33

There has been an increasing
trend of thought during recent
years that without a college edu-
cation, a person might as well give
up any idea of attaining success,
fame, or fortune. The hue and cry
of college education for all has re-
sounded throughout our modern
world and has been repeated so
loudly and positively that to issue
challenge against such a decree is
considered unbelievable, sacrilig-
eous, and immoral. Everyone

should have a college education; a
burden of guilt and an aura of
shame exudes from the individual
who reluctantly admits to his lack
of membership in the alumni club
of the "I Graduated from College "
organization.

We realize, of course, there are
many dedicated people occupied
with medical, law, and teaching
professions. Well planned and exe-
cuted college educations have en-
abled these doctors, lawyers.

niu-ses and others to realize their
ambitions for themselves and their
fellow men. I would not want to
risk dropping off into an anesthe-
tized coma, fully aware that a
high school dropout was waiting
with scalpel in hand to relieve me
of my overly ripe appendi.\.

There are many people crowd-
ing our colleges at this time who
would gain from four solid years
of acquiring seniority in a labor
union or serving an extended ap-

34

^

mi COLLEGE !

By
Betty F. Niesen

Illustrated By

Nancy BoUen

prenticeship in a shoe store or
a women's lingerie department.
These are the individuals who, for
reasons, are being pushed into col-
leges in the futile hopes of being
molded into counterparts of
wealthy, successful, well poised
men and women of the world.
After four years of following a
prescribed course of sliding
through the easiest subjects with a
low "C" average, these sheepskin
shielded cogs venture into the out-

side world. A young man so equip-
ped can look any prospecti\e em-
ployer perpendicularly in his pro-
verbial eye in the most candid
manner and say, "Yes, sir, I am a
well educated personage of Promi-
nent College. I know I can be an
asset to your firm, sir, because I
Belong. I Know People Who
Count! They flunked the same
courses I did, but we did have a
jolly four years together getting
ready for our futures and all that."

And he will get the job for one of
two reasons: (1) tlie employer is in
awe of anyone flourishing a col-
lege diploma, or (2) his employer
is also an alumnus of Prominent
College.

Sometimes parents are too blame
for needlessly pushing their chil-
dren into colleges. Many parents
feel they have realized their own
ambitions and goals when their
children enroll in college. Through-
out this marvelous country of free-

35

dom and opportunity, there are
numerous young people entering
colleges and universities every
year without a clear understand-
ing of why they are taking biology
or calculus except that mama and
papa have always told them that
someday they would go to college.
No matter if Joe ne\'er learned to
read while he was in school fop
twelve years. The reality that he
graduated from high school com-
municates the fact to his parents
that Joe is ready for college. Going
along on the false assumption that
Joe has graduated from high
school because he has been taught
and that he has responded to this
educational process by learning,
his parents are proud to see him
begin to carry out the plans they
have arranged for him. They are
prepared all the way for his glor-
ious entrance into college, for his
straight "A" report cards, and for
his triumphal graduation at the
end of foiu- years of diligent study.
After this process of cultivation,
Joe will emerge from college mi-
raculously equipped to conquer
the business and professional
world with his brilliance and in-
telligence.

Parents not only are ramming
their youngsters into colleges be-
cause they think their children
want an education, but also they
want them to find good marital
prospects. A doting mother who
has had to rummage around the
house for money to pay the insur-
ance man or who has had to tell
the paper boy to come back some
other time when he comes to col-
lect his weekly pittance is de-
termined that her daughter is not
going to suffer these same hard-
ships. This mother has never had
the honest forthrightness of char-
acter to be able to say to her
daughter, "Go to college and get
yourself a rich husband." No, she
confuses the issue with irrelevant
and garbled statements about so-
cial status and a j)lace in life and

inane remarks about future gen-
erations of unborn children having
social status and places in life.
Never does she degrade her in-
tentions by referring to the ob-
scene expression — money. She does
not face reality by considering
that she is using her daughter's
self respect, individuality, and vir-
ginity as a ransom to an unknown,
stranger who conceivably might
be loaded with loot. Little does
the doting mother realize that her
little Sue could just as easily meet
and marry Joe Poor as well as
Ronnie Rich.

While some students are wan-
dering around in a fearful fog of
ignorance and reviving only long
enough to \\onder \\'hy they are in
college, others are burro\\'ing in
for a four years' hibernation period
from the demands of a hard and
practical world. This four year
period of required surface study,
scheduled time, and unrestricted
recreation passes pleasantly and
effortlessly. Intense thinking is
kept to such a minimal amount as
to be practically nonexistent; it is
not necessary to expend an excess
amount of energy in concentration
of subject matter. Instead, college
is a four year period of grace of-
fered in which the avoidance of
making major decisions is relig-
iously practiced. Some of the minor
decisions which demand very little
thought is whether to \\rite home
for more money or to call collect.
Another conclusion of logical
thought process might require de-
cisi\'e action when the hibernating
student is faced with the problem
of signing up for Stargazing
Course I or Elementary Bowling.
15ut a minimal amount of serious
thinking is expended regarding fu->
tiue employment, serious stud\', or
wondering if his own life is meant
for anything besides sleeping and
eating and potential conquests of
the opposite sex. When this type
of person has finished his educa-
tional hibernation from the world.

he is groggy from the self indul-
gent catering to his own whims J
and is suffering from mange and *
malnutrition caused from being
academically undernourished.

While there are many undeserv-
ing students cluttering our colleges
and universities, soaking up the
time and energies of capable
teachers, there are some deserving
students who are being neglected
and short changed as far as supe-
rior academic schooling is con-
cerned. These are individuals who
are honestly concerned about their
future lives and for the well being
of the world in \\'hich they are
active members. These students
take an eager interest in life and
have a dawning awareness that
there is more meaning to life than
mere existence. A class is an in-
strument which opens a door a
little wider so he is better able to
\isualize what he himself is cap-
able of accomplishing. A college
degree is to be accepted as an
honorary prize, not for the dubious
prestige symbol, but in realization
that a little has been learned. This
student is grateful for die priv-
ilege of being taught a little more
than he knew before enrolling in
college. His world will never be
quite as narrow and restricted as
it had been. For these students,
schooling has been an appetizer to
the main course of additional
learning, the prelude to the con-
cert of a more full life. For these
people, who are students in the
most definitive sense of the word,
true learning never comes to an
abrupt end with the issuance of a
diploma. Our college teachers will
keep working to inspire the small
percentage of students who really
want to learn in spite of all the
others who are enrolled in college
for any other reason than to learn.
The determined students will
acquire knowledge in spite of
obstacles even if they have to take
a longer route to their educational
destination.

36

SPORTS

Intramurals Intercollegiate

by John Wolfe

M

-]\ rp

i\' ^.

J

I

Don't be surprised if the next mural bowling competition and college. Maybe it'll even replace

couple years bring a bowling alley the scramble for the HPR bowl- tricycle racing.

to the JCBC campus. For if the ing classes is any indication, then Intramural competition saw no

enthusiasm generated over intra- bowling is the coming thing at the less than fourteen teams battling

37

it out for the championship tro-
phy. The "Out of Sights" won the
first-place trophy, thanks to the
consistent play of team members
Howard Finegold, Frank Catania,
Jim Shafer, and David Graham.
The "Out of Sights" rolled to a 16
and 4 record, edging out the "Ban-
dits," who came in second with a
15 and 5 slate.

In men's competition, the trophy
for the highest individual game
went to Mic Syurgot, who bowled
an excellent 242. Trophies for the
high individual three game set and
for the best individual average
went to David Skipp. David rolled
a three game total of 592 and
maintained a 187 season average.

Irene Meyerinch matched
Skipp's performance in girls' com-
petition, walking off with the girls'
version of the highest individual
three game set and highest aver-
age trophies. Irene bowled a three
game total of 491 and had a sea-
son average of 149. The highest
individual game trophy went to
Carol Norton for her 190 game.
I-M BOWLING STANDINGS

Won Lost

Out of Sights 16 4

Bandits 15 5

S. O. N. S 13 7

Half Fast 13 7

Zits 13 3

Raiders 12 8

Spartans 12 8

Losers 10 10

Broward Barons 10 10

Duds 8 12

Absentees 6 14

Pisco Sours 4 16

Wooly 3 13

Gutter Getters 1 19

* * ^

Next on the intramural scene
was tennis. December saw the
competition for the men and wo-
men's singles championship. A
mixed doubles tournament will be
held later in the year.

In a close match. Bill Lipske
defeated Bruce Kinder 6-3, 3-6,
6-2. Renee Bayuk won the wo-
men's championship by virtue of
a 6-4, 6-0 win over Martha Allen.

♦ :?: ^

In men's handball competition,
Bart Loftis edged out Robert Wil-
son for the championship trophy.

'i

A new sport on the intramural
calendar, fencing, enjoyed an im-
pressive inaugural season.

Since not very many JCBC stu-
dents are experienced swordsmen,
competition was limited this year
to members of the HPR fencing
classes. The championship bouts
were held in December and were
limited to foil competition. In
boys' competition, five points con-
stituted a bout. Four points con-
stituted a bout in girls' compe-
tition.

The first men's fencing cham-
pion of JCBC was James Stover.
He defeated Steve Hall 5 to 4 in
the final bout. The girls' champion
was Pam Alderman. Pam tri-
umphed with a 4 to 2 victory over
Michell Saul.

jj; H: ♦

WOMEN'S TENNIS
With prospects of being the
number one team in the state, the
JCBC women's tennis team em-
barks on their spring season. Al-
though only two girls return from
last year's squad, which recorded
a five and one slate, the squad
will be bolstered by a bevy of
talented freshmen.

Jane Hancock, number one
player last year, returns along
with Cristy Johnson. From Stran-
ahan, where she was undefeated in
match play, Jane was ranked No.
7 in Girls' 18 and under and won

the Gold Coast tournament as a
senior. Chris, from McArthur, lost
only one match last year as Brow-
ard's No. 2 player.

The freshmen are headed by
Stephanie DeFina. Stephanie, from
South Broward, is ranked No. 1 in
the Women's division for Florida
and No. 15 in the nation. She is
also ranked No. 5 in the nation in
doubles. While at South Broward,
she twice won the State high
school tennis tournament.

Other freshmen are: Chris Kou-
tras, Marilou Cmaylo, and Beth
Fuller. Chris hails from Miami
Norland and is ranked No. 2 in
Girls' 18 and under in the state.
Marilou attended Stranahan where
she won the Broward county tour-
nament. Beth is from McArthur
where she was undefeated in
match play. She is ranked No. 13
in Girls' 18 and under.

Their main competition will
come from Rollins, last year's
state champs, Tampa U., and the
University of Miami. Easily the
best junior college squad in the
state, the JCBC women's tennis
team has an excellent chance of
winning the team championship
as well as several individual hon-
ors at the State tournament.

SCHEDULE*
March 1 — Palm Beach JC (away)
March 4, 5, 6 — F.S.U. Invitational

(away)
March 10 — U. of Miami (away)
March 17 — Miami-Dade JC (home)
March 24 — Palm Beach JC (home)

38

April 1 — U. of Miami (home)
April 5 — Miami-Dade JC (away)
April 15 — State Tournament (away)
^Matches with Indian River and Edi-
son to be arranged.

^ ^ ^

MEN'S TENNIS

This spring, men's intercollegiate
tennis will come to the JCBC
campus. In the past, we have had
the women's team, but 1966 will
be the first year for the men.

The team will be handled by
Coach McGehee. He is a graduate
of Tennessee Tech, where he was
a member of the tennis team.

The team suffered a severe
blow when several of its leading
players were declared ineligible.
However, there is still a supply of
talent on hand. Harry Richardson,
a Fort Lauderdale High grad,
leads the cast. Other team mem-
bers include Dave Claxton (Ft.
Lauderdale), Fred Easman (South
Broward), George Herrera (St.
Thomas), Bob Klein (Ft. Lauder-
dale), Larry Spiller (Dillard).
and Jim Tucker (Ft. Lauderdale).

This being the first year. Coach

McGehee isn't sure what kind of

competition the Seahorses will be

facing. He described the team as

one with "average" ability, but

added that he thought the team

would win their share.

TENTATIVE SCHEDULE
March 4 — Palm Beach JC (home)
March 18 — Indian River JC (away)
March 22 — Miami-Dade JC (home)
March 25 — Edison JC (away)
April 8 — Miami-Dade JC (away)
April 9 — Edison JC (home)
April 22 — Indian River JC (home)
^ ^ ^

GOLF

Another new intercollegiate
sport on the JCBC campus is
men's golf. The team will be
coached by Mr. William Porter-
field. Before coming to JCBC,
Coach Porterfield was tennis coach
at Northeast High.

Although this is the first year,
prospects look extremely good.
Hal Hutchinson, from Pompano,
leads the hopefuls. Hal was All-
County and All-Conference in
1965, and finished second in the

Coral Gables Orange Bowl tourna-
ment. Mike Hines, a McArthur
graduate, is another fine prospect.
Mike finished second in the 1963
Broward Junior tournament. Other
players are: Bob Stacy (South
Broward), Ray Isbell (a transfer
from Texas), Jim Lyford (Strana-
han), John Schaeffer (St. Thomas),
Bob Golden (South Broward), and
Jerry Rasmussen (Stranahan).

Miami-Dade, state champs for
the past four years, should prove
to be the Seahorses' toughest com-
petition. Other than Miami-Dade,
Coach Porterfield isn't sure of
what the competition will be like,
but expects a winning team.

Only matches definitely sched-
uled at this time are two with
Miami-Dade, on Feb. 18th and
25th. Coach Porterfield hopes to
add another eight or nine matches.
The JCBC golfers will also com-
pete in the State tournament,
June 2-4, and the National Junior
College tournament in Miami,
June 6-10. * * *
BASEBALL
"I think we will, barring in-
juries, be a definite contender for
conference and state honors." So
are Coach Leroy Wheat's words
on the prospects for his first sea-
son as head baseball coach at
JCBC.

Coach Wheat has impressive
credentials. He has seen action
with the Cleveland Indians and
the Philadelphia and Kansas City
Athletics, as well as playing sev-
eral years in Triple A ball. He
was basketball coach at Fort Lau-
derdale High for five years and
baseball coach for one. That one
year he was head baseball coach,
the Flying L's enjoyed one of
their most successful seasons in a
long time.

He is particularly impressed
with the Seahorses' depth and de-
fensive ability. He added that the
hitting is also excellent and that
the whole team has displayed lots
of desire and hustle.

The Seahorses are loaded with
individual talent. At catcher, they
have Jim Gurzynski (Cardinal
Gibbons), and Gary Bryce. Bill
Adelmann, a sophomore from
Pompano, holds down first base.
Second base is manned by Rich
Orr. Rich, from Stranahan, was
All-County and All-Conference
last year. Fighting it out for short-
stop will be Bruce Kinder, an All-
County and All-Conference selec-
tion from Fort Lauderdale last
year, and Paul Buzzella, a sopho-
more from McArthur. John Dow,
a St. Thomas Aquinas graduate,
will handle third base.

The "Horses have their hitting
power in the outfield. Allan Mo-
rell, county batting champ last
year from St. Thomas, joins Bill
Fauerbach, the leading Seahorse
hitter last year, and Bob Martin,
an All-County and All-Conference
pick last year from Stranahan.
Backing them up will be John
Jolinski (Pompano), Jim Cottone
(Stranahan), and Duke Dufresne
(West Palm Beach).

The pitching staff is led by
Stan Cowherd, a sophomore from
Pompano, Craig Skok, an All-
County and All-Conference selec-
tion from Fort Lauderdale, and
Ron Huff, a Chaminade graduate.
Completing the pitching staff are
Don Newhouser (Monsignor
Pace), Danny Overstreet (from
Jacksonville), Bill Lawson (Sea-
crest), and Eddie Garner (Pom-
pano).

Coach Wheat rates Manatee
and Miami-Dade as their top com-
petition, and rightly so. Both
teams are among the leading jun-
ior college teams in the nation.

The finish of an old year and the be-
ginning of a new leaves one with time
to think of past happenings and fu-
ture hopes. The following thirteen
pages give remembrances of those
happenings that were once fun-filled
moments in our lives — from the first
play of the season to a spirited per-
formance of Sing Out 66 — moments
that can only be recalled in thought.
So while you are thinking, flip these
pages and the memories will come
back all the more vivid — memories
of Winter Frolic, 1965-1966.

FROLIC

December 1 - 5

THE HOUSE lights dim-
med, a hush came over
the audience, forty sec-
onds later a skinny, ragged Oki-
nawan came out on stage and
said, "Lovely ladies, kind gentle-
men. Please to introduce myself.
Sakini by name. Interpreter by
profession."

The scene was set for John
Patrick's "Teahouse of the August
Moon," the first production pre-
sented in the new college little
theatre. It was directed by Miss
Mildred Mullikin and Mr. George
Cavanaugh.

The scene of the comedy was

iMiliMiiiii

set in the South Pacific during
World War II. The play is nar-
rated by Sakini, portrayed by
Steve Thomas, a roguish native in-
terpreter. Sakini is an employed
civilian of the United States Army
and his "boss" is the pompous
Colonel Purdy, Terry Whitmire.
Sakini likes the colonel but un-
fortunately the friendship isn't a
mutual one. Purdy gives Sakini to
Captain Fisby, Rick Jarvis, a for-
mer college professor of the Hu-
manities, and a bumbling failure
in the army. Purdy then sends
Fisby to the small village of To-
biki to make it self-supporting

ol tke

CjQ-UCfU^t

fTioon

by Phil Mansueto

and to introduce democracy to the
natives.

Fisby is given a plan to guide
him in his recovery of Tobiki. The
top officials in Washington have
thought of everything possible and
compiled the recovery in the form
of Plan "B." Plan "B" is to be his
"Bible," and he should not have
any questions whatsoever, because
Washington has anticipated every-
thing.

With his new "Bible," Sakini,
an old woman, her daughter and
four children, an old man, and a
goat, Fisby starts out for Tobiki
in a very crowded jeep. Sakini ex-

42

Cik«.d^^A

plains, "Distance from Headquar-
ters to Tobiki, by map, two
inches. By horse, three days. By
foot, four days. By jeep, ten days."

On arriving at the village, Fishy
finds it much easier to accept the
native customs than to try to fol-
low the colonel's idea of "making
the natives learn democracy even
if he has to shoot every last one
of them."

Fisby's lectures on democracy
do not come off too well and in-
stead of building a pentagon-
shaped school house as prescribed
in Plan "B," Fisby builds a Tea-
house. Fisby has received a Geisha

Girl as a present and everyone
knows that a Geisha Girl must
have a Teahouse in which to
work. It so happens that Fisby
allows the Geisha Girl, Lotus
Blossom, played by Sylvia Lopez,
to teach the ladies of the village
her art.

Several hilarious things happen
to make the play wonderful enter-
tainment. In the end the village
does manage to become self-sup-
porting through the sale of native
potato brandy, 10 Star Batata.

The satirical side of the play is
slanted toward the Army and the

American idea of success, de-
mocracy and morality.

The production ran for four
consecutive nights and played a
Sunday matinee. Anyone who did
not see "Teahouse of the August
Moon" missed one of the college's
finest productions.

"Little story now concluded.
History of world unfinished. Love-
ly ladies, kind gentlemen. Go home
to ponder. What was true at be-
ginning remains true. Pain makes
man think, Thought makes man
wise. Wisdom makes life endur-
able, our play has ended, May
August Moon bring gentle sleep."

43

44

December 17th

ihe Qhnstfiias

ance

On the night of December 17th, Fort Lau-
derdale's Statler Hilton Hotel played host to
the Junior College s Christmas Dance "Snow-
balls and Seashells," the first formal affair of
the year. Some 700 people attended and
danced to the musical debut of the Stage
Band. It was a glittering end to a ver>- active
first semester.

Master of ceremonies Matt Faison,
Snowball Queen Sue Hoppins and her
escort, Dave FitzGerald, at the moment
of coronation.

45

white knee-length jeans by Wrangler;
about $5. White wool "Poor Boy"
sweater; about $5. Royal blue parka;
about $5. Model: Bonnie McFetridge.

'liti'i

lllHi JJJl

^

Venetian Holiday

December ITth, 1965 - January Sih, 1966

X

^i

We wish to thank Mr. and Mrs.
Edward D. Canzano oi Mediord,
Massachusetts, owners oi the yacht
"Miss Acme," and Captain and Mrs.
Winthrop Ellis for their kind co-
operation in making this feature
possible.

f&

Light blue bell-bottoms by
Pantino; about $12. Navy blue
orlon-acryllc "Poor Boy"
sweater; about $5. Sandals by
Capezio; about $9. Model:
Vicki Schmidt.

hip-hugger swim suit
led with red piping and
i lace. By Jantzen; about
Model: Sharon Roesch.

THE SOC

lOPS

JANUARY 15 - FEBRUARY 11

In order to create spirit during the basketball
season, the Student Government Association
sponsored informal sock hops after the home
games. The bands featured at the dances
included the Avantis, the Overtones, and the
Cavemen. The turnout was considered good
and the whole affair was a large success.

Salute Brazil

BY JEANNE COONEY

MR. HARRY J. SCHALE-
MAN, an instructor of
geography at the Jun-
ior College, has worked with The
Experiment in International Liv-
ing and is presently Community
Chairman for a group of eleven
Brazilians. This organization has
fifty member nations and hopes
that by placing people in private
homes in other countries, they will
further understanding between in-
dividuals in the United States. The
Experiment does not advertise and
therefore its existence is made
known by word of mouth. Those
interested must contact the head-
quarters in Vermont. Then the or-
ganization tries to choose people
who are the most well-rounded in
personality and interests. Pertain-
ing to selection on the basis of
socio-economic background, the
Experiment has no specifications.
To avoid discrimination because of
financial factors half-scholarships
are offered to those in need of
them.

The seven men and four women
who make up the group include
one married couple. The occupa-
tions of the group vary from stu-
dent, teacher, physician, newspa-
perman, bank official, librarian, to
economist. Their ages range from
sixteen to thirty-eight. Their visit

JANUARY 9TH
FEBRUARY BTH

50

in Broward County lasted for one
month. Then they left as a group
for a three day visit to Washing-
ton, D.C., where they were the
guests of the State Department.
To complete their group tours
they spent three days on a sight-
seeing excursion in New York City.
The rest of their time was allotted
for independent travel. Differing
from American women who often
work after marriage and mother-
hood, the mothers of all of the
group members are housewives.
The fathers' occupations include a
newspaperman, two bankers, a
tradesman, a businessman, a pilot,
a ferryman, and a public notary.
The Brazilians who visited Fort
Lauderdale have many interests
that are both different and similar
to those of South Floridians. They
listed classical and popular music,
volleyball, swimming, the theatre,
movies, visiting museums, and
opera. Only one mentioned tele-
vision as a favorite pastime.

To find out more about Brazil-
ians in general and teenagers in
particular two of the students
were interviewed. They were
Paulo Henrique de Castro, who
recently graduated from high
school, and Frank Fleming, who
will graduate from high school

this summer. They both intend to
continue their educations at a
University and eventually become
engineers. Paulo attended private
school and Frank attended public
school, but the curriculum was
much the same. The subjects, how-
ever, differ somewhat from those
offered in the United States. They
include English, Portuguese,
French, Spanish, mathematics, his-
tory, physics, chemistry, geogra-
phy, and sports, mainly soccer,
volleyball, and basketball. Once a
week they have a government class
in which they are taught capital-
ism vs. communism, their own
governmental structure, and re-
lated subjects. Tlie main differen-
tiation, of course, is that of lan-
guage. In Brazil the word "col-
lege" refers to the eighth and
ninth grades. However, these stu-
dents were most deeply impressed
by how differently Americans
spend their time. To illustrate
this, some of their activities can
be summed up as follows: On
weekdays, they attend classes from
7:30 A.M. to 12:00 noon. This is
followed by afternoon walks,
homework, and perhaps television.
Saturdays and Sundays are spent
at parties, the beach, movies and
nightclubs. The most striking dif-

ference was that in Brazil teen-
agers spend a good deal of time in
nightclubs. Teenage girls seldom
work and the boys usually wait
until they are nineteen or older.
Both sexes get most of their spend-
ing money from their parents.
However, they seldom have their
own cars.

Though differences prevail, the
similarity in people throughout the
world is typified by one response
regarding musical tastes. When
asked whether he preferred classi-
cal to popular, one young Brazil-
ian replied, "Oh no, not the young
people!" Apparently, young people
the world over still prefer the
Beatles to Beethoven.

r

MACKEY

%^ r^- s:^^^-' ^.^ -*^#^- N I

The finale — "Which Way America"

ON THE MORNING of Wednesday, Febru-
ary 9th, the campus of Broward Junior
College resounded with the musical spirit of
a free America, as some sixty vocalists of the Sing
Out 66 troupe gave folk tunes, ballads, and songs of
revolution in a magnificently fine performance.

In order to make the event an unforgettable suc-
cess, all classes were closed during the show and
hundreds flocked to listen as a strong wind carried
the strains of "Which Way America" and "The Ride
Of Paul Revere" across the campus. Student response
was tremendous and many were moved to discover
the purposes and force behind this spirited group.
After performing to a capacity crowd at Fort

The Colwell Brothers — Paul, Ralph, and Steve

52

Lauderdale's War Memorial Auditorium, leaders of
Sing Out returned to the College on Friday morning
for a question and answer forum with several
interested students. During this session, the collegians
realized that Sing Out 66 was the promoting youth
force of a very great enterprise — Moral Re-Arma-
ment, a movement dedicated to return the world
and its people to God. United solely by the faith of
its members, Sing Out performances are free to all
and supported by private funds, not government
financing.

In outlining the purpose of the talented singers,
John Ruffin, one of the group's leaders, stated, "We
wish to make freedom such a contagious thing that

by John Leatherwood

53

Communism doesn't stand a chance." Another Sing
Out leader, Vee Entwistle, shared Ruffin's enthus-
iasm. "Sing Out isn't just a show, it's an expression
of what we want to hve for. And right now, our
main interest is to create a Sing Out here in Fort
Lauderdale." Response was almost immediate as
many students made the decision to join, create,
and follow.

What force motivates a youth to join such a
movement? Why do they wish to do so? How does it
all come about? Sing Out vocalist Kathie Emrich, a
twenty-one year old University of Colorado junior,
was most eager to tell her story.

"The show came to the University in November (1965),
and some of the Sing Out girls stayed in our sorority house.
I became very interested in their purpose and decided to find
out all I could about Sing Out and Moral Re-Armament. By
the end of the first term, I had become very friendly with
some of the girls and invited them to spend the holidays with
my mother and me at our home in California. As Sing Out
headquarters are in Los Angeles, it was very convenient for
mom and me to find out all we could about it. She knew I
was quite serious about this and allowed me to make up my
own mind on what course to follow.

Linda Blackmore sings "The
Ballad of Joan of Arc"

"After returning to Colorado Springs, I attended a two-day
Moral Re-Armament conference which greatly heightened my
enthusiasm for the movement. I entered the University for
the second term but was uncertain on whether to stay in
school or follow Sing Out. To make this decision, I consulted
God in prayer and felt it to be His will that I join Sing
Out 66, By this time, the group was here in Florida, per-
forming in Orlando. I took a plane down to meet them there
and became a member of Sing Out just a week ago.

"I have no uncertainties about the choice I made for I
really believe I am doing God's work in just the way He
wants me to. I am a firm believer in Moral Re-Armament
and wish to pattern my life after its four moral standards:
honesty, purity, unselfishness, and love. But it's much more
than just an individual thing, it's going out and getting
others to follow. And this is the aim of Sing Out — to get
the idea across to all who hear us; the idea of a world
based on absolute moral standards, directed by God and
bringing out the best in man.

"Though most of us in Sing Out are high school and
college students trying to capture youth so that, through
them, the battle can be continued, we must also capture the
adults for monetary backing and e.xperienced guidance. With
these two forces united, we are certain that the world
spoken of in the Lord's Prayer verse 'Thy will be done on
earth as it is in heaven' will be achieved."

This is only a small part of the story of this re-
markable movement; the rest shall be written upon
the pages of history.

Boh Quesnel,
tm accompanist

■'A

and
ORGANIZATION

55

There are two choral groups on cam-
pus, both under the direction of Miss
Betty McMillion. The COLLEGE
SINGERS, larger of the two, is open to
all college students. The president is
Mike Day; vice-president, Andrea Col-
aninno; and secretary-treasurer Kathy
Rollins. Student conductor is James
Stewart. The Singers schedule one pro-
gram per semester, this semester's to be
held early in April. The COLLEGE
CHORISTERS is a smaller, more se-
lect group of students, eligible only
through try-outs. They are active in
civic programs, performing for area Ki-
wanis Clubs, hospitals, and women's or-
ganizations. This semester, the Choris-
ters will present a Spring concert for
the College.

COLLEGE SINGERS

U

u

#

The French Club was formed to pro-
mote interest in the French language
and the cultures of the French peoples.
This year, the club is sponsored by Mr.
John Weldon. Its officers are Randy

Steinberg, president; Dawn Lincoln culture, or countries speaking the French

vice-president; and Lorraine Becker, language. At the present time, the club

secretary-treasurer. During each semes- is in the process of reorganization, and

ter, the club has speakers and films the group will be in operation again

concerning various aspects of the French next term.

56

ORCHESTRA

There are four orchestral groups
formed or in organization on the JCBC
campus. All of these four are under the
direction of Mr. Jirnmy Woodle. The
BROWARD CONCERT COLLEGE
ORCHESTRA is open to members of
the community as well as students.
There are forty musicians in the orches-
tra at the present time, and are sched-
uled for their first concert in February.
There will be another concert, the date
of which is to be announced. The Con-
cert Orchestra will also assist in the
production "Sound of Music.''

The CONCERT BAND is open to
college students only, and presents twc
concerts per semester. The STAGE
BAND, which is made up of members
of the Concert Band, performed at the
Christmas dance last semester.

Now in the process of organization is
the "PEP BAND."' Open to college stu-
dents, it will play at the home games
in the new gym.

PHI BETA LAMBDA

Phi Beta Lambda is a nationally af-
filiated fraternity designed to equip
students to participate effectively in
business professions and community life.
The club was organized in 1963 and
became affiliated with the national fra-
ternity in 1965. This year/s officers are
President Bob Joynes, Vice-president
Skip Day, Treasurer Bob Shevenell, and
Secretary Linda Dahl. Sponsor is Mr.
Peter Shenosky. The fraternity has
planned to award a scholarship for the
outstanding business student, and also
plans to send a delegation to the state
and national conventions. Car-washes
will make up the major part of the
fund-raising to finance these trips. Phi
Beta Lambda, in conjunction with
S.G.A., put on the Christmas dance,
which was held December 17, at the
Statler Hilton.

Phi Theta Kappa is the campus
honor society and Mu Mu chapter of
the national organization. The society is
sponsored by Mr. John Bunch, and its
officers are Sven Soneson, president;
Bob Klein, vice-president; Connie Sue
Corbath, secretary-treasurer. The pur-
pose of Phi Theta Kappa is to promote
and award outstanding scholastic
achievement. The group also provides

PHI THETA
KAPPA

the college with a tutoring service to
aid students with a weekly, one-hour
session in languages, science, or what-
ever subject requested. Tentative plans
are being made for an awards banquet
at the end of the year to honor those
students on the President's List. Re-
quirements for Phi Theta Kappa are a
3.0 average and at least a fourteen hour
course-load.

The Reading Club is dedicated to
the service of the community and the
College. Its officers are Irene Meyling-
her, president; Jean Holder, vice-presi-
dent; and Debbie Evans, secretary.
Sponsor is Mrs. Margaret Porter. The
club is not related to the reading classes

offered by the college. It is a^. interest
club, and all materials used are gotten
especially for it. The planned project
of the Reading Club is a system of
junior high tutors to work with under-
privileged students in Broward county.
This would be especially helpful to

students who are majoring in education
or sociology. If the college tutors could
reach the children and help them to im-
prove their reading, it would be of great
help, psychologically as well as scho-
lastically, to the children in their later
school years.

58

SALES AND
MARKETING

The Sales and Marketing club was
formed as an interest organization for
those students who are aiming for a
two-year degree in sales, advertising, or
other types of business administration.
The purpose of the club is to allow the
student to see more quickly the oppor-
tunities in today's business. The officers
are Jeff Buntz, president; Tom Penny
vice-president; Eileen Ard. secretary;
and Roger Stubing, treasurer. The spon-
sor is Mr. Marion West. Besides lec-
turers, who are among the prominent
businessmen in the area, the members
review case study problems on com-
mercial disputes and work on market-
ing surveys. Delegates from this chapter
will be sent to the State Sales and
Marketing Leadership Conference at
Tampa, in March.

The Spanish Club is one of the old-
est campus organizations, having been
in operation since the opening of the
College. This year's officers are Ana
Martinez, president; Roland Balsera
vice-president; and Kip Flanders, treas-
urer-secretary. The club is sponsored by

Mr. John Pawlowski. The object of the
organization is to promote the Spanish
language and the culture of the Span-
ish-speaking peoples. At the end of this
term, the club hopes to present an
award to the outstanding Spanish stu-
dent of the year. They are also planning

a dinner at one of the Spanish restau-
rents in this area to be held in early
spring. This past semester, in conjunc-
tion with the French and German clubs.
Spanish Club sponsored a Christmas
program which was presented Decem-
ber 10.

SPANISH
CLUB

-A

Lija Ruden, former Miami Opera Guild member,
performs at a Spanish Club Meeting.

59

SNEA is a pre-professional organiza-
tion designed to acquaint students in-
terested in education with the many
phases of teaching. The officers are
President Sharon Roesch, Vice-president
Barbara Bird, Secretary Anita Plouffe
Treasurer Kevin Bunin and Reporter

Nancy Craig. The club is sponsored by
Mr. Wayne E. Barton. SNEA promotes
student teaching in the local high
schools. They will be holding a rummage
sale in the middle of February to fi-
nance the trip to the state convention.

Also planned is the sale of JCBC sta-
tionery to assist in the fund-raising.
Membership is open to students inter-
ested in teaching, maintaining a "C"
average, who can pay their dues before
the deadline.

STUDENT NURSES
ASSOCIATION

SNA is a pre-professional organiza-
tion for nursing students, sponsored to
encourage students to become active
members of a professional nursing or-
ganization after graduation. The club is
co-sponsored by the American Nurses
Association and the National League for
Nursing. JCBC's chapter officers are
Kitty McCarroll, president; Lois Ma-
comber, 1st vice-president; Pat Connors,
2nd vice-president; Gail Bruderhausen,
recording secretary; Geraldine Karjanis,
corresponding secretary; and Marian
Sharrett, treasurer. The campus spon-
sors are Mrs. Adele Miller and Miss
Carolyn Dunne. Only students enrolled
in the nursing program are eligible for
membership. SNA has a program
planned for the Department of Nursing
to be presented in February. This year
they were hostess chapter for the state
convention, which was held in Holly-
wood.

Young Americans for Freedom is a
nationally-affiliated organization of the
conservative youth of America. The
officers of the campus branch are Chair-
man Don Shaw, Vice-Chairman Tony
Marra, Secretary Tracey Wilkenson, and
Treasurer Win Rand. Y.A.F., sponsored
by Mr. Lucius DeVampert, was formed
last semester and became active during
this past January. The national organ-
ization was launched in 1960 from the
estate of W. S. Buckley, and contains
more than 35,000 members. The aims
of Y.A.F. are stated in the Sharon
Statement, documented in 1960. It out-
lines the opposition of Communism, the
preservation of the Constitution, and
the defense of national sovereignty.

YAF

Young
Republicans

The Young Republicans Club was
formed to promote interest in political
affairs and to support the growth of the
Republican party. Y.R. received its
charter from the state federation in No-
vember of 1965. This year's officers are
Chairman Bill Behrens, Vice-chairman
Jeanne Cooney, Treasurer Brent Balch
Publicity Secretary Tom Tumlin and
Recording Secretary Carol Ely. The

club is sponsored by Mr. Harry Crews.
Last term. Young Republicans became
the first club to back a slate of candi-
dates in the freshman elections. The
club was also active in the last SGA
presidential election, and plans to back
candidates in the upcoming general
election. Y.R. will send a delegation to
the State Convention in May, 1966.

61

D ^nouakt of JlJEautu

By Terry R. Van Der Heyden
Illustrated by Joanita Taormina

I thought of your beauty and this carnation,
'Twas plucked from an enchanted garden,
Fragrance divine, silv'ry dew laden;
In raptures am I, my infatuation.

O'er the blissfulness indulged that shan't perish;
When ecstasy throbs my mortal clay.
My heart does pound away, pound away,
Chanting: "My love, you above all I cherish."

I Am the Rich

The Famous and the Poor

I Am Socrates crying from

His grave for hearers.

I Am Virgil

And Dante and Homer

I Am Charlemagne and Shakespeare.

But I Am more —

1 Am Poverty Enriched

I Am sickness Cured and Death made Life

I Am a Candle in the Darkness

I Am Love and Joy and Pain

And I Am the End of the search.

For I Am He Who makes the earth

Spin round upon its axis

And threw the stars into the sky

Before there were eyes to see.

Or a man to try to count them.

And I Am He to Whom the eternal worship

Of all creatures belongs

Who put all this into the earth

And Who will take it all away

— Infinite Truth

Infinite Love

Infinite Wisdom —

Infinite God!

am l&e

By Cassandra Kenfield

Illustrated by
Cherry Hanson

63

MULTIPARTITE

By James Higgins Gray
Collage by Lew Alquist

In a time before our own

In a iar off land

People were building a tower

Before they were through

They suddenly discovered

They could not understand each other

Some turned white with fright

Some red with shame

While others black with anger

Still, others yellow with discouragement

They all fled with contempt

That day they started a race
A race of people
The race for supremacy
White said "I'm the smartest"
Red yelled "I'm the strongest"
Black laughed "I'm the happiest"
And yellow sang "I'm the most"

Now!

Yellow threaten white

White hate black

Black fight white

While the red sit

And watch their land grow smaller

Where is the finish line

For the race of races

Let one live with another

Two live with three

And the world with me.

64

.f»W

rr^-

*■' %:^

'^»^

•vx..

IWr^

- 1

I

7

J

o7

r

\ f^mS

'f

V

f

,

/

«

■N

^

[ .

S

^ \

\..^___ _

s-

\

MAY, 1966

STAFF AND ADVISORS

Editor-in-Chiel Pamela Edwards

Literary Editor Ann C. Bardsley

Feature Editor Sheryl Martin

Art Editor Lewis Alquist

Sports Editor John Wolfe

General Staff Assistant Elle Kurpiewski

Photographers David Porter, Norman

Summey, and Judy Mathis
Publications Advisor Dr. Harold B. Hayes

Chairman of the Division of Language

and Literature Dr. Homer M. Ledbetter

SILVER

SANDS

Tic itiiir Cdege of BmihiI My

Rit McfiHi, Ariiti

TABLE OF CONTENTS

COLLEGE '66 2

THIS 'MICKEY MOUSE' COLLEGE — A FAIR

ACCUSATION? Sheryl Martin 6

VILLAGE CAMP Sara David 8

CAMPUS CASUALS 12

SHALL WE OVERCOME? Robert Jackson

and Rick Barnard 14

LYCEUM PRESENTATIONS EUe Kurpiewski

DAVE BRUBECK 16

THE NORMAN LUBOFF CHOIR 18

NATIONAL PLAYERS 19

SOUND OF MUSIC Phil Mansueto 20
FOLK MUSIC — THE MUSIC OF FOLKS

Marci Coyle 21

THE MEDICAL ASSISTING PROGRAM 24

TERMINATION (Short Story) Jim Tucker 26

SEAHORSE MIGRATION 31

ON CAMPUS (Selected Cartoons) 32

CANDIDATES FOR GRADUATION, MAY, 1966 34

GRADUATES OF DECEMBER, 1965 36

PRAYER OF FUTILITY (Poem) John Leatherwood 46
INTERCOLLEGIATE SPORTS John Wolfe

CONGRATULATIONS SEAHORSES 48

SPIRIT '66 S3

TENNIS 54

GOLF

BASEBALL

JUDO

THE CAMPUS -

- A LOOK AT THE FUTURE

Ann Bardsley
THE SGA PICNIC

WHAT MEASURE — THE MAN? (Poem)

T. Stephen Rosen

ANN'S REVIEW Ann Bardsley

55
56
58

59
62

63
64

COLLEGE

9

% it
A Ttew

BERKELEY riots again, sex
orgies persist in Amer-
ica's unapproachable Ivy
League colleges, LSD has become
"high camp" and America's col-
legians are winning no popularity
contests with older generations.

Is this typical or atypical of the
students who have flooded our
college campuses? Are they merely
a mass of aimless transgressors
who rebel for the sake of rebelling
or does the majority consist of
serious-minded young adults who
realize they are "the hope of the
future" and yearn to meet and to
accept this responsibility?

Currently, the subject of the
hour among writers and journalists
has been "the revolution" among
America's youth. SILVER SANDS
wanted to know what the college
student thinks of himself and his
colleagues. To find out, we went
directly to the subject in question
— the representatives from the

nation's colleges and universities
who have recently filled Fort
Lauderdale beaches. Replies were
consistent yet strikingly different;
expected yet shocking; profound
yet uncertain. Primarily, they
helped to give a clearer concept of
the breed of Americans the col-
leges are producing.

It is a generation in a hurry. It
is impatient to do something about
persisting dilemmas on both the
national and international level. It
looks at the world and is dissatis-
fied with what it sees. It chal-
lenges government, religion, and
morality. It goes further — it ques-
tions the why's and the where-
fore's. It critically analyzes so-
ciety's basic institutions and won-
ders where they have fallen short
of their mark. "There are more of
us, we are more educated, and we
have more leisure time. This re-
sults in more time to think, to ob-
serve, and to question," stated
Fred Balzer, a senior and a psy-
chology major at the University of
Alaska. George Holder, a 20 year
old sociology major at Northwest-
ern University, pointed out that
"We have not experienced a de-
pression or a major war. Perhaps
because of this we are more
idealistic than previous genera-
tions and want to bring about
changes quickly."

Students today are definitely
moving away from the church. Are
they deserting the concept of a
God or solely the conc;ept of insti-
tutionalized religion? Of the stu-

dents questioned, only one is a
profound atheist; many more are
agnostics. The majority believe in
God, but not in organized religion.
"Religion should be personal.
Church doctrines have left a void
that I have filled with my belief
in a personal God," stated a 23
year old graduate student at In-
diana University. A history major
at UCLA cited that "Certainly this
generation is deserting the church,
but it is not a sudden movement.
It has been a gradual change
down through history. With the
advancement of time comes re-
ligious reform. Let's face it, most
of our organized religions are
archaic and outmoded." A psychol-
ogy major from Ohio State Uni-
versity added, "I definitely believe
in organized religion for myself,
but not for everyone else. To say
that all others should believe as I
do would be imposing on their
personal freedoms."

On one major issue, replies were
astoundingly identical. This was
the subject of morality. This gen-
eration is labeled as radical in its
moral adjustments. Is it really?
Has it completely denounced es-
tablished moral standards? No two
students differed in their senti-
ments and this popular reaction
was summed up by Jim Coldwell,
a sophomore and a sociology ma-
jor at the Royal Canadian Uni-
versity: "What is moral? There
should never be a specific set of
moral standards set up by society
for all to follow. Morality is a per-

sonal matter. Every individual
should be responsible for setting
their own standards and then fol-
lowing them."

Students are surprisingly willing
and eager to express their opin-
ions. They have set down their
ideals and convictions and are not

ashamed of them. From the rep-
resentative number interviewed by
SILVER SANDS, here are some
of their replies:

ON MILITARY SERVICE
IN VIET NAM

\

Jim Coldwell, 19, sophomore soci-
ology major at the Royal Ca-
nadian University.

"I'm still a Canadian citizen, yet
I have resided in the United
States for nine years. If called to
service I'd gladly give my life
for this country. I believe in
what the United States is doing
in Viet Nam and they should
stay there until the cause is
satisfied."

Laurie Mandebeaum, 20, a French
major at Skidmore College.

"I'm not a pacifist, but I defin-
itely believe that we should not
be in Viet Nam."

(Note: Of the students inter-
viewed. Miss Mandebeaum is
the only one who does not back
our stand in Viet Nam.)

Ronald Furst, 18, business major
at the University of Miami.

"Prejudice definitely decreases
by generation, but I feel that
students are hypocritical about
integration. They will try to give
an outward impression of being
all for racial equality, yet this is
difficult for them to accept
within themselves. It will have
to be a gradual transition. It is
impossible to jam anything
down people's throats and then
expect them to swallow it will-
ingly."

N DRAFT-CARD BURNER^

John Rosamilia, 20, a student at
Rutgers University.

"What is the point in taking such
drastic measures when they're
actually not accomplishing any-
thing? If they're trying to play
the role of the martyr they have
failed. The only visible outcome
is that their character or else
their sanity appears questionable
in the eyes of others. Thus, their
purpose is deterred rather than
escalated."

p>N RACIAL PROBLEMS

>N THE BERKELEY RIOTS

Elena Borstein, 20, an art major at
Skidmore College.

"Berkeley may be right, but the
method is wrong. If they really
believe in their objectives there's
nothing wrong with that. More
people should have such sincere
motives. But they're going about
it all wrong. They're accomplish-
ing nothing but a great deal of
undesirable publicity."

1

Susie Kogut, 21, senior education
major at Michigan State Uni-
versity.

"I don't feel a personal responsi-
bility for my country's racial
problems, but I do feel a per-
sonal responsibility in helping to'
solve them."

JPN GOVERNMENT

Larry Tolstam, 23, graduate student
in economics at Michigan State
University.

"I don't believe in 'my country,
right or wrong' per se. Citizens
should maintain the right to
criticize their government's ac-
tions, but once it makes a move
they should back it up whether
they agree or not. Governments
are the products of human
minds. No human is perfect, so
how can a government be?"

I

Merle Carlson, 23, a graduate stu-
dent in chemistry at North-
>vestern University.

"Organized religion is good for
those who cannot think for
themselves. It provides a logical
behavior pattern for individuals
who are unable to set down a
satisfactory pattern on their own.
The more educated a person be-
comes, his need for this type of
religion lessens."

LY RELATIONS

Fred Balzer, 22, senior psychology
major at the University of
Alaska.

"I've worked with kids from
broken homes, alcoholic parents,
and other undesirable back-
grounds. To be honest, I feel
complete disgust for what I see.
I consider myself a good poten-
tial parent and to me this is ex-
tremely important. The loss of
family ties is a loss our children
cannot afford."

ON RELIGIOr

Marjorie Freeman, 19, freshman
physical education major at
the University of Florida.

"Yes, I definitely believe in God.
In organized religion, no. Ways
of expression vary with each
individual. In churches and syna-
gogues, people have a tendency
to follow the crowd. No true
belief really comes through."

^

»

p

Jeff Zettel, 19, sophomore history
major at UCLA.

"I don't believe in God, yet I am
not saying that there is not a
God. I don't believe in a heaven
or a hell. I believe in people
and people are good. All my life
my parents have practically
crammed religion down my
throat. As a result, instead of
being devout, I have turned
away from it."

?^-

George Holder, 20, a sociology ma-
jor at Northwestern University.

"I definitely fear for the future.
Small scale wars will continue
and will slowly drain our coun-
try's economy. I'm not saying
that big wars are out, but I think
that the occurrence of one is un-
likely. The greater destruction
potential man obtains, the less
likely he is to use it. Economi-
cally speaking, we will suffer
the greatest at the hands of the
small scale wars."

. the registration
run-around . . ."

". . . with the lake
the parking lot . .

WHAT'S the difference
how we dress or how we
feel? When you're in the
thirteenth grade, you've got to be
treated like you're in the thir-
teenth grade!"

This comment was taken from a
conversation overheard in the stu-
dent lounge. The boy was discuss-
ing the dress code. In another cor-
ner of the room, there was a
heated argument going on about
the restriction of fraternities on the
JCBC campus. The students were
all arguing in favor of the estab-
lishment of legal fraternities on
campus. Their reasoning was logi-
cal and their arguments were
sound. At least they appeared to
be sound, since there was no one
arguing against them.

The average student spends a
great deal of time in discussion
and/or criticism of the campus, the
administration and the school sys-
tem in general. This criticism
either takes the form of a subtle
prod ( ". . . the super-rotten 'food'
at the Union"), the not-so-subtle
prod ('. . . with the lake in the
parking lot and the sand dunes
'round the buildings, we should set
up cabanas and beach mats. We'd
make a fortune!"), and finally a
downright stab ("If this mickey-
mouse kindergarten were really a
college, we could have our fraterni-
ties, and sororities too, if we
wanted them.") .

The most common complaint

seems to be that the whole concept
of a junior college is an insult to
the ideals of the American uni-
versity. The usual phrase employed
to describe it is "mickey-mouse."
For those not familiar with the
term, it means "simply too unbe-
lievably stupid to be mentioned in
an intelligent conversation."

The reference to the junior col-
lege as an extension of high school
is also frequently heard. Restric-
tions and methods of procedure
such as bells at the end of class
sessions, enforced attendance, and
the dress requirements are thought
by the students to be impositions
or reflections upon the students'
judgment. "The rules are set up by
the administration, enforced by the
faculty, and the kids who are sup-
posed to be learning discipline and
acceptance of responsibility aren't
gaining anything."

Dr. E. P. Lauderdale, Dean of
Instruction, attributed the neces-
sity of restrictions upon the stu-
dent body to the lack of an or-
ganized, strong student govern-
ment, such as those that exist in
the four-year institutions. He said
"Leaders aren't just born, they
practice. In a two-year institution,
there just isn't enough time for
the student to learn enough about
self-government to be able to di-
rect themselves. At the universi-
ties, the juniors and seniors are
the ones who run things. That
gives the freshmen and sophomores

CTSCt/ i 'J

a chance to learn with no problem
of 'two-year turnover'."

Lauderdale also said that ". . .
the administration cannot abdicate
responsibility for the operation of
the educational institution. It can
delegate authority to the student,
but it can't relieve itself of legal
authority of the school."

One reason the junior colleges
were established was to take the
load off the four-year universities.
Certainly community colleges have
done this. Here in South Florida,

This 'MICKEY MOUSE' Junior College . . .

A Fair Accusation?

Dade County Junior College, with
an enrollment of almost 17,000,
and JCBC with more than 4,000
have lifted over 21,000 incoming
students off the enrollment lists of
the state and private universities
in Florida. This is not even con-
sidering the other junior colleges
in the state. Without the junior

Students are not always able to
cope with college life, studies and
responsibilities at the same time.
Jarecke said, "When a high school
student is sent directly to a fairly
demanding university of the better
class, he is at a disadvantage be-
cause there is much background he
lacks and is not able to survive
without. In a junior college, the
student is able to catch what back-
ground he didn't have before, and
acclimate himself to college life."

The problems that the "open
door" policy of enrollment present
to the teachers are quite different
from those found in a university.
Where, at a university, the profes-
sor may often have to cope with
overcrowded classes and an exas-
perating schedule; in a junior col-
lege the problems are more in the
nature of having to deal with an
incoming group of students which

by SHERYL MARTIN

may appear to be intellectually
inferior.

Dr. Homer Ledbetter. Head of
the Humanities Division, said,
"There are more problems here,
but at least we are able to cope
with the problems on a more indi-
vidual level . . . Every piece of
human stuff has worth in its own
right. Educators should try to de-
velop this worth."

Aside from the regulatory prob-
lems of a junior college, there are
the physical discomforts of estab-
lishing a school. These discom-
forts ( the lake in the parking lot
in front of "C" building, the daily
sand storms, the registration run-
around, the "food" on campus ) are
things that both the faculty and
the students must share. They are
caused either by lack of facilities
or conflicting future plans for cam-
pus arrangement. They are to be
endured as part of the birth pains
of a college.

. . we should set up

cabanas and beach

mats . . ."

colleges, the universities in the
state would have had to turn away
almost half of the applying stu-
dents.

The advantages a two-year insti-
tution offers the student are many
and varied. The most obvious is
the financial advantage. The junior
college offers a university parallel
program to students who otherwise
couldn't afford a college education.
Dr. Walter Jarecke, director of
counseling and advisement, said
that "Statistics show that grad-
uates of the university parallel
courses here do better than do
those students who follow the same
course in certain four-year insti-
tutions."

;^1.. "X&r),^^

%.,

W'

A'-'Z^^-" '^:

-«^-

X*": ^-i!

^~'~» <

"♦•.

v^-

■c^

■c-U.,.

_^^

\^'

'^mm

V

y

^45«<

Illustrations by Lew Alquist

VILLAGE
CAMP

by Sara David

FAMILIARITY, hopefully, breeds Camp.
Camp? It's an old word that's been
dragged out in the open and given a
new meaning. It obsoletes Hip; Mad, mad,
mad; Pop; Swinging; Crazy; Groovy; Funsville.
You're not "In" anymore, or "Out." You're
either Camp or you aren't. The world, suddenly,
is divided into two and only two parts: those
that are and those that aren't. A trivial matter?
Unworthy of consideration in a college maga-
zine? Absolutely not. Camp keeps the very
best of company.

Susan Sontag, who breathed new life into
the relic, is a professor of philosophy at Co-
lumbia University. In an intricate and involved
essay in the Partisan Review, Fall, 1964, she
decided that the word satisfied a missing defi-
nition for a "third sensibility." To Miss Sontag,
Camp is the love of artifice and exaggeration;
the theatricality of certain things that are
"good" because they're so "awful." She restricts
Camp to the aiiluent society, or one capable of
reacting to the psychopathology (her word) of
affluence. Sontag Camp: Tiffany lamps; 1900
A.D. post cards; King Kong; the androgynous
boy-girl, girl-boy pre-Raphaelite painting; Oscar
Wilde. And sex movies, ii seen without exper-
iencing an involvement.

Time magazine took her up on it, and started
what has become a free-for-all in defining sub-
jective taste. The New York Times magazine
couldn't resist the bait, and insists it's a noun
and an adjective:

Camp, n: a 3rd strem of taste.

Camp, adj: too much; not to be believed.
This impeccable source carefully subdefines it,

with examples:

High Camp: . . .

Middle Camp: . . .

Low Camp: . . .

Intentional Camp: . . .

Unintentional Camp: . . .
and, less bold, than Miss Sontag,
adds, "in the beholder's own eye,
of course."

Gloria Steinern, in Life, calls
Camp "return-trip Pop . . . but it
has got to be Fun." Holiday's
George Frazier takes the side of a
critic who says Camp is something
that is good in spite of being bad.
He goes so far as to conclude that
Camp really is an Indonesian por-
trait of Tony Curtis done in
chicken feathers. The Venetian
Crier abstracts it to NOT owning
a Mustang, or getting married be-
cause you WANT to.

Webster's Third New Interna-
tional lists 23 variations of Camp,
none of which remotely resemble
anything concerning a "sensibility,"
or a chickenf eathered Tony Curtis.
And, horrors, according to Mee-
han, the word has been around in
the non-rural sense since 1909,
evolving from connotations of "the
pleasantly ostentatious," through
homosexuality in the 1920's, to its
present status, whatever that is.

Camp has become part of the
mainstream, the bloodstream of
the U.S. And most unlikely of all,
it is being treated as a serious
subject, debated by intellectuals
(?) via magazine articles and
newspaper columns. So much so,
in fact, it has permeated the med-
ical/mental profession. To one
New York psychiatrist, Camp is
potentially dangerous: a sick and
decadent form of regression; an
adolescent, sentimental running-
away from life and responsibilities.
A Fort Lauderdale psychologist
considers it a rebellion against
conformity, an "objection to exist-
ing mores and culture."

Camp means all things to all
persons. It can be defined as

simply or as elaborately as your
vocabulary permits. Underneath
the verbal extravagance, Camp is
essentially a response: the unique,
spontaneous reaction of the sub-
jective i; momentary immersion
of the senses in pure, undiluted
delight. It is an instantaneous in-
volvement that fulfills a need for
a feeling of aliveness and charac-
ter in the monotony of mass cul-
ture, affluent or, in spite of Miss
Sontag, unatiluent.

Which brings us to JCBC
Camp. Other than the fact that
a draftable student occasionally
plays Russian roulette and signs
up for 1 1 college-hours, and some
students deliberately don't alter a
perfectly good car, is there such
a thing as complex Camp on the
unafUuent campus: Is JCBC too
horribly dull to support anything
but the most primitive form of
Camp — playboy covers on the
Family textbook, Cornhuskers lo-
tion, thin men with thin beards?
Of course there is.

JCBC Camp is as real as in-
tangible as the fourth dimension.
You can't prove it. You just feel
it's there. JCBC Camp may be dif-
ferent, but it exists. AND it has
nothing to do with Italian Mo-
nopoly sets, or Japanese movies
with deliberately un-related sub-
titles. OR Steve Reeves movies,
Bea Lillie, Victor Mature's chest,
or Andy Warhol's eight-hour movie
of a man sleeping. These things
have to be searched out and ex-
hibited. They shriek Camp. JCBC
Camp is perhaps more sophisti-
cated because it is so ultimately
subtle. It deals with the emotional
rather than the visual senses.

To all appearances, the same
things happen every day at JCBC:
same classes, same teachers, same
buildings, and same look-alike
students. JCBC Camp is tenuous
and wafty: and extremely exclu-
sive. It is available only to those

that have lived here. It is the
thing that gives character and a
sense of difference to the incred-
ibly familiar unaitluent junior col-
lege life. It is a sense of the un-
predictable in the routine: the
non-giving-in to sameness and
plainness. Anybody that has been
here and denies that JCBC Camp
exists is obtuse. Asleep. Unaware.
To use a more familiar word,
"Out."

For instance, how about all the
prestige JCBC is acquiring? Two
on the president's list, 29 on the
dean's list at FSU, trimester I,
1965. It creates a feeling of sur-
prise and delight. It shouldn't,
really. After surviving the math-
science courses here one can climb
any educational mountain. But
since, for some reason, it creates
an air of the unusual, important
enough to take up eye-catching
space in the paper, it is definitely
Camp for JCBC alumni to be on
the FSU president's list.

The new planetarium: an Aztec
temple in the midst of a waste-
land relieved only by great boxes
that shelter the inhabitants? And
Mr. Martin: might he possibly go
into the mysterious darkness and
never appear again except to an-
nounce great happenings from
omens of the stars: perhaps the
collision of two worlds, or life on
Mars? The planetarium most cer-
tainly is an involvement of the
unfamiliar with the familiar. In a
word. Camp.

Camp clings to Building A, ex-
building C. In the terribly hot
September, 1965, students and
teachers voluntarily packed them-
selves, alive and barely breathing,
into this concentration camp: sans
water, sans bathroom, sans air-
conditioning. (Camp People) Now,
finished (almost?), WITH water
and air, the name changed to
Classroom Building A, theoreti-
cally it shouldn't be Camp. But it

is. In spite of the seeming dignity
and formal name, how about the
curtain walls that cut sight but
not noise, patios with no place to
sit or put books? No public tele-
phones. In spite of the efforts of
the authorities, it remains a mar-
ketplace. It demands an emotional
experience to stay the day there.
Building A perversely retains its
Camp atmosphere.

Definitely Camp is the unlikely
circumstance that, of all places,
the math-science department
should be the one to acquire ex-
quisitely landscaped parks in tiny
corners. AND benches WITH
cushions. Unexpected and differ-
ent? Yes. Camp? Very much so.

The new registration procedure
is Camp this year. Ante the new
registration, 4-day lines weren't
Camp (too emotional), they were
killing. Now, if you have to wait,
it's unique. The familiar exhibits
an unfamiliar quality: Camp. Re-
turn-trip Pop, if you prefer Life's
definition. Going to the office and
successfully completing a mission
is Camp. And so is the two-foot
deep reflecting pool WITH foun-
tains. JCBC Camp involves a
light-hearted adjustment to famil-
iar problems. Non-complaining. A
feeling that education is worth
anything.

JCBC Camp breaks out in tiny
happenings on the campus. The
DeLara and Woodle concert, for
instance: the pursuit and attain-
ment of excellence. And the open-
ing of the Fine Arts building with
a formal art exhibit rivaling any-
thing to be found downtown. The
foreign language movies this tri-
mester: "Fedra." A Greek myth in
Spanish! Lawrence Olivier play-
ing Othello (this is foreign?) di-
rectly to the students and faculty.
These things happen every day at
Columbia university, and every
week or month or so at Miami,
FSU and Florida State. At JCBC,

10

however, they're Camp: an oc-
casional elegance that lives, un-
noticed for the most part, within
the familiar goings-on of the prac-
tical campus affairs.

Pan Ku is Camp — it you read
it and discover that gold glis-
tens beneath the expected, and the
conventional. The superb Pan Ku
illustrations. The Venetian Crier
is Camp this year: the atmosphere
periodically boils with reactions
from students, faculty, administra-
tion and probably the school
board. Who cares? It's Camp on
the campus: a surprised delight in
discovering that caught up in the
unaf fluent atmosphere there
thrives individualism and bold-
ness and creativity. The deceptive-
ly familiar and practical carries
beneath it a strain of difference.

JCBC people are Camp. These
JCBC instructors and professors
aren't ninnies, they've got guts:
consider the faculty pictures in
Silver Sands. These are brave
souls who exposed themselves,
and for the most part got the
worst part of the bargain. These
pages in Silver Sands bring about
a tender feeling (Susan Sontag's

expression) that goes along with
anything Camp. It's "good because
it's so awful."

Students that enroll because
they WANT to are Camp; stu-
dents that grudgingly enroll and
become advocates of THIS junior
college are Camp. So are the stu-
dents burdened with a double life
of work and study, and find time
to play. And so are the adult stu-
dents that manage to survive ob-
solete, sometimes medieval, edu-
cational backgrounds. Even
MORE Camp: the fact that you
can count the older women, but
not the men. Men don't age, some-
how they merge within the group.
Universal Camp?

Camp even seeps into the li-
brary. No IRS man ever tracked
down a tax fugitive more dili-
gently than the librarians search
for total information. No matter
how trivial the grail, if it's im-
portant to the student, it's holy to
them: an attitude that transcends
the impersonal objectivity usually
associated with the formality of a
library.

JCBC Camp rebels against the
unemotional atmosphere of the

practical higher education. It is
the Self within the crowd. It is a
reprieve from the robot-like, auto-
mated, organized existence in
mass education.

What about non-camp? There
is no such thing. For Camp, by
definition, is pure, undiluted re-
sponse. It necessitates non-judg-
ment, non-consideration, non-com-
parison, and non-premeditation.
You either are or you aren't —
you feel it or you don't.

This article is subjective. Opin-
ionated, if you prefer. You per-
haps object, or disagree. Fine, go
to it. It's a symptom of non-con-
trived response. It's Camp.

One last, sad remark. It prob-
ably isn't even Camp to be Camp
anymore. Like Dorian Gray,
Camp is perhaps already dead of
old age in just a few months.
However, people will worry it, use
it, and keep it artificially breath-
ing for a while until someone
comes up with a newer word for
the same old thing: the response
of delight within the known. The
familiar that ISN'T contempt. A
sophistication that can exist within
the unatiluent society.

11

^^■^

V ^- %-*yw

CAMPUS
CASUALS

ill.! •••'"•••»••»

%0.

'/

\

• • ••

; • -•

Sun, sand and wind inspire the fashions on
the junior college campus.

The sunny days of South Florida call for
dresses or skirt and blouse outfits of a light
material. The coeds carry sweaters for the
cooler days and raincoats for those cloudy
days when sudden showers seem inevital^le.

Hairdos are usually loose, simple styles that

are ruffled by the wind and easiU' combed
back into place.

The good sturdy and ever popular loafers
are worn by most coeds. These shoes are com-
fortable for the long walks l^etween buildings
over the hard concrete and through soft sand.

Sun glasses protect artfulK made up e\es
from the wind whipped sand and the bright
Florida sun.

13

by ROBERT L. JACKSON

TO SAY that the problems of race
relations in the United States are
complex hardly helps to clarify
our situation. But unless the complexity
of this matter is seen and taken into
account, no single step is likely to be
very effecti\'e. The problems of Ameri-
can education are no less complex. In a
nation as diversified as ours, universal
education can never be simple, and it is
universal education that we must strive
for now.

Since the issues of race relation per-
meate into almost e\'ery aspect of life,
it is not unusual that we have it inter-
laced with other problems in education.

Let us come a little closer to home.
How are we licking the problem at
Broward Junior College? Most people
say "v\'hat jiroblem?" That was mv re-
action, too. But I wasn't quite convinced
prior to enrolling at B.J.C.

I wasn't sure that B.J.C. was the
place for me. The outer me just didn't
want to conform, but deep down inside
I knew that this was my best bet. My
debate went something like this:

Outer Me: Look, kid, it's too much
trouble.

Inner Me: Yeah, but it's economical
and very convenient.

Outer Me: They will all be against
you . . . even tlie instructors are "segs"
(segregationists).

Inner Me: First of all, you're not
looking at this thing with an open
mind. Second, diis is Fort Lauderdale,
not Birmingham or Selma, Alabama.
And third, this problem exists on both
sides ... us and them.

Outer Me: 'Why do you and I have
to be pioneers? Why don't we leave
things like tliis for other people?

Inner Me: Have you considered where
we might be today is everybody thought
like you?

Outer Me: Well, I guess you're right.

After the better half of me decided to
enroll at B.J.C, I was curious to know
how other Negro students felt about at-
tending the junior college. What prob-
lems were they confronted with, if any.

I was coming out of the student cen-
ter when I spotted a short, stocky Negro
fellow with thick black-rimmed glasses
sitting at a patio table reading. I spoke
politely and then proceeded to ask him,
"Do you feel uncomfortable when you're
sitting in a class with all white stu-
dents?"

"Well," he said, "this is the first time
I have attended such a school. At first
when I sat at my desk in the front of
the room, I could feel eyes staring at
the back of my head. But now I feel
at ease."

Another Negro student added that he
feels very uncomfortable whenever is-
sues on civil rights arc brought up in
the classroom h\ students or instructors.

Upon asking Negro students whether
or not they believed that they could get
along better at an all-Negro college,
more than fifty percent said no.

One girl added, "I adapted myself to

"You see," he started, "we represent
about .3% of the school population and
whenever we see another one of us
walking across the campus or sitting at
a table, we join them because they're
like 'kin'."

I could see the point he was trying
to make. Most of the Negro students
share those sentiments and I am no

Shall We Ovc

the situation, made new friends, and I
like it very much."

I walked around to the southeast end
of the patio and noticed that the
Negroes were all sitting together, segre-
gated from the rest.

I asked a fellow (Negro), "Why do
you congregate in this section? Why
don't you integrate with the rest of the
students?"

exception now that I've been here a
while.

I think Broward Junior College earns
an "A plus" because of the lack of fric-
tion or major incidents between the
races.

As I stated before, we have a long
way to go, but maybe before long, we
can look at everybody and think of
them as "kin."

14

by RICK BARNARD

SUMMER is coming. The last day
of school, Fourth of July and
week-ends at the beach are just
around the corner. Summer means fun,
time to rela.v and leave your troubles
behind for a couple of weeks.

Summer is not all fun and smiles.
Summer 1966 will undoubtedly witness
a nasty little rite that has plagued the
country for decades. Along with cold

3me?

beer and steaks sizzling on the outdoor
grill, the "lazy, hazy days of summer"
will usher in the annual dance of racial
hate. Negroes from every metropolis in
the United States will surge onto the
streets and boulevards in huge militant
bands to complain about economic in-
fringements, racial discrimination, and
passionately demand "Freedom now!"
These colored processions will be met

by huge militant bands of whites who
will complain about the Supreme Court,
curse President Johnson, and passion-
ately demand the maintenance of the
status quo.

Rather than review the history of race
relations in this country and thereby
repeat what has already been said, I
prefer to look at the problem from a
personal viewpoint.

I'm a white, middle-class, Anglo-
Saxon Protestant. I was born and lived
for ten years in Biniiingham, Alabama.
Contrary to what many people might
like to believe, my mommy never took
nie on her knee to teach me how to
hate. I was told to show respect for
older people (even polka-dotted ones),
not to ask girls to go skinny-dippin' and
not to buy popsicles from the colored
ice cream man. I was once given a
good shaking for being rude to our
Negro maid. The word "nigger" always
brought a quick reprimand or slap on
the backside from my red-haired Scotch-
Irish Mom. Our crowd did not spend
twenty-four hours a day re-fighting the
Civil War. Only once can I remember
waiting in a darkened cemetery to scare
the daylights out of an old Negro man.

I have a cousin who runs a huge
farm (we never call it a plantation) in
Mississippi. He frequently carries a
short cropped whip but uses it only on
the horses. My boyhood was not dras-
tically different from any of my friends.
I went to school, teased the girls and
raised hell in general.

Since I was fifteen, I've spent a
healthy amount of time wondering what
it would be like to be a Negro. I've
decided I wouldn't like it. I would be
somewhat irritated if I spent four or
five years of my time and a lot of
money going to school and was then
refused a job because my skin didn't
have the right tint. I would be even
more irritated if refused service at a
restaurant because the owners believe
I'd pollute the place. Being asked to get
the heck out would bug me no end. My
money spends good all over town. The
life of a Negro must certainly be more
difficult than mine from the very be-
ginning.

The Junior College of Broward
County is the first integrated school I've
ever attended. Going to school with
Negro students doesn't bother me at all.
There is no reason that it should. Per-
haps if the situation was reversed and
the enrollment consisted of about 200
whites and 4,300 Negroes I would feel
differently. I might tend to be a little
quieter and to sit at the same table on
the patio every day. I might not be the
"joiner" that I am. I like to think I
wouldn't act that way but I probably
would.

The fact is that Southern people do
not, by nature, hate Negroes. They
never did. It strikes me as ironic that
the disturbances in Harlem and Watts
were defined as socio-economic up-
heavals while the brawls in Birming-
ham and St. Augustine were termed
race-riots. Those who view the South-
erner as three parts hate and one part
grits are just as prejudiced as the people
who think of the Negro as an unwashed
dum-dum.

Fort Lauderdale is hard to categorize.
It's not in tlic South. The South stops
at Orlando. The gold coast, with its
Saturday stew of refugees from the cold,
defies definition in terms of ethnic as-
sociation. I am not proud of Birming-
ham's reputation as a center of hate. I
do realize that "Southern justice" is not
a myth. It's there. It's real. Feed it a
little fuel and it will raise its ugly head
to take a last desperate swat at the new
Negro maturity. But this does not mean
that every citizen of the South should
walk around with a skull and cross-
bones painted on his back. Southern
hospitality and sense of honor are not
myths either. They are an important
part of the moral fibre that sustains the
people of the so-called Bible Belt.

Southern justice and the redneck phi-
losophy are fading and a new South is
rising to take its place. The increased
industrialization along with the Supreme
Court demand for reapportionment mark
the end of rural rule. The new South
is made of steel and history, white col-
lars and more commerce.

The racial war is a malignancy which
infects the soul and slows the heartbeat
of the entire country. John F. Kennedy
saw the problem in a double light. In
addition to being a sickness, he thought
it offered us a chance to mature. In the
clo.se of the 1960 presidential campaign
he spoke of this responsibilit>'. "I re-
mind you of a letter Lincoln wrote to a
friend at the beginning of the Ci\il
War. T know there is a God, and I
know He hates injustice. I see the
.storm coming and I know His hand is
in it. But if He has a place and a part
for me, I believe that I am ready.' Now,
a hundred years later, when the issue is
still freedom or slavery, we know there
is a God, and we know He hates injus-
tice. We see the storm coming and we
know His hand is in it. But if He has
a place and a part for us, I believe that
we are ready."

The generation before ours had a
chance to straighten out the racial mess
and they really bungled the job. Now
it's our turn. Relations between the
races will not impro\e in the courts or
halls of Congress. Understanding must
develop on the streetcorner, at the job
and especially on the campus. President
Kennedy was right; we are ready.

15

I

FROM the moment the Dave Brubeck Quartet began
playing, it was obvious that jazz craftsmanship was ap-
parent. It was also obvious that the Quartet was the
most popular Lyceum of the three presented.

Brubeck did almost everything. He played, talked, made
jokes about jazz improvisations and laughed off a faulty
microphone.

The show opened with "Saint Louis Blues" followed by a
soft and pretty rendition of "Brandenberg Gate." The sax of
Paul Desmond was very smooth and Brubeck played the
piano in almost classical form.

The first part closed with standards like "Tangerine" and
"Take the A Train."

The second part featured some new and old tunes. Brubeck
played "Forty Days," which, he explained, was a new jazz
spiritual. It proved to be interesting and beautiful.

As always, the audience found a favorite, in Joe Morello.
Though it must have been hard with the talents of Brubeck,
Desmond and bass. Gene Wright, on the stage. However,
Morello was the audience winner as he received a standing
ovation following a fantastic drum solo.

The Quartet then played, what most had been waiting for,
the popular "Take Five." It seemed to close the show as
another standing ovation occurred.

With that piano, sax, bass and drums, the evening of jazz
craftsmanship and showmanship, ended.

March 10, 1966

DAVE BRUBECK

I

ihe llorinan Liihoff Glioir

THE Norman Luboff Choir represented the word versa-
tility when they presented the second Lyceum program.
The Choir accomplished this by opening with spirituals
and closing with popular songs they have made famous.

"Hodie natus Christus est" by Sweelinck, opened the show
and the spirituals were the rule of the first half.

There was one interesting comic relief, however, and this
was when the Choir performed "Valise." The song is about
the conversation bits that one can pick up while dancing
around the ballroom. The lyrics and effect were excellent.

Seriousness soon returned when the first part closed with
an extended piece called the "Magnificat," which was just
that — very magnificent.

By the second half, the audience had found a favorite
singer in the low voice of Paul Burgen. He received a stand-
ing ovation during "Deep River."

Dreamland was achieved through such songs as "Laura," a
standard of the Norman Luboff Choir. "Dry Bones" was
another favorite as percussionist Paul Callaghan gave it an
exciting Latin beat, the only accompaniment in the song.

"Skip To My Lou" also received fantastic applause as the
program ended.

Throughout, adults seemed to have "music does still exist"
written on their faces. Students also appeared to enjoy the
variety of spirituals, folk, and popular songs presented by
the versatile Norman Luboff Choir.

Two student journalists, Elle Kurpiewski and AI Kent, inter-
view Maestro Luboff during a relaxing moment backstage.

18

National Players prpsrnt

3^omeo anb Juliet

BEAUTY, versatility and craftsmanship were the key words in this
year's three final Lyceum programs.

The National Players displayed beauty in tlieir presentation of
Shakespeare's immortal Romeo and Juliet. The story, as most know, is the
tragedy of two lovers and the sequence of events that lead up to their
sorrowful deaths.

Chris Sarandon in the role of Romeo was excellent after a slow start.
The handsome young actor portrayed Romeo in the perfect tradition, yet
added depth to the role with his own modernization and youthfulness.

Juliet was also played to perfection by the capable and lovely Halo
Wines. Costuming and lighting were especially effective during her scenes.

Both had their brightest moment during the balcony scene, making it the
highlight of the evening.

However, the play was not always melancholy. One actress and two
actors gave the audience the much needed comic relief in the course of the
play. Juliet's nurse, played by Pat Hecht, was marvelous with her ever
suffering manner. Mercutio, friend of Romeo and Peter, servant to Juliet,
played respectively by Philip LeStrange and Charles Faranda, were also
wonderful in their comic roles.

The play itself, of course, is a classic. Yet, all the actors involved gave it
their own special touches, making the roles believable and alive.

Shakespearean lovers had to agree that the presentation was a memorable
experience.

19

- Tke Sound of

THE Stranahan High School
Auditorium was filled with
the sounds of music Friday
and Saturday, April 1 and 2, as
the Fine Arts Department pre-
sented its spring musical produc-
tion, "The Sound of Music."

The play was double cast and
starred Banu Gibson and Mary

as she waltzes to mass and even
sings in the Abbey.

"Maria, it seems to be the will
of God that you leave us," says
the Mother Abbess, played by
Mrs. Rosemary Schoch. Maria
pleads with the Mother Abbess
not to send her away because she
does want to become a nun very

USIC [_J

portrayed by Dr. Willard DeLara,
chairman of the Fine Arts Depart-
ment, is a very strict man and
runs his house like a battle-
ship. Maria, however, manages to
change all this.

Maria's first innovation into the
von Trapp home is music, in the
form of singing. Maria teaches the

Ann Uhlar as Maria, a young girl
who wanted to become a nun. The
setting for the play was in Austria
in early 1938.

Maria makes a real effort to be
solemn and obedient but she
seems always to be getting into
some sort of mischief. It's not that
Maria doesn't try to be good; on
the contrary, she is a kind and
loving human being. But Maria
has music in her heart and is
oftentimes seen by the other nuns

much. The Mother Abbess assures
Maria that she will only be away
for a short while and that when
she returns to the Abbey she will
then know better what is expected
of her.

"If it is God's will," says Maria.

Maria is sent to the home of
Captain von Trapp, an ex-navy
hero, widower, and father to seven
children. Maria assumes the po-
sition of governess to the seven
von Trapp children. The Captain,

children, who previously were
"little marching machines," how to
sing, something they had never
done before. This also marks the
first time music has been brought
into the von Trapp family since
the death of the Captain's wife.

Maria then teaches the Captain
how to know and love his children
better. By doing so the battleship
atmosphere is removed and is re-
placed by the close-knit family re-
lationship with Maria becoming
the children's "new" mother.

20

FOLK IpSIC . . .
The Msic of Folks

' \Hiir-

21

by Marci Coyle

AND I can't help but wonder where I'm
bound." These words from a song by Tom
Paxton, a contemporary singer and writer
of songs, probably reflect the feelings of this college
generation. Just as the words of over one thousand
songs written by Woody Guthrie, song writer and
singer, reflect the feelings of his generation. Bob
Dylan, another contemporary singer and writer of
songs, says when he hears people call these "folk
songs" he thinks of fat old men. He adds that he
prefers to call them "traditional songs." Dylan com-
ments, "It (traditional music) comes about from
legends, Bibles, plagues and it revolves around
vegetables and death. It is too unreal to die."

The renaissance of the traditional song began
about eight years ago when the Kingston Trio
recorded "Tom Dooley" and sold over a million
copies. This form of music was adopted by a new
generation of song writers to express the feelings of
their restless young audiences.

Although the revival of the traditional songs began
only eight years ago they are a part of something
that has survived for over seven centuries.

Willa Muir, noted authority on traditional ballads,
says, "These songs have a charm ... a slow imper-
sonal rhythm of traditional feelings that carry with
them ancient and long forgotten or half-forgotten
rituals and ceremonies."

When we say folk or traditional music, Jerry
Silverman, musician, says we mean only that music
"north of the Rio Grande and south of the Distance
Early Warning Line." This, in a way is true. Yet,
within the boundaries of the United States, the
Melting Pot of Music from all nationalities, songs
contain elements of the English ballad. East Indies'
calypso beat, the African chant, the Irish reel and
the distinctive characteristics of the Spanish guitar.

Our traditional music began in England centuries
ago with the minstrels who made up and sang bal-
lads and laments that told real stories about love,
hate, birth, death and work.

The ballad is a story put to music. The singer is
simply an impersonal storyteller. There is no coaxing
to get the audience to listen. Miss Muir says, "The
ballad draws its listeners into itself on a current of
assured sympathy."

The ballad has many gaps which the listener must
fill in with his own imagination. Take "Barbara
Allen" for example. No attempt is made to tell the
listener why Miss Allen has rejected the love of
"Sweet William" nor does the ballad tell why she
repents for her hard-heartedness after William is

dead. Still the ballad is a complete story and each
listener fills in the why's and wherefore's in his own
way. Miss Muir adds, "The audience is expected to
have a natural ability to enter directly into any
situation presented."

Stories put to music often involved wit and rid-
dles. It seems that all folks, rich and poor, liked
riddles. The minstrels, always willing to oblige, put
plenty of this kind of wit into their stories. It can be
found today in many of the old ballads. For example,
"I Gave My Love a Cherry." In this song the
speaker asks his love: 'when does a cherry have no
stone, a chicken no bone, a story no end and a baby
no crying? When the minstrel first sang the song,
asking the questions, his listeners were challenged to
think of answers. The witty answers that have come
down to us are as follows: a cherry has no stone
when it is blooming; a chicken, no bone when it is
pipping; a story of love has no end; and when a baby
is sleeping, it is not crying.

The ballads often concerned themselves with en-
counters between a man and a woman and involved
rape and murder, courtship and marriage or un-
faithfulness. "The House Carpenter," for example,
tells the story of an unfaithful wife, married to a
carpenter, who ran away with a wealthy ship owner.
This ballad is a little unusual in that it has a moral.
The unfaithful wife and her lover are drowned when
their ship sinks.

Many of these ballads were written in an era in
history that is billed as having been extremely staid
and proper. Talk of sex was strictly taboo. It is
strange that a majority of these ballads tell of un-
faithful spouses and their lovers. They spare few
details. Probably the best example of this kind of
ballad is "Matty Groves."

Surprisingly enough, the greatest reservoir of
these ballads today is in the Appalachian and Cum-
berland mountains of Kentucky, Tennessee, northern
Georgia, the Carolinas and Virginia. In the very
early days of this country a restless group of men,
still more English than American, pushed west into
these mountains and settled. They brought with
them the old ballads of England. Here they re-
mained, unnoticed and untouched by the rapidly
changing world outside the mountains. Generation
after generation passed on the same old songs almost
unchanged.

Howard Brockway, musicologist, says, "The barter
system and old world folk song literature imported
from the mother country were kept alive. Songs that
died out in the old country a century ago are still

22

sung every day in the Appalachian region." Though
many of the old songs kept the flavor of the old
world like the ballads, "Willie Moore" and "Fenna-
rio," others took on idiosyncrasies that were dis-
tinctly American. The latter were the forerunners of
the American ballads like the ones about Jesse
James and John Fisk, both famous outlaws.

According to many authorities on American
music, the greatest group of contributors to music on
the American scene were the Negroes. Dvorak, a
Bohemian composer, wrote, "In the Negro melodies
of America I discover all that is needed for a great
and noble school of music. They are pathetic, tender,
passionate, melancholy, solemn, religious, bold,
merry, and gay."

Harold Courlander, musicologist, says, "I think
that Negro folk music today is the largest body of
genuine folk music still alive in the United States."

When the African Negro arrived in this country,
two things began to exert influence on him. One was
European music and the other, and greater, was the
Christian religion.

Foremost among the religious traditional songs in
this country is the Negro spiritual. Of these W. E.
B. DuBois wrote, "They (the songs) tell of death,
suffering and invoiced longing toward a truer world
of misty wanderings and hidden ways. . . . Through
all the sorrow of the Sorrow Songs there breathes a
hope — a faith in the ultimate justice in things . . .
that sometime, somewhere men will judge men by
their souls and not by their skins."

The Negro, influenced by the European music
and religion and backed by his own natural musical
talent in turn, influenced American music.

The amount of influence by the Negro on Amer-
ican music is almost astounding. He introduced
various drums, the four and later the five string
banjo and syncopated beats. According to Silverman
syncopation, "Literally ... is putting the ac-cen^ on
the wrong syl-/ab/e. To the guitarist it means playing
a beat where none would ordinarily occur — or, not
playing a beat where one is expected." The Negro

also introduced a new variety of rhythm and the
call and answer format of voodoo chants.

With the tunes from old English ballads, Minstrel
shows, Irish reels, Negro songs and Spanish ballads
the American people have developed their own bal-
lads with characteristics that are definitely American.

Today, once again, people have turned to tra-
ditional music to express themselves.

Pete Seeger says, "Folk music is a living, vibrant
thing again." People like Seeger. Oscar Brand, Jean
Richie, Mississippi John Hurt, Aunt Molly Jackson,
Cisco Houston, Burl Ives, Woody Guthrie, and, more
recently, Tom Paxton, Joan Baez, Judy Collins and
Peter, Paul and Mary, are using the folk idiom to
speak for the people. They sing the old traditional
songs and add many new songs to their lists. The
new songs are being written in the old traditional
manner.

But many singers and writers are using the folk
idiom for protest music. It all started in the spring
of 1965, according to Life magazine, when Bob
Dylan set one of his laments to rock and roll music.
The combination of folk idiom and rock and roll
bands has brought about something called folk-rock.
For example there are: "Like a Rolling Stone" by
Dylan; "Sounds of Silence" by Paul Simon; and
"Eve of Destruction" by P. F. Sloan.

It is plain to see that the history of American
traditional music from the first British ballads in the
New World to their present day off-spring, folk-rock,
is the history and heritage of the country itself. No
American history text could better tell the story of
the settling of the West than "Sweet Betsy from
Pike." No literature book could tell the story of the
cowboys' lonely, dangerous life better than "Old
Chisholm Trail" or "Home on the Range." No
lecture on sociology could better tell the Negroes'
story than "Swing Low Sweet Chariot."

No geography text could be more complete or
more concise than "This Land Is Your Land." And
no one could better express the feelings of present
times than Tom Paxton when he says, "I can't help
but wonder where I'm bound."

23

Joyce MacNeir
makes a
microscopic
urinanalysis.

Mary Ellen Fagadore taking an electrocardio-
gram. Her "patient" is Joan Lee.

i

\frs. Fay Plum, a member of the M

appo:

^•/^

«f

-'■4^

Joyce Calta taking a blood sample.

Program Director, Miss Norma B. Chemok, explains x-ray principles
as Vickie Baker looks on.

THE MEDICAL ASSISTING PROGRAM

BROWARD Junior College boasts
u unique and highly specialized
program which, unfortunately,
is unknown to the majority of students.
This program, the first of its kind in
Florida, is Medical Assisting. Its unique-
ness lies in that it is designed for stu-
dents to be trained to handle both
aspects of medical office procedures, the
administrative and the clinical. In ad-
dition to being the first of its kind in
the state it is also the only program to
be approved by the Florida Medical
Assistants Association. BJC's program is
the product of combined effort, specif-
ically an advisory committee consisting
of physicians, die Medical Assistants As-
sociation, and college personnel.

Miss Norma B. Chernok, Director of
the Medical Assistants at the college,
marveled that "After the Broward
County Medical Society Bulletin an-
nounced the existence of our program
the phone started ringing and it hasn't

tants Advisory Committee, demonstrates
niques.

stopped. Two girls are alread>' working
part-time in doctors' offices."

The demand for Medical Assistants,
both Incalh' and nationalK', is tremen-
dous. At present, thirt>-thrce Broward
students are enrolled and tliis number
doesn't begin to satisfy the demand in
Broward Coimty alone. The Broward
Count)' Medical Assistants Association
and the South Broward County Medical
.Assistants .Association offer scholarships
to a number of promising students.

E\actl\- what makes a promising
Medical .Assivtant? In the words of Miss
Cliernuk, "Tl'.e girls must learn to take
a lot. Therefore, they must like people,
be amiable, ind have a great deal of
patience. In order for a girl to get
tlirough tlie program she must apply
lierself. since constant practical applica-
tion is .ui essential rec|uirement."

.\nd tlien there's enthusiasm plus.
This is definitely not lacking among
Broward's Medical Assisting students,
and theirs is equalled onh- b\' that of
.Miss Chernok.

25

ff

TERMIMTIOI

99

By JIM TUCKER

Based on Hemingway'' s "The Killers^

Illustrated bv Sharon Frost

26

As NICK stepped into the hall and closed the
door behind him, Ole Andreson sat up on
the bed. "So they found me again," he mur-
mured. It was the same old story. No matter where
he went, he could be assured they weren't far behind.

Ole Andreson had been a prizefighter, and a good
one, but he had had reason to make good. It was the
only way to avoid a dreary lifetime at the lumber
mill in his hometown of Anoka Falls, Minnesota. The
town populace was predominantly Swedish and lum-
ber had been their mainstay for generations. Ole's
father was a foreman at Larson's Mill and he had
been proud of the local renown of his son. Ole's
strength was legendary in their small town and for
all his great size and strength he was "quick as a cat."

Ole opened the drawer of the nightstand and re-
moved the timeworn pouch containing his pipe and
tobacco. He methodically stuffed the bowl as the
memories flooded his mind.

He could see in his father a reflection of himself in
the years to come. The hard years at the mill had
made their mark on Gunnar Andreson and it would
not be long before he could no longer meet the
physical demands required of him. Ole wanted more
of life, but his education was scant and lumber was
all he knew. The mill loomed as a barrier which he
could not hurdle.

When the fair came to town few of the residents
of Anoka Falls failed to make an appearance, Ole
being no exception. Competition was keen among the
hardy townsfolk and any test of strength was certain
to draw a crowd. The fair had as one of its members
a former professional boxer with the appropriate title
of Big Mike, who earned his way fighting the local
toughs in the backwater towns. As he began his spiel,
the spectators crowded round the makeshift ring.
Fifty dollars would go to any man who could stay in
the ring for three rounds with Big Mike. The fighter
was no small man and with his knowledge of that
particular art he had yet to be bested.

Big Mike waved a fifty dollar bill as he pleaded
for a combatant. Ole found himself cajoled and
shoved to the edge of the ring and Big Mike, noting
his indecision, hastily pulled his intended victim
through the ropes. As Mike laced on the big sixteen
ounce gloves, Ole had made up his mind to stay
away from him. The big fighter was a rugged veteran
and Ole had no intention of exchanging blows.

When the bell sounded Mike rushed toward Ole
with all the stealth of an enraged buffalo; his hveli-
hood depended on his ability to beat a man senseless
in the brief span of three rounds. He let fly a round-
house right only to find Ole far out of reach. He
grunted and turned sharply to face Ole's new posi-

tion. Mike crowded close and made two perfunctory
jabs with his left, his right cocked for an opening.
But again Ole faded, and his bobbing, weaving form
offered but a small target. The first round passed in
this manner, Ole feinting and retreating, never
dropping his hands to allow the aggressive Mike a
breach in his defense. Big Mike perspired heavily as
his elusive quarry retired to the opposite corner.

Mike had been clumsy in his eagerness to finish
Ole; he now studied his opponent with a grudging
respect. The big Swede had the grace of a cat and
his sedate manner belied his powerful frame. He had
thus far been so confident of his agility that he had
not as yet preferred a single blow. Mike seized upon
this as the key to his defeat. He must anger Ole,
forcing him into the role of aggressor to destroy
his poise.

With the dull clatter of the bell signaling the start
of round two, Mike began to exhibit the attributes of
his trade. He circled about Ole and cautiously com-
menced a series of short, telling jabs. Mike well knew
the effectiveness of the jab; while not a lethal blow it
is irritating and painful. As he began to follow the
pattern of Ole's movements, a cut appeared over his
eye. Ole brushed fruitlessly at the steady flow ob-
scuring his vision and Mike immediately caught him
witli a hard, glancing right to the jaw. Ole staggered,
and off balance, toppled to the canvas.

Ole was stung and his pride was hurt. In his anger
he jumped to his feet and threw a wild right at his
stodgy foe, heedless of the nine-second count to clear
his head. The blow sailed harmlessly over Mike's
head and he countered with a stiff left to the mid
section. Ole doubled over gasping for air, and only
the bell saved him from a barrage of killer punches.

Ole remembered little of the third round. He knew
his agility would not stave off the eager pro and his
only chance was his own strength. He was calm and
determined as he moved into the center of the ring,
avoiding the more vicious of Mike's punches as he
lapsed into his opponent's habits of the previous
round.

Mike had again become eager and his caution
abated as he resorted to the big punch in hopes of
ending the fight. Ole was continually slowing down
and Mike harassed the gaping wound over his eye.

Few spectators saw the blow that ended the fight.
Mike had worked Ole into a comer and landed three
rapid jabs, anticipating the follow-up. As he drew
back his already poised right, Ole seized that moment
to begin the short arc of a vicious hook. It caught
Mike squarely under the chin and sent him heavily
to the canvas.

Ole stirred in his reveries and relighted his pipe.

27

The sweet memory of his first victory was still vivid
in his mind. He made no attempt to stem the tide of
his recollections.

Mike, far from unhappy at his demise, had been
unaccountably elated. It puzzled Ole only briefly as
Mike was quick to make his reasons clear. He had
been in the fight game for the better portion of his
life and he had never seen a man with more inherent
potential as a fighter. He wanted to take Ole to
Chicago and train him for the ring. Mike had been a
good fighter in his own right and he knew the
ropes; more important, he knew the right people.

Ole had nothing to lose. He readily accepted
Mike's proposition and within the week they were
settled in Chicago. At the very worst he would again
face the mills he had left behind. At best he would
have within his grasp things for which he had never
dared hope.

The ensuing months passed quickly and with a
determination born of the will to succeed Ole relent-
lessly pursued the arduous training schedule. Mike,
too, was unsparing of himself in his capacity as
trainer and manager. True to his word, he found the
backers and capital necessary for the months of
training. His prowess in the ring proved inxaluable
as he also served as Ole's sparring partner. He left
Ole with many a jarring memory, emphatically driv-
ing his lessons home in a manner unlikely to be
forgotten

After the first few bouts Mike had difficulty find-
ing suitable opponents for his skillful protege. While
he was leery of pushing Ole too fast, he was also
aware of the danger of his becoming overconfident.
His first bouts had been no contest as he simply
overpowered his opponents. Mike wanted better
fighters who would give Ole the experience he could
only acquire with a stranger. Much can be learned
from a good sparring partner; but fighters develop
various habits and movements that, given time and
familiarity, can be read. The word had gotten round
that Mike's man was no trifling pug and few man-
agers of the better fighters were willing to risk a loss
to a nobody.

Mike's dilemma was solved by the sensationalism
of the press. A few sportswriters had "somehow"
gotten wind of the new giant and had come to the
gym to watch him work out. Ole's size and obvious
skill were impressive and after hearing of Mike's dif-
ficulty arranging a match, the writers scrambled
back to their typewriters to beat out a story of the
backwood "Paul Bunyan" that no one dared fight.
Mike now faced quite another problem as the
publicity-starved fighters wanted a crack at the
presses' new hero. He arranged bouts cautiously,

attempting to schedule them in a gradually ascending
order comparable to Ole's development. He needn't
have worried; Ole was more than a match for the
best of them.

The big one was on tap. Lonnie Wilson, the fourth
ranked heavyweight contender, wanted to beef up
his position with a win over the new sensation. It
was fast, too fast and Mike didn't like it. Wilson was
no newcomer but Mike was sure Ole could beat him.
It was a big break but Mike knew there was more
behind it than Wilson was willing to disclose. It took
money and influence to get into the big time and
Mike had thus far made no commitments. But they
couldn't pass up this chance. The bout was scheduled
and Mike decided to play it by ear.

One week remained before the fight. Mike had
tried several times to tell Ole, but the words
wouldn't come. He felt old, and sick as he watched
Ole's lithe, glistening form make an art of the mo-
notonous ritual at the heavy bag. The odds were
three to one on Wilson, but the smart money was on
Ole. Wilson was going to dive.

The fight was over. Wilson was out in the third,
right on schedule. But he came around later than
planned. Mike had not told Ole of the fi.x and he
fought to win. It had taken all of Wilson's skill and
experience to stay alive until the third round and he
did not intentionally walk into the crushing blow
that clouded his brain. Mike had made no deals, but
now he was in. He had gotten the break and the
purse; it was only a matter of time before he would
be called to do his part.

He didn't wait long. Tony Scarpetti, manager for
number three on the heavyweight ladder, paid Mike
a visit. Ole was to drop the next one to Lowell,
Scarpetti's man. The volatile Mike made it clear there
was to be no fix and threw Scarpetti bodily into
the street.

Seven long months had passed since the Wilson
fight and Mike had not been able to arrange a
match of any significance. The doors were locked to
outsiders and the key had been tossed roughshod
into the street.

Ole paced the length of his tiny room. Mike had
told him the details to this point and he found the
politics of the fight game to be far more intricate
than his maneuvers in the ring. But Mike had not
told him the full story and Ole began fitting the
remaining pieces of the puzzle into place. One point
still eluded him. Ten months of idleness had ended
when Mike scheduled a bout with Lowell. Ole did
not know the circumstances surrounding the reconcil-
iation, but of this he was certain — Mike was ada-
mant in his denial of any fix. Why, then, had Mike's

28

dejection increased as the fight date pressed closer?

Mike had worked with him as never before and
Ole was honed to razor sharpness. A few moments
prior to ring time, Mike said a curious tiling. "Just
remember, Ole, win or lose, nobody beats the
system."

Lowell was tough. Nine rounds had passed with
neither man taking a fall. Ole was possibly the better
boxer and Mike figured tlie point spread, though
slight, stood in Ole's favor. His strategy for the tenth
and final round was basically defensive. Lowell had
taken the opposite tack; he needed at least a knock-
down. But he had not reckoned on Ole's stamina.
He continually danced and weaved, the e\cr-darting
jab keeping Lowell at bay while awaiting a careless
lunge. In desperation he made this final error and
the deafening roar from the crowd paid tribute to the
skill and power of the triumphant combatant. Ole
had indeed proven himself a veritable Paul Bunyan.

Mike steered him through the surging throng
toward the locker room, answering the myriad of
questions launched by the press while Ole showered
and dressed. When Ole appeared, Mike allowed a
scant few minutes for the pictures and interviews
required of a new hero. Once outside they jostled
their way through the thinning crowd and Mike
pressed something into Ole's hand. It was an airline
ticket. He had already packed Ole's bags and sent
them ahead. As he pushed Ole into the waiting cab,
he hurriedly explained that he would handle the
press while Ole spent a few quiet days at home. It
was the last Ole was to see of his friend and
benefactor.

Three restless days passed as Ole tried vainly to
contact Mike. To allay his fears he crowded his mind
with trivialities. He drove to nearby Duluth to pick
up several purchases he had ordered for his family.
The heavy Saturday traffic forced him to walk
several blocks to the department store. As he ap-
proached a large newsstand he was struck motion-
less; his eyes riveted to the cold black print. The
stark headlines of a Chicago paper declared Mike's
posthumous arrival into the fight game's big time —
"OLE ANDBESON'S MANAGEB FOUND DEAD."
The starded new.sboy gaped open-mouthed as Ole
bellowed his rage, tearing to shreds the affirmation
of his apathy.

The bitter memory no longer roused Ole to fur\'
but remained to prod his conscience, sticking indeli-
cately in his craw. He recalled the futility of the long
hours with the police; he could tell them nothing
they didn't already know. An investigation of the
'Wilson fight was to be held but there were few clues
leading to Mike's murderer. He was returning from

one of the lengthy interrogations and upon rounding
the corner of his apartment building, he noticed a
light flicker in his third floor apartment. A man
stood alongside a car parked across the street,
directly in front of the apartment house. In the faint
illumination cast by a distant street lamp he could
make out the coarse features of a man he know only
as Lafe. He was a brawler, a punchy fighter \\ho
sold his services to the highest bidder. Ole ducked
behind the safety of the building, flattening himself
against the dull, craggy bricks. His breath came in
short, harsh gasps while his mind raced. Mike's
curious reference to the system echoed in his head.

And, "This guy, what's his name, Nick — yeah,
Nick Adams," had just left his room after telliug him
they were here. Nick said there were two of them.
Max and Al, and they had waited for him at Henry's
lunchroom where he usually ate supper.

"Okay, Mike, maybe I can't beat the system, but
I'm through running. I won't make it easy for 'em."

He crossed the room and opened the worn suit-
case. He found the box of cartridges and tossed them
onto the bed as he rummaged through his sparse
belongings for the revober. The door burst \'iolentl\-
open and Ole stared down the unrelenting barrel of
a shotgun. The empty pistol hung uselessly in his
hand as he glanced toward the cartridges on the
bed. Al followed his gaze and grinned.

"Hello, 'Bunion!' You're a real loser. You ain't
never lost a fight but this time you're gonna' take
the long count."

At that moment Mrs. Bell, the landlady, was
mounting the stairs with her iron perched atop a
stack of linen. When she spied Al standing in the
doorway she dropped her bundle, and the iron
clattered down the steps.

Al realized his folly even as he spun toward the
noise. Ole leaped toward him as the hurtling pistol
slammed into the killer's skull. He dragged Al's inert
form onto the bed and bound his hands with a neck-
tie. Mrs. Bell had gone for the police.

"That was too close," breathed Ole. He slipped the
chain-lock into place and took a position in the far
corner, the side on which the door was hinged. If
die door were not opened wide he would be ob-
scured from the \'iew of anyone standing in the
doorway.

He crouched in the corner loading the pistol and
the minutes ticked by. "Where are those cops?" he
wondered. Al rusded on the bed. Ole cursed him
softly and he was still.

Ole trained the pistol on the door, his breath cut
short. He heard footsteps clammering up the ancient
stairs.

29

"It's me, Mr. Andreson, Mrs. Bell, and the police." trigger. Ole's once graceful form plummeted gro-

Ole breathed a sigh of relief and hastened for the tesquely to the floor,

door. He slipped back the chain and turned the ;;The old woman," cried Al.

, rx,. 1 r^ -1 ■ 1 . r- 11 ■ 1 Don t worrv, snapped Max, tugging on the bind-

knob. The door tlew open, strikmg him full m the . , ^. ,.„, . ,^ . , .^, ^, ^ ,

'■ ° mg necktie. She aint going noplace with that lump

face. He staggered backward, stumbling over the on her head. Let's get out of here."

still opened bag. Max stepped into the room leveling Mrs. Bell's feeble cries went unheard as Ole's

the shortened barrel of a shotgun and squeezed the substance spread darkly around him.

Recognition Night 1966

HIGHLIGHT PRESENTATIONS

Outstanding Interest Club Phi Beta Lambda

Outstanding Service Club Circle K

Outstanding Club of the Year Circlettes

Club Leadership Award Bob Joynes

Outstanding Individual Service Clarkia Dennis

Honorable Mention Charles Drago, Ray CafoIIa

Special Service Award Beverly DriscoII

Freshman Woman of the Year Jean Holder

Honorable Mention Jan Souza

Freshman Man of the Year Bob Brevves

Honorable Mention Larry Ellis

Sophomore Woman of the Year Sharon Roesch

Honorable Mention Joan Nugent, Joyce Leagan

Sophomore Man of the Year Matthew Faison

Honorable Mention Terry Van Der Heyden

30

►

»

yiiu Kv* heem fafhifiWLTT -f ben^i-tj

T^Afi Up)

Canmep ovTI

li

I

/^*vv^r »

EIPP

*-'W«ll, io mucir^ •f-e,n the sfCll f-^sf- "

You got a letter from the

president of the college.

What happened?

Omigi
I've flur

Sl'fo O^ tile Xok Tr^minq

./.

C »>V 5'» i" ~

l£_2_ _

SZ" Employment

JUNIOR COLLEGE

Mflt" fee- iiHe to jet ^/onj wiM "Jvlfe

S«n<f Z.B.ri. CdrJ ft) Tvnier
Colir^c of B»Twar<| Covnty, p«\v»o,

^/^y\yoNe hoWinj ofF»c<? of
Supenr\t<'n«lent oP Public Xn-
st "auction nef^ not ^PfV'

f^'

?EI

/r>.

r-^'

/4c/-fa»

_z:r At^i/ifT

w

low express your pA</o£op|iy we//^ bi/T. , . ''

or maybe they found
out about the frat
orgy I went to . . .

I guess I'll be
thrown out of school

and then I'll be

drafted. Off to

Viet Nam.

Well, I suppose I'd
better open it . . .

"He wants me to buy

an encylclopedia."
"Well, isn't that nice!"

Wei-

■PJl

1 i^

'>),

:v

it'

^

■^:vL«r>

?r.»:

^V^^

;^^-

M J^

-w''.\r*-'.>'

Candidates for the
Associate in Arts Degree

Balsera, Rolando M.

Florida Atlantic University
Geography

Bardsley, Ann C.

University of Florida
Journalism

Bird, Barbara L.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Bohannon, Patsy L.

Florida Atlantic University
English

Brand, Wynnifred G.

Florida Atlantic University
English

Brenf, Barbara J.

Florida Atlantic University
Art

Carter, Sarah C.

Florida Atlantic University

Education

Carveth, Constance S.

University of South Florida
Education

Chapman, Diane E.

Florida Atlantic University
History

Conti, Charlotte A.

Undecided

Cronin, Arleen B.

University of Florida
Spanish

Davey, David R.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Doetsch, Kathleen A.

University of South Florida
Elementary Education

Dyer, Carolann

Force, Sandra L.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Grass, Joe B.

Florida Atlantic University

Greenfield, Carol F.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Grove, Nelda

Florida Atlantic University
Music

Hansen, Cheryl F.

Florida State University
Physical Education

Jolly, Barbara J.

Florida Atlantic University
Elementary Education

Kissinger, Donald C,

Leagan, Joyce A.

Florida State University
Education

Mack, Nancy J.

Balsera, Rolando M.

Bird, Barbara L.

Bohannon, Patsy L.

Carveth, Constance S.

Chapman, Diane E.

Conti, Charlotte A.

Doetsch, Kathleen A.

Dyer, Carolann

Force. Sandra L.

Greenfield, Carol F.

Grove, Nelda

Jolly, Barbara J.

36

Madden, John E.

Florida Atlantic University
Accounting

McGoldrick, Dolores F.

University of Florida
Education

Metiger, Gary J.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Morrison, John W.

Nugent, Joan E.

Undecided

Palmer, Donna E.

University of Florida
Nursing

Patrick, Marguerite M.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Pinder, Paula D.

Carson-Nevi/man
Education

Pryor, Sandra L.

Florida State University
Education

Ready, Terry L.

Florida Atlantic University
Physical Education

Roesch, Sharon H.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Ruden, Elizabeth N.

Florida Atlantic University
Language

Sansone, Cheryl L.

Schmidt, Vicki A.

University of Florida
Education

Schulman, Barry H.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Shasek, Judith A.

University of Florida
Education

Smith, Jolene A.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Stanton, Nancy M.

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Susik, Carolann

Tabbert, Suzanne K.

University of South Florida
Elementary Education

Thibedore, Gilbert W.

University of Notre Dame
Language

Vernacchio, Beverly L.

University of Florida
Education

Watson, Michael R.

Florida Atlantic University
Accounting

Zeiss, Sarah H.

University of Florida

Leagan, Joyce A.

Morrison, John W.

Nugent, Joan E.

Palmer, Donna E.

Patrick, Marguerite M.

Pinder. Paula D.

Ready, Terry L

Roescfi, Sharon H.

Ruden. Elizabeth N.

Schmidt, Vicki A.

Schulman, Barry H.

Shasek, Judith A.

37

Smith, Jolene A.

Tabbert, Suzanne K.

Vernacchio, Beverly L.

Watson, Michael R.

Zeiss, Sarah H.

Candidates for the
Associate in Science Degree

Bacon, David C.

Florida Atlantic University
Business Administration

Barker, Craig S.

Florida Atlantic University
Business Administration

Bassett, Samuel H.

University of Florida
Architecture

Berg, Walter F.

Florida Atlantic University
Accounting and Incorporate Law

Bieberbach, George

Black, Joy E.

Florida Atlantic University
Elementary Education and Biology

Brestel, Eric P.

Florida Atlantic University
Pre-Med and Biology

Brownlee, James P.

University of Florida
Pre-Medicine

Bundy, Paul R. Jr.

Undecided

Carver, James

University of Florida
Chemistry

Bacon, David C.

Bassett, Samuel H.

Black, Joy E.

Bundy, Paul R. Jr.

Carver, James

Grossman, Bruce R. Jr.

38

chapman, Neil C.

Florida State University
Physics and Math

Clark, David W.

Coveney, John D.

Florida Atlantic University
Ocean Engineering

Crossman, Bruce R. Jr.

Florida Atlantic University
Pre-Mediclne

Day, Donald M.

Florida Atlantic University
Business Administration

Dennis, Clarkia L.

Florida Atlantic University
Chemistry

Dietrich, Frederick F. Jr.

University of Florida
Wild Life Management

Dollar, Carol A.

Carson New/man College
Home Economics

Dooley, Refer C.

Florida State University
Business

Dugan, Marcia A.

University of Florida
Education

Epple, Steven W.

University of Florida
Architecture

Faison, Matthew J.

University of Florida
Journalism

Fowler, Dorothy M.

Florida State University
Accounting

Fox, Thomas S.

Florida State University
History

Frazier, Thomas H.

University of Florida
Business Administration

Giannontonio, Joseph J.

Florida Atlantic University
Physical Education

Giordano, John

Florida Atlantic University
Business Administration

Godin, Thomas J.

Green, Gary

East Carolina College
Commercial Art

Gunzenhauser, Gail L,

Undecided

Guthrie, Ward

Hamm, Helen R.

University of Florida
Education

Hamman, Thomas R.

Florida Atlantic University
Accounting

Hancock, Jane H.

University of Florida
Medical Technology

Day, Donald M.

Dennis, Clarkia L.

Dollar, Carol A.

Dugan, Marcia A.

Faison, Matthew J.

Fox, Thomas S.

Frazier, Thomas H.

Giannontonio, Joseph J,

Green, Gary

Hamm, Helen R.

Heiges, Bonnie L.

Klein, Robert L. Jr.

39

Hansell, Ross C.

Florida Atlantic University
Investments
Heiges, Bonnie L.

Florida Atlantic University
Elementary Education
Hurley, Harry T.
Iwaniec, Theora

Florida Atlantic University
Vocational Guidance
Klein, Robert L. Jr.

Florida Atlantic University
Chemistry
Kulpa, Kathrin R.

Florida State University
Physical Education
Langston, Charles R., Ill
Leathervt/ood, John E., Ill
University of Miami
English
LIndeman, Bonnie J.
University of Florida
Architecture
Little, Judy
Lov/ry, Alice D.

Florida Atlantic University
Art Education
Lov/ry, Stephen, R.
Lundgren, Edward A.
University of Florida
Dentistry
Marant, Patricia L.

Florida State University
Medical Technology
Marino, Susette A.

Florida Atlantic University
Elementary Education
May, Victoria J.

Appalachian State Teachers' College
Mazur, Andrew J.
McArdle, Donald R.
McEwen, David W.
University of Georgia
Education
McFetridge, Bonnie M.
University of Florida
Education
McTague, Patricia L.

Florida State University
Meade, Kenneth W.

Undecided
Meehan, William T.
University of Florida
Electrical Engineering
Menees, Thomas

Florida Atlantic University
Psychology
Montagnari, Anthony A.
University of Florida
Drafting
Moore, Timothy R.

Florida Atlantic University
Business Administration
Moses, William E.
Muller, William F.

Florida Atlantic University
Business Administration
Mullis, Donald L.

Florida Atlantic University
Pre-AAedical
Mulkey, Jerry D.
Muscatell, Ralph P.

Undecided
Neff, Frank M.
Oddo, Antoinette P.

Leatherwood, John E., Ill Lutidgren, Edward A.

Marant, Patricia L.

IVlay, Victoria J.

McArdle, Donald R.

McEwen, David W.

McFetridge, Bonnie M.

McTague, Patricia L.

Meade, Kenneth W.

Montagnari, Anthony A.

Mullis, Donald L.

Pawl, Donna J.

40

Pawl, Donna J.

Florida Atlantic University

Business Education
Pawlowski, James
Pfanner, Jonita K.
Pickelt, Phillip E.

Florida State University

Mathematics

Pildner, Billie A.

Baptist Memorial Hospital, Memphis

Medical Librarian
Reuss, Joseph S.
Rice, Sharon K.
Robinson, April I.
Roof, Carl J.
Saltus, Gary L.

Florida Atlantic University

Pre-Medical
Sepielli, Russell J.

University of Miami

Speech Therapy
Shaughnessy, Thomas H.

University of Florida

Architecture
Smith, James W.

University of South Florida

Electronics
Smith, Roy G., Jr.

University of Florida

Engineering
Snyder, Robert I.

Florida Atlantic University

Systems Analysis Administration
Stary, Roger R.

Florida Atlantic University

Business Administration
Steadman, Jerry W.

United States Navy
Strathie, Paul W.

Florida State University

Industrial Arts
Stringfellow, Stephen K.

University of South Florida

Electrical Engineering
Sundberg, Paul V.

University of Florida

Mechanical Engineering
Swanson, Walter C.

University of Florida

Education
Travers, Rita L.

Florida State University

Business
Tumlin, Thomas M.

University of Florida

Engineering
Vathauer, Karen I.

University of Florida

Education
Van Buskirk, Lawrence H.

University of Miami

Accounting
Vayda, Daniel J.

Florida State University

Physical Education
Vordenberg, Dona L.

University of Florida

Pharmacy
Warner, Carol A.

Florida State University

Physical Education
Wilkinson, Tracy L.

Florida Atlantic University

Mathematics
Winkelhake, Lawrence R,
Zegel, Marylin J.

University of Florida

Mathematics

Pildner. Billie A.

Robinson, April

Salfus, Gary L.

Snyder, Robert I.

Strathie, Paul W.

Stringfellow, Stephen K.

Sundberg, Paul V.

Swanson, Walter C.

Tumlin. Thomas M.

Vathauer, Karen I.

Vordenberg. Dona L.

Wilkinson, Tracy L.

41

Candidates for the
Associate in Science Degree
in Business Administration

Dahl, Linda L.
Graves, Donald E.
Splittgerber, Joy A.
Wigglesworth, Sherri E.

Dahl, Linda L.

Graves, Donald E.

Wigglesworth, Sherri E.

Candidates for the
Associate in Science Degree
in Nursing

Boyd, Margaret T.
Brown, Joyce F.
Bruderhausen, Gail M.
Carlisle, Judith A.
Cecil, Mavis M.
Davies, Joan H.
DeTorres, Catherine A.
Galbraith, Judith E.
Kimball, Connie K.
Lynch, Stella A.
McCarroll, Kitty A.
McDougall, Patricia M.
McKay, Mary J.
McQuigg, Elizabeth L.
Moore, Sylvia B.
Mullejiax, Marjorie L.
Pasquale, Madeline R.
Phillips, Mary E.
Riddle, Sara R.
Schultz, Bernadine M.
Spangter, Bette J.
Steele, Nora
Tapperson, Sigrid
Walsh, Elaine

Brown, Joyce F.

Bruderhausen, Gail M.

Cecil, Mavis M.

McKay, Mary J.

Moore, Sylvia

Mullenax, Marjorie L.

Tapperson, Sigrid

Walsh, Elaine

42

DECEMBER GRADUATES
Associate in Arts Degree

Brackebush, Jane L.
Carter, Jimmy T.
Fuller, Alva M.

Guido, Patricia A.

Florida Atlantic University
Elementary Education

Hanson, Cheryl I.

Undecided

llowiecki, Katherine
Johnson, Michael J.

Lopez, Sylvia

Florida State University
Drama

Lorch, Lynne C.

McQuade, Brian J.

Florida Atlantic University
Social Science

Murawski, Elaine T.

Florida State University
Elementary Education

Phelan, Gladys J.

Scott, Nancy A.

Snyder, Richard L.

Florida State University
Social Science

Suguitan, James J.

Florida Atlantic University
English

Smith, William R.

West, Eleanor F.

Florida Atlantic University
Art

Fuller, Alva M.

Johnson. Michael J.

Lopez, Sylvia

McQuade, Brian J.

Murawski. Elaine T, Snyder, Richard L,

West. Eleanor F.

43

Associate in Science Degree

Beimly, Kenneth Gordon

Florida State University
Advertising

Blackwood, Thomas Burdette

University of Florida
Accounting

Bowman, Robert Lee, Jr.

Brand, Richard Edward

Florida State University
Business

Branner, Wilh'am Paul

Undecided

Brandt, George Paul

University of Florida

Burt, Charles G.

University of Florida

Campbell, Alice Rae

Florida Atlantic University
Education

Christen, Carol Lynne

Ohio State University
Education

Coleman, Ronald Edward

University of Miami

Coles, Nancy Jane

Florida State University
International Relations

Cooper, Albert Edward

Dahlhofer, Gary Robert

Florida Atlantic University
Marketing

DeBlasio, Nicholas George

Florida Atlantic University
Accounting

Durgy, William Ralph

Foster, George Steven

Florida Atlantic University
Business

Franks, James W.

Florida Atlantic University

Gayeski, Martin Joseph
Gordon, Sharon Boozer

Gunter, Gary Wallis

Florida State University
Hotel-Motel Administration

Blackwood, Thomas Burdette Christen, Carol Lynne

Coleman, Ronald Edward

Dahlhofer, Gary Robert

DeBlasio, Nicholas George Durgy, William Ralph

Gordon, Sharon Boozer

Halsey, Richard Bruce

Florida State University

Business Administration
Harper, Karen MarMes

Florida Atlantic University
Holden, Robert James

Florida Atlantic University

Accounting
Howard, Thomas William

Florida Atlantic University
Johnston, Thomas Anthony

University of Florida

Journalism
Kite, Robert Bernat

University of Miami
March, Steven John
McLellan, William Francis

University of Florida

Lavi/
Midzalkowski, Joseph Harold

Florida Atlantic University
Moore, Michael Munroe
Rawe, James Herbert
Sander, Woodrow W., Jr.
Schneider, George Jesse

University of Florida
Shetler, John Quentin

Florida Atlantic University

Education
Shull, Judy Jane

Florida Atlantic University

Education
Shuttleworth, Thomas Brady, I

Florida Atlantic University
Smith, Lois Mae
Southard, Gail Louella
Stackpole, Margaret Ann

Florida Atlantic University
Strickland, Janice

Florida Atlantic University

Education
Thixton, Robert Gerald

Florida Atlantic University
Vitello, Frank Dominick

Florida Atlantic University

History-Political Science
West, Loise Claire
White, John Jay

Associate in Science in
Business Administration

Harper, Karen Marlies Midzalkowski. Joseph Harold

Rawe, James Herbert

Schneider, George Jesse

Williams, Terry R.

Smith, Lois Mae

Southard, Gail Louella

Associate in Science in
Data Processing

Martin, James R.

Associate in Science in
Law Enforcement

Fletcher, James M.

Florida State University
Law Enforcement
La Graves, Walter F., Jr.

Florida Atlantic University
Law Enforcement
Employed by the Pompano Beach
Police Department

Fletcher, James M.

'\

Illustrated by
John Leatherwood

46

When, Oh God, shall man

Stand beside his fellow man

And call him brother?

How long will it be

Till the chains of the bonded

Fall loosely away

Into rust and broken decay?

Why have we fallen

Into a den of fools

And sold our sacred souls

For power, for riches, and for fame?

Life is but a twilight of existence

Which decides our fate eternal;

Are we so blind. Dear God,

As to let it slip from our grasp

Without capturing one moment of its beauty?

We shut our ears

To the song of a bird,

And close our eyes

To the majesty of a mountain.

Thy gifts to us mean nothing;

Thy very presence goes unheeded;

Why, Oh God, is it so?

Why do we spend our precious time

Engulfed in self vanity?

And, yet, it is thought

That in death we can escape

From this society of void and uncertainty.

But yet. Almighty God, what is death?

A mere gate; a lonely bridge

Thrown across the path of existence;

It is but a boundary of separation

Between life and eternity.

A single moment of occurrence

Which transports us to endlessness;

An endlessness which is decided

By deeds done in a twilight of life.

But, Oh God, we shall go on;

On and on with our greed, our lust.

Our sin and our wars.

Marching ever onward to the brink

Of our own destruction;

For man shall be destroyed

By man's own being.

Oh weep, weep for Thy children

Gracious and All Powerful God,

For we know not what it is

To weep for ourselves.

But we go on preaching

Pure ideals of humanity,

And fail to accomplish our goals.

Oh God, would that it were not so;

But be it so and so be it.

For it is that which we call our destiny.

47

SEAHORSES

Bill Mandevllle lays one In.

And richly deserved they are. The Seahorse cagers
finished with a 12-8 record o\'erall and a conference
mark of 6-2, good enough for second place and a
berth in the state tournament.

Good balance and a strong bench keyed Coach
Clinton Morris' charges to the best season ever en-
jo>'ed by a JCBC five, \\'hich included a win over
arch-rival and nationally ranked Miami-Dade JC.

The season opener was an omen of the good
things to come as the Seahorses smashed Florida
Keys JC, 107-74. Kenny Kulp led the way with 28
points. Bryn Jones continually stole rebounds from
the taller Wreckers and Marv Hodges' fine floor
game kept the opponents off balance.

Traveling to the west coast, the JCBC quintet met
disaster in the form of Manatee JC, losing 59-92. The
Lancers' superior height and shooting simply over-
whelmed the 'Horses, who just couldn't seem to get
their offense moving.

They say you can't keep good men down and the
Seahorses proved it the following night with an
88-78 win over Edison JC. Kulp was high scorer
again with 25 points. Freshmen Bill Mandeville and
John Gordon also played a fine game, contributing
18 and 17 points, respectively.

Over the Christmas holidays, the Seahorses jour-
neyed to Columbus, Ga., for a tournament. In the
opening round, the JCBC five faced the host team,
Columbus JC. Leading at halftime, the 'Horses ran
cold the second half, losing 79-84. Kenny Kulp re-
mained the Seahorses' most prolific scorer with a
game-high 25 points. In the consolation game, Brow-
ard faced another Florida team, Gulf Coast JC.
They also proved unfriendly, stifling the 'Horses'
offense in winning, 83-68. Kulp, with 15 points, and

48

Steve Cairns with 10, were the only 'Horses to hit
double figures.

Next the Seahorses traveled to DeLand where the\-
romped over the Stetson JV team, 96-73, in what
Coach Morris described as their best game all season.
Ken Kulp, John Gordon, and Ste\e Cairns led tlie
way with their fine all-aroimd play.

Another road trip found the Broward quintet in
West Palm Beach blasting Palm Beach JC, 103-65.
Kenny Kulp's scoring (22 points) and Rr\n Jones'
rebounding paved the victory road.

The Seahorses found things a little tougher do\\ n
Miami way, falling before arch-rival and the state's
number one team, Miami-Dade JC. John Gordon
played one of his finest games, finishing with 31
points, but to no avail as the Seahorses absorbed
their fourth loss, 122-99.

The 'Horses home season opened with the Stetson
JV team coming to town looking for revenge. It was
nowhere to be found as the Seahorses continued their

High in the air, Bobby Kennedy hooks for two.

Bryn Jones dribbles off a tight screen.

domination of Stetson, 98-81. Trailing at half time,
the 'Horses exploded out of the locker room to score
58 points in the final half. Seahorse Captain Bryn
Jones paced the win with 24 points and excellent
rebounding.

That old nemesis. Manatee JC, popi^ed up again,
bouncing Broward to the tune of 60-54. Once again.
Lancer size and defense pro\'ed too much for the
boys from Broward.

The weekend wasn't a total loss as the Edison JC
Bucs were sorry they ever visited the Stranahan
gym. Still stinging from their loss to Manatee, the
'Horses grabbed the lead early and were ne\er
headed the rest of the game. The fast break sizzling
and their defense choking e\ery Edison spurt, the
JCBC five coasted to a 104-81 win. Kenn\- Kulp led
the scoring with 21 points.

The next weekend saw the Seahorses entertaining
Indian Ri\er JC and Florida Ke\s JC. Indian River
proved to be rude guests, pulling out a 102-98 \ic-
tory in the final minutes. Led b\- Kulp's 35 points
and Ste\-e Cairns' 19, the JCBC fi\e pla>ed fast,
aggressi^•e ball, only to ha\e four final-second Indian
Ri\er points put the whammy on them.

49

Surrounded by Falcons, Steve Hall soars to grab the rebound.

John Gordon slips between Falcons for two points.

I

Florida Keys was much nicer, bowing 125-84.
Looking for a possible state tournament bertli, the
'Horses completely demolished the Wreckers" attack
with a tough defense and hot shooting. Kulp was
again high scorer with 24 points.

The Universit)' of Miami Freshmen were the Sea-
horses' next victim, 90-89. Underdogs all the way, the
JCBC cagers matched Miami point for point, winning
it on Steve Cairns' final second foul shot. Cairns and
John Gordon tied for scoring honors, with 22 points
apiece.

The next evening saw tlie Seahorses chince a
state tournament berth with a 104-85 re\'enge \'ictory
over Indian Ri\'er JC. Ahead by a slim margin at
halftime, the 'Horses spent the second half widening
the gap over the hapless Pioneers. John Gordon, in
addition to his fine rebounding, led the Broward
cagers with 34 points.

The Seahorses' next opponent was Miami-Dade

JC. Ranked numlier one in the state and among the
top ten national!), the Falcons were heavy favorites
o\er their supposedh' weaker arch-rivals. Such was
not the case as tiie Seahorses surprised the Falcons,
96-92, in o\ertime. The game was a fjnestion of
wliether or not the Seahorses could keep up with
the Falcons. Ne\'er more than six points behind, the
'Horses slowly crept closer, tying the score 82-82 as
time ran out. The oxcrtime period belonged to little
Marvin Hodges. The 511 guard sank five of six
free throws and a field goal to put the stopper on the
Miami attack. Gordon led the scoring w ith 2.'3 points,
but Hodges' 9 points won the game.

Still up in the air from the win over Miami-Dade,
the Broward fi\'e was rjuickly brought back to earth
by the U. of Miami Frosh. Seeking revenge for an
earlier defeat, the Babv "Canes ran the tired Sea-
horses off the floor in a 113-95 victory. Kenne\' Kulp
\\'as high man for Broward with 23 points.

50

^>-^

-v 'J:

"You aren't stoppin' this kid," warns Bill Fauerbach as he
races by Edison opponent.

Rebounding from the Miami loss, the 'Horses
traveled to Lakeland to swamp the Baby Moccasins
of Florida Southern, 87-79. Hard pressed by the
Mocs, the Broward quintet led from the start, win-
ning their eleventh game. Gordon was high scorer
with 19 points, followed closely by Steve Cairns and
Bobby Kennedy, each with 18 points.

The Broward Seahorses continued their winning
ways in the season final against Palm Beach JC,
racking up a lop-sided 104-61 win. Bobby Kennedy
led the scoring parade with 31 points.

By virtue of their second place conference finish,
the Seahorses earned their first state tournament

berth. The opening round found Broward facing a
strong, experienced Chipola JC five. Cold shooting
and an ineffective fast break proved the 'Horses
downfall, as they lost, 66-79. If it's any consolation,
Chipola went on to win the state championship.

Although he couldn't kick. Coach Morris believed
we could have done better had the new gym been
completed. This, he said, would have given the
'Horses a practice court and a definite homecourt
advantage.

Next year, with a completed gym (it's gotta be
done by then) and six returnees, the Seahorses look
for an even better season. Returning are Bob Ken-
nedy, John Gordon, Greg Fitzpatrick, Bill Mande-
ville. Bill Fauerbach, and Mark Brier. Coach Morris
couldn't report any definite recruiting results, but if
he's as successful as he was last year, WATCH OUT!

Congratulations again, Seahorses, and good luck
next year.

SCORING STATISTICS

Player FG FT RB Total Average

Kulp 157 53 143 367 18.4

Gordon 116 81 180 313 15.6

Cairns 85 53 55 223 13.1

Jones 80 45 158 205 10.3

Kennedy 72 38 145 182 9.1

Mandeville 46 22 22 114 6.3

Hall 34 38 68 106 6.2

Hodges 38 26 9 102 6.0

Fauerbach 30 27 108 87 4.8

Fitzpatrick 26 10 13 62 4.4

Nealy 6 1 10 13 4.3

Allison 4 2 6 10 1.2

Brier 4 1 9 9 1.8

"Here I am!" Bob Kennedy waves frantically to Steve Cairns.

i

52

J

'ar^^

V

Chris Koutras (left) and Christine Johnson team up
for doubles.

Jane Hancock stretches for the return of a
high volley.

:'i^i''9i^*M

yH^-A: '-rr

TENNIS

Althougli usually referred to as "the weaker sex," the girls have been
showing up their male counterparts at JCBC in spring sports competition.
The girls' tennis team currently shows a five and zero chart, best of the
spring sports at the Junior College. They also own a first place tie in the
F.S.U. Invitational Tournament.

Their excellent record includes double victories over Palm Beach JC
(6-1, 7-0), and single victories over Miami-Dade (5-2), Marymount College
(5-2), and the U. of Miami (5-0).

In the F.S.U. Invitational, which included teams from many of the
South's major universities, the JCBC girls tied for first place with Rollins
College, each team finishing with twenty points. Stephanie DeFina, the
Seahorse-ettes(?) No. 1 player, took first place in the singles competition.

The remainder of the season includes matches with the U. of Miami
and Miami-Dade and the State Championships, April 15.

The men's tennis team isn't doing f|uite so well. At this time, they
have a one and four record with an 0-4 conference mark. Their lone
\ictory came in a "practice match" with Palm Beach JC.

The inexperienced (only two played high school tennis) Seahorses have
lost twice to Edison JC (2-4, 2-4), Miami-Dade (0-9), and Palm Beach
JC (3-4).

The rest of their season includes a match with Palm Beach JC on
April 1, and two tournaments — the Florida State Championships at Cape
Coral, April 22, 23, and the Florida junior College Championships, May
4, 5, 6.

Jim Tucker keeps his eye on the ball as he attempts
to make a forehand drive.

{

wm

iMJm %^

tJ£^^

.1^

GOLF

AftLT losins tluir first two matclics, the JCBC links-
men bouneed Ixiek to win their last fonr. IjrinRinK their
record to four wins and two losses.

Miami-Dade, last year's state junior college cham-
pions, beat the Seahorses by scores of 16-5 and 11-7.
The Broward linksmen then rebounded with a 9'2-2'-.;
N'ictory o\cr Palm Beach JC. Ba\ Isbell was medalist
with an eighteen-hole total of 71. Both Isbell antl Mike
Hines scored three points for their team.

The Seahorses evened their record to two antl two
with a 17-1 win o\cr Biscayne CollcRt'. Xe.\t, the JCBG
golfers did a repeat performance, romping o\er Indian
Ri%er JC, 17-1. This time Hal Hutchinson was low man
with a 74 total, followed by Hines, who had a 76.
Their next victim was Edison JC, who fell I'^k-Wz.
Hutchinson led this win with a S-O \ictory in the No. I
match.

Their matches are scored by the Nassau S\stem. The
golfers compete on a match play basis, scoring a point
for winning either the front or the back nine. If tlir\
win both, they earn an extra point, making a maximum
individual score of three. Normally only four golfers
compete, but in several matches this >'car the Seahorses
have used more, accounting for the higher .scores.

The rest of the season includes three major tourna-
ments. There is the Florida collegiate tournament, at
Gainesville, the Florida Jimior College Championships
at Coral Gables, April 14 and 1.5, and the National
Junior College Championships at Miami, June 7-10.

Hal Hutchison and his sand wedge blast from a trap.

Don Schroeder lines up a putt.

Top row: Bob Goldin, Ray Isbell, Jim Lyford, Bob Stacey, Jerry Rasmussen.
Bottom row: Mike Hines, Hal Hutchison, Donald Schroeder.

'?/

firn.

^

■^->

55

Head Coach Leroy Wheat

he spring, they say a young
fancy turns to girls and
ill. How much of their fancy
rned to girls, I can't say, but
lung men of the JCBC base-
eam have definitely turned
ancy to baseball — and quite
sfully, too. As this magazine
:o press, the Seahorses own

an eleven and one chart, with a
five and one conference mark.

Wlien interviewed before the
season, Coach Leroy Wheat said
his team ought to be strong con-
tenders for the state championship.
Looks like his prediction is com-
ing true. So far, the Seahorses own
triple wins over Dick Howser's

Baseball School, double victories
over Palm Beach JC, U. of Miami
Freshmen, and Edison JC, and
single wins over Indian River JC
and a squad of Yankee farmhands.
Their lone loss came at the hands
of Indian River.

Coach Wheat's charges boast
strong pitching, sizzling bats, and

Dodging the catcher's

spikes, Bruce Kinder slides

safely home

"Comin' in knee-high, goin' out sky-high," hopes Jim Gurzynski

an exciting defense. Coach Wheat
is overjoyed at his pitching staff,
saying "it's real good for this time
of year." At the plate, the Sea-
horses got off to a rather slow
start, but are sizzling now. Lead-
ing the surge are Bob Martin,
Bruce Kinder, Bill Adelman, and
Paul Buzzella. Coach Wheat's a

bit disappointed at the defense,
but said that it's improving and
that it "ought to be exciting to
watch." We're not quite sure what
he meant by that last remark.

Not all is peaches and cream in
the Seahorse camp though. In-
juries have slowed the team a
little bit. Adelman had a bad knee

and Alan Morell suffered an in-
fected leg. Problems have also
come from another source — tlie
Junior College Baseball Commis-
sion. It seems there is some ques-
tion as to the eligibilit>' of three
players — Adelman, Gary Bryce,
and Larry Sanders. Coach Wheat
is awaiting a decision with crossed
fingers.

itt

Jim Bryce rounds third
on his way to another
Seahorse score

m

'-**-

^P^

^

*'• \

!r~l|ki..i

\

Don Newhouser grimaces
as he uncorks a fastball

V

■=-v*.. ^1

57

THE
JUDO
CLUB

^ ^ ^

<!

58

DON'T ever say JCBC isn't a cosmopolitan
college, for now a little bit of that isle of
Japan has been transplanted to the
campus. This is in reference to that ancient and
honorable sport of jujitsu or judo.

Established to promote interest in the manual
arts, especially judo, sportsmanship, competitive
ability, and physical development, the Judo Club
is in its first year of organized activities.

The club gives planned demonstrations to
various church groups. Boy Scout troops, and
clubs throughout the area as well as engaging in
intercollegiate competition.

In their only dual meet to date, the Broward
Judoakas, or judo men, fell to Miami-Dade JC.
At the Florida State Tournament in Gainesville,
Club President John Craddock placed fourth in his
division. The club is scheduled to compete in a
tournament in Coral Gables on March 15th and is
trying to line up a few other matches.

Craddock holds a first degree brown belt in
both judo and karate and another club member,
Bill Bancroft, owns a karate black belt.

The club is composed of fourteen members.
Other officers besides Craddock include Ray
Shoaff, Vice-President, Ghet Meisner, Secretary,
and Dave Richardson, Treasurer. The club
sponsor is Mr. David Factor.

I

A Look at the Future

by Ann Bardsley

SEVEN years ago, the Junior College of Brow-
ard County began.
It started with a piece of paper, an au-
thorization by the state legislature to build a junior
college at Fort Lauderdale, Florida. A few months
later, an advisory board was appointed, and then, in
the spring of 1960, a president, Joe B. Rushing, of
Texas.

When he took office on April 7, Dr. Rushing was
the president of a college that existed only on paper.
By August 30, the Junior College of Broward County
had moved into temporary quarters at the old Fort
Lauderdale naval air station barracks, and had
opened its doors to nearly seven hundred students.
The students and faculty of the little college endured
the old military buildings for three years. Then, in
1963, the JCBC moved out to its big, breezy, 152
acre campus. There, a nucleus of seven buildings,
Administration, Data Processing, Physical Educa-
tion, Library, Technical Laboratories, and a Student
Center were ready for occupancy.

In this year of 1966 there are approximately 3000
students attending the junior college, and they are
taught by a faculty of 130, all with masters or doc-
torate degrees. To the seven original buildings have
been added a faculty office building, classroom build-
ing, a two hundred seat lecture theatre, fine arts
center, a gymnasium, and a modern planetarium.
When the gymnasium is opened, phase two of the
building program at JCBC will be completed.

In the immediate future is Phase III of the build-
ing program at JCBC. Plans already on the drawing
board call for three buildings to be begun in 1967.
These will be a classroom building, central receiving
center, and a much-waited-for cafeteria.

The proposed two-story classroom building will
house the Medical Technology, Nursing, Medical
Assisting, Police Science, and Business Administra-
tion departments. Included in the facility will be
laboratories for the medical program, drafting, and
photography.

The central receiving center will have space for
unloading and loading, storage, campus security, and
for the maintenance and custodial equipment, as
well as offices for the custodians and engineers and
for the Dean of Administration.

The planned Hospitality Center will reward the
students of JCBC for their many years of patience
with adequate food facilities. The new student center
will be a two-story structure costing one and one-
half million dollars.

Most of the ground floor of the center will be used
for a huge modern cafeteria. There will be a main
cafeteria room for students and a faculty dining

59

room separated by soundproof partitions. The main
serving line will handle soups, salads, and hot and
cold meals, and a snack bar will dispense drinks, ice
creams, and snacks. A conveyor belt for dishes, stor-
age and refrigeration rooms, and a modern kitchen
and bakery will insure a fresh, plentiful, and appetiz-
ing variety of food for the student. Many part-time
jobs will be available in the cafeteria.

The ground floor will also have offices for the
counseling staff. Student Government, and the stu-
dent publications staffs. Movable partitions in the
cafeteria and student lounge area will make it pos-
sible to use the building for small and large meet-
ings, banquets, and assemblies.

Upstairs, the hospitality center will have four
hotel rooms with baths, a conference room, two class
rooms, and offices for the cafeteria manager and the
Hotel-Motel Administration department. Mr. Ray
Dietrich, director of the Hotel-Motel program at
JCBC, explained that the hotel rooms and a model
hotel office will be used as laboratories for his
growing department, and can also be used to accom-
modate guests of the college. Much of the space in
the building can be adapted to a variety of uses, he
said, so that the Hospitality Center can be used at
its maximum efficiency.

What is the outlook for the more distant future?
The campus will fill up with still more buildings, as
many as thirty-five of them. They may include, for
the Physical Education department, an Olympic size
swimming pool and a bov/ling alley. The Aviation
department may have as many as fifteen planes,
with hangars and classrooms, at the airport. Also
planned are an Auditorium, Music building, Audio-
Visual center, Technical Education center, and Hor-
ticulture facility. When it is completed, about 1972,
JCBC will have cost the state, local, and possibly
Federal governments an estimated ten million
dollars.

For the present, Dr. Harvey Oates, Dean of Ad-
ministration, is making efforts to alleviate some of
the more irritating features of campus life. Ten
thousand dollars has been appropriated to improve
the drainage which causes a moat around the Class-
room building after a heavy rain. Although money
for landscaping is difficult to obtain, some landscap-
ing will be done to protect floors and delicate
equipment from the sweeping sands. To ease the
serious food problem. Dr. Oates has promised hot
food service next fall. Simply prepared stews, soups,
and sandwiches will be available during the lunch
hours on the ground floor of the HPR building.

Perhaps more important than buildings and equip-
ment is the intellectual future of the college.

Broward started off with nothing, but in six years
she has become one of the top ten junior colleges in
the nation. The prominence JCBC has achieved in so
short a time reflects favorably not only on the stu-
dents and faculty of the college, but also upon the
community that supports the school. In return,
Broward has the duty to lead and to serve as the
cultural leader of the community.

"Fort Lauderdale," according to Dr. Harvey Oates,
"has the 'makings' of a fine community." He men-
tioned that Fort Lauderdale is one of the smallest
cities in the country to support its own symphony
orchestra. Broward, he said, has a responsibility to
educate the community. He sees the college as a
place where the free exchange of ideas and of both

%*j

Ir^fc' "^ifc -H»*- ^1'. -^J "i^ *
\- "^^ W^ i?s& •an nJ*

1 E Z^S ^ J

60

i

new and time-tested concepts form the intellectual
and cultural base of the community.

Dean Edward Kotchi points to another facet of
Broward's responsibility for community service. In
addition to its university parallel program, JCBC
has many students taking terminal courses which
will place them in the main stream of business life
after a two year professional course. Graduates with
an associate degree in a terminal program fill a
crying need for skilled, non-professional technicians.
They are sought by doctors, architects, engineers,
and researchers. As policemen, builders, managers,
they have special training which puts them above
the herd, and raises the quality of their occupation.
Of particular importance, says Dean Kotchi, is the

value of the junior college in attracting new business
to the area. Companies are anxious to move into
areas where they are assured of trained workers,
and the facility for training more. Dean Kotchi
emphasized that college must not produce "mere me-
chanics." They must, he said, be well rounded people
who are capable of working with engineers and
physicists, and of keeping up with advances and
changes in his field.

What lies ahead for the college? With an en-
thusiastic community, skilled faculty, a wide variety
of courses, the finest possible facilities in which to
teach them, and its avowed duty to lead and serve
the community, the future that lies ahead of Brow-
ard looks bright indeed.

i

i» •? t -1H'#* f-i^ 1*-^

"^ -i: * -• JPt ^^ »- °

61

i--^'*^-!:;'*' > ,m--

>-■

!«•..- *■

-aM«>

^^^#^w^ •■

S. G. A

MfUC

««»

»f.

^T^:M:E^UkE:. THE MAfi

'■-'•.■■■';?;:■••: •'<'"!"':l'-;!;'Wo6dCutl)y "

:H.:■;^;l;^..V^::■::ii]9J^Branner . ,■ ■

From pv^r the jmpuhtains of yesterday,
through; tt^ei galley si of tbiday , I can
sep ahothet ipoiirit' anead whose peak dloes
beacon stalwiart he^rtis; a challenge hot
unheard. • ';. ,

A golden hue basks, ithe peak as the sun
creeps. up from beyc^nd the horizon to
watch the cuiJipus creatures on earth
spend another ,day Advancing toward an :
unknown end; ■; !:|; ; V

And so it is as X-al^Q climb the moun-
tains of ipy mitta;-f6r as I reach the .
summit thereinjjl turn toward th(^e of
yesterday, acfosis whose reach my shadow
spansand I heat ithe echo bright ana keen
: . ;i.l. what mciasure! — the. man ... »

'rrl.^l^^:^:■!^''^^wmn

liv K1

'1

M

iliir^j

A

t+s"-

i'^-^irf

THE poor in America are
the twenty per cent of our
population that the rest of
the nation never sees. Somehow,
in this land of abundance, one in
five of its citizens lives a life of
never ending need, cultural iso-
lation, and despair. IN THE
MIDST OF PLENTY, by Ben
H. Bagdikian, is a newspaperman's
report on poverty in America.

Each chapter of this disturbing
book deals with another kind of
poverty, hidden away among the
slums of the cities and the leaking
shacks of the countryside. The
poor, migrant workers, slum dwel-
lers, derelicts, a starving pension-
er, and miners and farmers strug-
gling with an exhausted land, tell
their stories in their own words.
With the exception of the skidrow
derelicts, their poverty is not their
fault. They long to escape from
their misery, and they all hope for
something better for their chil-
dren, but for these human beings,
poverty is a way of life they will
never escape.

The author corrects, one by
one, our misconceptions about
American poverty, and explains
why the Horatio Alger tradition
just doesn't work any more. Ac-
cording to Bagdikian, the worst
effect of poverty in modern Amer-
ica is that it isolates the poor
from the mainstream of American
culture. They have no opportunity
to see how the more prosperous
people live, for the rich and the
middle class live far away from
the East Side and Tobacco Road.
Lacking political power, they have
substandard schools and utilities.

Surrounded by poverty, the
poor man's child goes to school
for as long as his clothes hold out,
with the children of other poor
men. When he can no longer af-
ford school he drops out to look
for the unskilled job that he may
or may not find, and the cycle
goes on.

For anyone who wonders what
the war on poverty and social
welfare legislation are all about,
IN THE MIDST OF PLENTY
is recommended reading.

In the vocabulary of my native
New England, there are three
sacred words: Boston, money, and
Harvard.

The economics books of this
generation have endeavored to
prove to us that money is intrinsi-

Ann Bardsley

cally worthless. Several years ago
a very proper Bostonian wrote a
funny book about his fellow prop-
er Bostonians called (you guessed
it) THE PROPER BOSTON-
IANS. When New England recov-
ered from that blow, there was
but one more institution left to
puncture. An lowan named Rich-
ard Bissell (Harvard '36) has
done the job on his alma mater.

YOU CAN ALWAYS TELL A
HARVARD MAN is a humorous,
rambling history of America's old-
est college, digressing into discus-
sions of customs, anecdotes, per-
sonalities, and skeletons in the
closet. The undergraduate days of
three of Harvard's most distin-
guished sons, Theodore and Frank-
lin D. Roosevelt, and John F.
Kennedy, are brought to rather
surprising light. Teddy Roosevelt,
says the author, was an outstand-

ing candidate for Freshman Odd-
ball of the Year.

The book, however, has two
faults. The author makes many
references to people, places, and
things that are meaningless to the
deprived masses who never went
to Harvard, and he thinks he is
screamingly funny. Mr. Bissell has
his moments of delightful humor,
but all too often his laugh-lines
are ponderous slapstick. Along
with Harvard indifference and the
Harvard accent there is a Har-
vard sense of humor that is re-
markable for its lack of subtlety,
and the book is its unfortunate
victim.

YOU CAN ALWAYS TELL A
HARVARD MAN is light and
pleasant reading for a quiet after-
noon in a leather chair at the
Harvard Club.

In the midst of all the popular
trivia about the medical profes-
sion, one book has come out
within the past year which has
real merit. INTERN, by "Doctor
X" is an anonymous physician's
diary of the most important year
of his career, one which he begins
as an awed student just out of
medical school, and ends as a
trained and confident healer.

The real life of a hospital in-
tern, as "Dr. X" paints it, bears
little resemblance to the dashing
hero on the TV set. His life is one
of constant pressure, little sleep,
and hardly any financial reward.
He has some successes, and some
heartbreaking failures, and there
are no pretty nurses around to
mop his brow.

Some of the horrible mistakes,
described in detail, that the in-
tern makes will make you vow
never to let one even take your
temperature. Yet, the book is re-
assuring, too, for the young doc-
tor regards his patients as human
beings and not, as the layman
suspects, merely as a broken arm
or an infected gall bladder.

64

^•^

^bi-LJ'^fc-

c

hange is inevitable. The high-
est position in our college's adminis-
tration has been vacated. To fill this
void during the interim period, our
Boards have selected an acting presi-
dent. W^e sincerely believe that he
has done well.

Representing the students of the
Junior College of Broward County,
the editors and staff of the Silver
Sands proudly dedicate Silver Sands
1965-66 to Dr. Jack D. Taylor as one
who with dignib.', leadership, and
wisdom is successfulK' fulfilling his
mission.

I

1

y